logiq 9 proprietary manual - 2294854-100, rev 9medsensor.ru/files/ge/us/logiq_9_sm.pdf · ge...

GE Healthcare

1/18/10GEHC_FRNT_CVR.FM

P R E L I M I N A R Y

LOGIQ™ 9

Basic Service Manual

Part Number: 2294853-100Revision: 14

GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

i

1/18/10PRECAUTIONS_AND_REV_AP R E L I M I N A R Y

Important Precautions

• THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.• IF A CUSTOMER’S SERVICE PROVIDER REQUIRES A LANGUAGE OTHER

THAN ENGLISH, IT IS THE CUSTOMER’S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TRANSLATION SERVICES.

• DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THIS SERVICE MANUAL HAS BEEN CONSULTED AND IS UNDERSTOOD.

• FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO THE SERVICE PROVIDER, OPERATOR OR PATIENT FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK, MECHANICAL OR OTHER HAZARDS.

• CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE N’EST DISPONIBLE QU’EN ANGLAIS.• SI LE TECHNICIEN DU CLIENT A BESOIN DE CE MANUEL DANS UNE AUTRE

LANGUE QUE L’ANGLAIS, C’EST AU CLIENT QU’IL INCOMBE DE LE FAIRE TRADUIRE.

• NE PAS TENTER D’INTERVENTION SUR LES ÉQUIPEMENTS TANT QUE LE MANUEL SERVICE N’A PAS ÉTÉ CONSULTÉ ET COMPRIS.

• LE NON-RESPECT DE CET AVERTISSEMENT PEUT ENTRAÎNER CHEZ LE TECHNICIEN, L’OPÉRATEUR OU LE PATIENT DES BLESSURES DUES À DES DANGERS ÉLECTRIQUES, MÉCANIQUES OU AUTRES.

• DIESES KUNDENDIENST-HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN ENGLISCHER SPRACHE.

• FALLS EIN FREMDER KUNDENDIENST EINE ANDERE SPRACHE BENÖTIGT, IST ES AUFGABE DES KUNDEN FÜR EINE ENTSPRECHENDE ÜBERSETZUNG ZU SORGEN.

• WARTEN SIE DIESES GERÄT NUR, WENN SIE DIE ENTSPRECHENDEN ANWWEISUNGEN IM KUNDENDIENST-HANDBUCH GELESEN HABEN UND NACHVOLLZIEHEN KÖNNEN.

• WIRD DIESE WARNUNG NICHT BEACHTET, SO KANN ES ZU VERLETZUNGEN DES KUNDENDIENSTTECHNIKERS, DES BEDIENERS ODER DES PATIENTEN DURCH ELEKTRISCHE SCHLÄGE, MECHANISCHE ODER SONSTIGE GEFAHREN KOMMEN.

WARNING(EN)

AVERTISSEMENT(FR)

WARNUNG(DE)


ii -


• ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SÓLO EXISTE EN INGLÉS.• SI ALGÚN PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS AJENO A GEHC SOLICITA UN IDIOMA

QUE NO SEA EL INGLÉS, LA TRADUCCIÓN ES RESPONSABILIDAD DEL CLIENTE.

• NO SE DEBERÁ DAR SERVICIO TÉCNICO AL EQUIPO, SIN HABER CONSULTADO Y COMPRENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO.

• LA NO OBSERVANCIA DEL PRESENTE AVISO PUEDE DAR LUGAR A QUE EL PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS, EL OPERADOR O EL PACIENTE SUFRAN LESIONES PROVOCADAS POR CAUSAS ELÉCTRICAS, MECÁNICAS O DE OTRA NATURALEZA.

• ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA SÓ SE ENCONTRA DISPONÍVEL EM INGLÊS.

• SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIÇO DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA, QUE NÃO A GEHC, SOLICITAR ESTES MANUAIS NOUTRO IDIOMA, É DA RESPONSABILIDADE DO CLIENTE FORNECER OS SERVIÇOS DE TRADUÇÃO.

• NÃO TENTE REPARAR O EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER CONSULTADO E COMPREENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA.

• O NÃO CUMPRIMENTO DESTE AVISO PODE POR EM PERIGO A SEGURANÇA DO TÉCNICO, OPERADOR OU PACIENTE DEVIDO A‘ CHOQUES ELÉTRICOS, MECÂNICOS OU OUTROS.

• IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE È DISPONIBILE SOLTANTO IN INGLESE.

• SE UN ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE ESTERNO ALLA GEHC RICHIEDE IL MANUALE IN UNA LINGUA DIVERSA, IL CLIENTE È TENUTO A PROVVEDERE DIRETTAMENTE ALLA TRADUZIONE.

• SI PROCEDA ALLA MANUTENZIONE DELL’APPARECCHIATURA SOLO DOPO AVER CONSULTATO IL PRESENTE MANUALE ED AVERNE COMPRESO IL CONTENUTO.

• NON TENERE CONTO DELLA PRESENTE AVVERTENZA POTREBBE FAR COMPIERE OPERAZIONI DA CUI DERIVINO LESIONI ALL’ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE, ALL’UTILIZZATORE ED AL PAZIENTE PER FOLGORAZIONE ELETTRICA, PER URTI MECCANICI OD ALTRI RISCHI.

• KÄESOLEV TEENINDUSJUHEND ON SAADAVAL AINULT INGLISE KEELES.• KUI KLIENDITEENINDUSE OSUTAJA NÕUAB JUHENDIT INGLISE KEELEST

ERINEVAS KEELES, VASTUTAB KLIENT TÕLKETEENUSE OSUTAMISE EEST. • ÄRGE ÜRITAGE SEADMEID TEENINDADA ENNE EELNEVALT KÄESOLEVA

TEENINDUSJUHENDIGA TUTVUMIST JA SELLEST ARU SAAMIST.• KÄESOLEVA HOIATUSE EIRAMINE VÕIB PÕHJUSTADA TEENUSEOSUTAJA,

OPERAATORI VÕI PATSIENDI VIGASTAMIST ELEKTRILÖÖGI, MEHAANILISE VÕI MUU OHU TAGAJÄRJEL.

AVISO(ES)

ATENÇÃO(PT)

AVVERTENZA (IT)

HOIATUS (ET)


iii


• ÞESSI ÞJÓNUSTUHANDBÓK ER EINGÖNGU FÁANLEG Á ENSKU.• EF ÞJÓNUSTUAÐILI VIÐSKIPTAMANNS ÞARFNAST ANNARS TUNGUMÁLS EN

ENSKU, ER ÞAÐ Á ÁBYRGÐ VIÐSKIPTAMANNS AÐ ÚTVEGA ÞÝÐINGU.• REYNIÐ EKKI AÐ ÞJÓNUSTA TÆKIÐ NEMA EFTIR AÐ HAFA SKOÐAÐ OG

SKILIÐ ÞESSA ÞJÓNUSTUHANDBÓK.• EF EKKI ER FARIÐ AÐ ÞESSARI VIÐVÖRUN GETUR ÞAÐ VALDIÐ MEIÐSLUM

ÞJÓNUSTUVEITANDA, STJÓRNANDA EÐA SJÚKLINGS VEGNA RAFLOSTS, VÉLRÆNNAR EÐA ANNARRAR HÆTTU.

VAROITUS (FI)

VIÐVÖRUN(IS)


iv -


• DENNE SERVICEMANUAL FINDES KUN PÅ ENGELSK.• HVIS EN KUNDES TEKNIKER HAR BRUG FOR ET ANDET SPROG END

ENGELSK, ER DET KUNDENS ANSVAR AT SØRGE FOR OVERSÆTTELSE.• FORSØG IKKE AT SERVICERE UDSTYRET MEDMINDRE

DENNE SERVICEMANUAL ER BLEVET LÆST OG FORSTÅET.• MANGLENDE OVERHOLDELSE AF DENNE ADVARSEL KAN MEDFØRE SKADE

PÅ GRUND AF ELEKTRISK, MEKANISK ELLER ANDEN FARE FOR TEKNIKEREN, OPERATØREN ELLER PATIENTEN.

• DEZE ONDERHOUDSHANDLEIDING IS ENKEL IN HET ENGELS VERKRIJGBAAR.

• ALS HET ONDERHOUDSPERSONEEL EEN ANDERE TAAL VEREIST, DAN IS DE KLANT VERANTWOORDELIJK VOOR DE VERTALING ERVAN.

• PROBEER DE APPARATUUR NIET TE ONDERHOUDEN VOORDAT DEZE ONDERHOUDSHANDLEIDING WERD GERAADPLEEGD EN BEGREPEN IS.

• INDIEN DEZE WAARSCHUWING NIET WORDT OPGEVOLGD, ZOU HET ONDERHOUDSPERSONEEL, DE OPERATOR OF EEN PATIËNT GEWOND KUNNEN RAKEN ALS GEVOLG VAN EEN ELEKTRISCHE SCHOK, MECHANISCHE OF ANDERE GEVAREN.

ADVARSEL(DA)

WAARSCHUWING(NL)


v


• DENNE SERVICEHÅNDBOKEN FINNES BARE PÅ ENGELSK.• HVIS KUNDENS SERVICELEVERANDØR TRENGER ET ANNET SPRÅK, ER DET

KUNDENS ANSVAR Å SØRGE FOR OVERSETTELSE.• IKKE FORSØK Å REPARERE UTSTYRET UTEN AT DENNE

SERVICEHÅNDBOKEN ER LEST OG FORSTÅTT.• MANGLENDE HENSYN TIL DENNE ADVARSELEN KAN FØRE TIL AT

SERVICELEVERANDØREN, OPERATØREN ELLER PASIENTEN SKADES PÅ GRUNN AV ELEKTRISK STØT, MEKANISKE ELLER ANDRE FARER.

ADVARSEL(NO)

OSTRZEŻENIE(PL)


vi -


• DEN HÄR SERVICEHANDBOKEN FINNS BARA TILLGÄNGLIG PÅ ENGELSKA.• OM EN KUNDS SERVICETEKNIKER HAR BEHOV AV ETT ANNAT SPRÅK ÄN

ENGELSKA ANSVARAR KUNDEN FÖR ATT TILLHANDAHÅLLA ÖVERSÄTTNINGSTJÄNSTER.

• FÖRSÖK INTE UTFÖRA SERVICE PÅ UTRUSTNINGEN OM DU INTE HAR LÄST OCH FÖRSTÅR DEN HÄR SERVICEHANDBOKEN.

• OM DU INTE TAR HÄNSYN TILL DEN HÄR VARNINGEN KAN DET RESULTERA I SKADOR PÅ SERVICETEKNIKERN, OPERATÖREN ELLER PATIENTEN TILL FÖLJD AV ELEKTRISKA STÖTAR, MEKANISKA FAROR ELLER ANDRA FAROR.

VARNING(SV)


vii


(JA)

(ZH-CN)

(KO)


viii -


DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATIONAll packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent write “Damage In Shipment” on ALL copies of the freight or express bill BEFORE delivery is accepted or “signed for” by a GE representative or hospital receiving agent. Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be reported to the carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any event, within 14 days after receipt, and the contents and containers held for inspection by the carrier. A transportation company will not pay a claim for damage if an inspection is not requested within this 14 day period.

CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT - FOR USA ONLYAll electrical Installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the equipment shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations and testing shall be performed by qualified GE Healthcare personnel. In performing all electrical work on these products, GE will use its own specially trained field engineers. All of GE’s electrical work on these products will comply with the requirements of the applicable electrical codes.

The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GE’s field engineers, personnel of third-party service companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to perform electrical servicing on the equipment.

OMISSIONS & ERRORSIf there are any omissions, errors or suggestions for improving this documentation, please contact the GE Healthcare Global Documentation Group with specific information listing the system type, manual title, part number, revision number, page number and suggestion details. Mail the information to: Service Documentation, 9900 Innovation Drive (RP-2123), Wauwatosa, WI 53226, USA.

GE Healthcare employees should use TRACKWISE to report all documentation errors or omissions.

SERVICE SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS

For a complete review of all safety requirements, see the Chapter 1, Safety Considerations section of the LOGIQ™ 9 Basic Service Manual (2294853-100).

DANGER DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH, ARE PRESENT IN THIS EQUIPMENT. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN HANDLING, TESTING AND ADJUSTING.

WARNINGWARNING Use all Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) such as gloves, safety shoes, safety glasses, and kneeling pad, to reduce the risk of injury.


ix


LEGAL NOTES

The contents of this publication may not be copied or duplicated in any form, in whole or in part, without prior written permission of GE Healthcare.

GE Healthcare may revise this publication from time to time without written notice.

TRADEMARKSAll products and their name brands are trademarks of their respective holders.

COPYRIGHTSAll Material Copyright© 2002-2010 by General Electric Company Inc. All Rights Reserved


x -


Revision History

List of Effected Pages(LOEP)

RevisionDate

(YYYY/MM/DD) Reason for change0 2002/04/08 Initial Release

1 2002/11/08 Update for BT’02 Release, BEP and FEP changes

2 2003/04/04 Update for R2.1.1 Release and hardware changes

3 2003/10/23 Update for R3.0 Release and hardware changes

4 2004/09/15 Update for R4.0 Release, BEP3, 4D option, CW option

5 2004/11/13 Update for R4.1.0

6 2005/10/25 M3 Update for R6.x release, Added Legal Page, Cover Revision, Flat Monitor, TD Board changes

7 2005/11/21 Update for R6.0.5O.

8 2006/07/25 Update for R7.x release. Added DVR, hardware changes. Release for MS

9 2006/08/01 Update for R7.x release. Release for M3

10 2006/09/06 Update for R7.x release.

11 2007/12/04 Update for R7.x, branding cover updates, additional precaution languages, 19” LCD, BEP4.x, FRU numbers, R7.x baseload instructions.

12 2009/05/27 Update for R9.x

13 2010/01/15 Update for IE6 60601-1-6

14 2010/10/12 Updated for removal of CE Mark

Pages Revision Pages Revision Pages Revision

Title Page N/AChapter 2 - Site Preparation

pages 2-1 to 2-1014

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting

pages 7-1 to 7-3414

Important Precautionspages i to iv

14Chapter 3 - System Setup

pages 3-1 to 3-2614

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures

pages 8-1 to 8-9814

Rev History/LOEPpages v to x

14Chapter 4 - Functional Checks

pages 4-1 to 4-2814

Chapter 9 - Renewal Partspages 9-1 to 9-72

14

Table of Contentspages ix to xxxiii

14Chapter 5 - Components and

Functions (Theory)pages 5-1 to 5-98

14Chapter 10 - Care & Maintenance

pages 10-1 to 10-3014

Chapter 1 - Introductionpages 1-1 to 1-24

14Chapter 6 - Service Adjustments

pages 6-1 to 6-1814

Indexpages I to IV

14

Back Cover N/A


xi Table of Contents

1/18/10L9_TOC.FMP R E L I M I N A R Y

CHAPTER 1Introduction

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1Purpose of Chapter 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1Purpose of Service Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1

Service Manual Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 2Contents in this Service Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 2Typical Users of the Basic Service Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 2LOGIQ™ 9 Models Covered by this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 3Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 4

Overview of the Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 4History - Hardware/Software versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 7History - Peripherals/Software versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 7FRUs for Back End Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 7History - Supported Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 7How to Turn the Scanner On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 7How to Check for Hardware/Software version and Installed Options 1 - 7Product Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 8Purpose of Operator Manual(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 8

Important Conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 9Conventions Used in Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 9

Model Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 9Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 9Safety Precaution Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 9

Standard Hazard Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 10Product Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 11

Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 16Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 16Human Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 16Mechanical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 16Electrical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 17

Safe Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 17Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 18

Labels Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 18

Table of Contents

GE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

xii Table of Contents


Dangerous Procedure Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 18

Battery Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 20

Lockout/Tagout Requirements (For USA Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 21

Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 21

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 22What is EMC? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 22Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 22Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 22

Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 23Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 23System Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 24


Table of Contents xiii


CHAPTER 2Site Preparation

Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1Purpose of Chapter 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1

General Console Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2Console Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2

Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2

Electrical Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2LOGIQ™ 9 Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2Inrush Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2Site Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 3Site Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 3Unit Power Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 3Power Stability Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 3

EMI Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 4Scan Probe Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 5Time and Manpower Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 5

Facility Needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 6Purchaser Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 6Required Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 7Desirable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 7Minimal Floor Plan Suggestion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 8Networking Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 9

Stand Alone Scanner (without Network Connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 9Scanner Connected to Hospital’s Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 9Purpose of the DICOM Network Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 9DICOM Option Pre-installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 9InSite Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 9


xiv Table of Contents


CHAPTER 3System Setup

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1The Purpose of Chapter 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1

Set Up Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2Average Set Up Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2Set Up Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2

Brake Pedal Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2Operator I/O Panel Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2

Safety Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3

Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 4

Preparing for Set Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 6Verify Customer Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 6Physical Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 6

System Voltage Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 6Rating Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 6ETL Testing Laboratories Safety Rating Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 7Video Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 7

EMI Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 7

Completing the Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 8Power On / Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 8

Scanner Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 8Back-end Processor Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9

Power Off / Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9Back-end Processor Power Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9Scanner Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 10

Transducer Connection and Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 10

System Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11System Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11

Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11Console Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11Acoustic Noise Output: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11

Electrical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11On-Board Optional Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 12External I/O Connector Panel (Back of system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 13

External I/O Pin Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 15Other I/O Ports (Front of system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 17Video Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 20


Table of Contents xv


Available Probes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 21

Software/Option Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 21

Connectivity Setup Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 22

Before Starting a Software Upgrade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 23

Loading Base Image Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 23

Loading Application Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 23

System Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 23

Connecting USB Line Printers - Black/White and Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 24Printer Set Up (R4.x and later) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 24Printer Set Up (R2.x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 24

To Set Up Printer Before Installing Application Software . . . . . . . . . 3 - 24

Paperwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 25Product Locator Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 25User Manual(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 25

Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 26


xvi Table of Contents


CHAPTER 4Functional Checks

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1Purpose of Chapter 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1Required Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1

General Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 2System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 3

Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 3Touch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 4Monitor Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 5

Power On / Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 6To Connect Mains Power to the Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 6To Boot Up Back End Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 7

Standby Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 8To Place System in Standby Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 8To Wake the System from Standby Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 8

Power Off / Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 9To Power Off Back-End Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 9To Shut Down Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 10

Probe/Connectors Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11To Connect a Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11To Activate a Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11To Deactivate a Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11To Disconnect a Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11

Using CINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12To Activate CINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12To Omit Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12To Restore Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12To Move Quickly to Start/End Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12To Start Frame/End Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12To Adjust the CINE Loop Playback Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12To Disconnect B-Mode CINE from Timeline CINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12To Move through a CINE Loop Frame By Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12

Image Management Quick Guide / User Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 13System B/M-Mode Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 14System CFM and PWD Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 15Basic Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 16

To Measure Distance and Tissue Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 16To Measure Circumference/Area (Ellipse) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 16Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 17Report Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 17

The MOD (Magnetic Optical Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 18


Table of Contents xvii


For BT03 and prior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 18For BT04 and later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 19Using the MOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 21

USB Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 22Backup and Restore Database, Preset Configurations and Images . . . . . 4 - 22

Software Configuration Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 23

Peripheral Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 24

Mechanical Function Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 25Operator I/O Movement - Standard Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 25Operator I/O Movement - 17” LCD (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 26Operator I/O Movement - 19” LCD (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 27Brakes and Direction Locks Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 28Site Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 28


xviii Table of Contents


CHAPTER 5Components and Functions (Theory)

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1Purpose of Chapter 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 5Dataflow Control Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 6

Data Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 6

Front End Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 7Front End Processor Power Supply Board (FEPS, FEPS2, FEPS2.1) . . . . 5 - 8FEPS3.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 8Front End Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 9

XDIF (Transducer Interface) Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 9Top Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 9RF Amp, RF Amp1.2, RF Amp2 Board

(Radio Frequency Amplifier Board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 10TD, TD4, TD5.x, TD6 (Time Delay) Boards (8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 11

Scan Control Board (SCB, SCB2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 13SCB, SCB2 High Level Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 14Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 14Scan Control Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 14

Equalization (EQ) Board (component of EBM Board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 16General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 16Basic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 17

B/M Mode Processor (BMP) Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 18General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 18

EBM, EBM2 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 19Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 19Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 19EBM/EBM2 Interface with XDIF relay board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 20B–Mode Output Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 21M–Mode Output Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 21

Back End Processor (BEP 1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 22Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 23PCI Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 23AGP Video Card - SVGA Video to the PCVIC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 23PCIO Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 23PCI Video Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 23UPS Battery Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 24Internal Storage Devices: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 24


Table of Contents xix


Location of the Back End Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 24Inputs (BEP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 25

AC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 25DC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 25Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 25Bi-directional Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 25

Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 26

Back End Processor (BEP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 27Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 28PCI Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 28AGP Video Card - DVI Video to the DGVIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 28PCIO Board: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 28PCVIC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 28DGVIC, DGIO and ADD Cards BEP 2.1 (BT’02, November 2002) . . . . . . 5 - 29Additional Memory (RAM) (BT’03, October 2003) - BEP2.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 29DGVIC/DGIO Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 29UPS Battery Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 29Internal Storage Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 29Location of the Back End Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 30Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 31

AC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 31DC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 31Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 31Bi-directional Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 32USB to Serial Adapter Cable Setup

(RS232 Serial Port Connector on the External I/O) . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 32Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 33

Back End Processor (BEP 3.x). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 34Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 35PCI Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 35AGP Video Card - DVI Video to the DGVIC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 35PCI DGVIC and ADD Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 35UPS Battery Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 35Internal Storage Devices: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 36Location of the Back End Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 36Inputs (BEP 3.x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 37

AC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 37DC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 37Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 37Bi-directional Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 37

Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 38


xx Table of Contents


Back End Processor (BEP 4.x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 39Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 40PCI Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 40AGP Video Card - DVI Video to the DGVIC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 40PCI DGVIC2 and ADD2 Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 40UPS Battery Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 40Internal Storage Devices: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 41Location of the Back End Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 41Inputs (BEP 4.x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 42

AC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 42DC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 42Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 42Bi-directional Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 42

Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 43

BEP Power On Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 44

BEP Power Off Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 45

Operator Console Control PWA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 46Console Main Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 47

Main Cable Connector Functions - Prior to BT04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 47Main Cable Connectors with Pinouts - Prior to BT04 . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 48Main Cable Connector Functions - BT04 and after . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 51Main Cable Connectors with Pinouts - BT04 and after (5119218) . . 5 - 52

Patient I/O (Currently not supported by the LOGIQ™ 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 54

Internal I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 55Location in the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 58LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 58Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 58Jumpers and Dip-switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 58Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 59

DC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 59Video Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 59Audio Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 59Serial Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 60Control Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 60

Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 61DC Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 61AUDIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 61Connectors – Solder Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 61Interface Connectors – Component Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 62


Table of Contents xxi


Top Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 63

Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 64

External I/O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 65Location in the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 65Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 65Bi-directional Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 66Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 67

Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 68

Modem and USB Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 69General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 69Location in the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 69Inputs/Outputs (non-USB Modem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 69Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 69Jumpers and Dip-switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 69LEDs (non-USB Modem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 70

Power Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 71AC Power Distribution Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 72AC Power PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 72AC Controller Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 74

Mechanical Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 76Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 76

Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 76Top Console Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 76

17” LCD (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 7719” LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 77

Wheels/Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 78

Air Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 79Air Flow Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 79

Service Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 79Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 79Global Service User Interface (GSUI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 80

Internationalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 80Service Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 80Access / Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 80

Service Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 81Error Logs Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 82


xxii Table of Contents


Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 83Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 84Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 84Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 85

Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 86Diagnostics Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 86Diagnostic Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 86

Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 87Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 87Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 88Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 89Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 89Planned Maintenance (PM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 90

4D Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 91Principle of Volume Acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 914D Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 92

Motor Controller to Front Bracket Cable and 4D Probe Cable . . . . . 5 - 92USB to Motor Controller Cable and Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 94Motor Controller to Internal I/O Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 95

Continuous Wave Doppler Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 96Continuous Wave Doppler Signal Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 96

PCI CW Doppler PWA card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 97Internal CW Doppler Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 97Probe Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 97Mu Metal Shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 97


Table of Contents xxiii


CHAPTER 6Service Adjustments


Regulatory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1

Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 2Monitor Adjustment (Standard only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 2

Degauss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 2Brightness and Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 3Visible Image Display Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 4

Monitor Tilt (Standard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 4Monitor Tilt Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 4Monitor Counter-balance Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 4Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 4Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 4Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 5

Monitor Adjustment (17” LCD Option Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 6Brightness and Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 6Angularity Test Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 6Color Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 6

Monitor Adjustment (19” LCD Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 7Brightness and Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 7Angularity Test Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 7Color Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 7

Panel Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 8

Z-Release Cable and Gas Spring Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 8Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 8Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 8Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 8Z-Release Cable Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 9

Checking the Release System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 9Cable Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 10

Cable Adjustment at Gas Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 10Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 10Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 11

Emergency Release Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 12Procedure Completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 12

Brake Arm Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 13


xxiv Table of Contents


Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 13Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 13Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 13Brake Arm Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 14Procedure Completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 14

Brake Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 15Front Wheel Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 15

Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 15Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 15Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 15Front Brake Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 15

Rear Wheel Brakes Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 16Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 16Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 16Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 16Rear Wheel Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 17Rear Wheel Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 17


Table of Contents xxv


CHAPTER 7Diagnostics/Troubleshooting


Service Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 2

Gathering Trouble Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 3Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 3Collecting Vital System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 3Collecting a Trouble Image with Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 4Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 6

Screen Captures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 13Check and Record the P4 Key Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 13Setting the P4 Key to Screen Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 14Capturing a Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 15Reset the P4 Key to Customer’s Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 16Ctrl-PrintScreen Shortcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 17

To Capture a Screen Image Using the Shortcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 17

Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 18

Acquisition Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 19Diagnostic Listings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 21

Calibration Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 23

I/O Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 24Launching the Op Panel Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 24

Trackball Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 25Keyboard Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 26Slidepots Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 26Encoders Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 27Pushbuttons Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 27LEDs Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 28Touchscreen Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 28Ending the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 29

Common Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 30Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 30

Disruptive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 30System Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 30


xxvi Table of Contents


PC Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 31Non-Interactive Tests - BT04 and earlier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 31Non-Interactive Tests - BT06, BT07, BT09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 31

PC Diagnostics (Interactive Tests) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 32

Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 33Dicom Verify Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 33

Hard Drive Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 34


Table of Contents xxvii


CHAPTER 8Replacement Procedures

Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1Purpose of Chapter 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1Definitions of Left, Right, Front and Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 2Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 3

Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 4Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 4Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 4Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 4Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 4Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure - BEP 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 5Battery Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 6

Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 7Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 7Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 7Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 7Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 7Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure - BEP 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 8Battery Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 9

Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 3 / BEP 3.5. . . . . . . . 8 - 10Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 10Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 10Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 10Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 10Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure - BEP 3 / BEP 3.5 . . . . 8 - 12Battery Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 12

Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 4.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 13Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 13Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 13Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 13Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure - BEP 4.x . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 13Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure - BEP 4.x . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 16Battery Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 16

Before Starting a Software Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 17Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 17


xxviii Table of Contents


Save Connectivity Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 17DICOM TCPIP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 17

Image Management Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 18Managing Patient Data and Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 18

Patient Images and Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 18Preset Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 18Backup Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 18

EZBackup/Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 19User-Defined Backup Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 22

Loading Base Image Software - R4.x.x and prior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 26Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 26

To Prepare to Load Base Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 26Base Image Load Procedure - R4.x.x and prior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 28

Loading Base Image Software - R6.x.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 33

Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 38

Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 44Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 44

Loading Application Software - R6.x.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 49Loading Applications Software - R6.x.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 49Wired VoiceScan Speaker Assignment - R6.x.x, R7.x.x, and R9.x.x . . . . . . 8 - 54

Loading Application Software - R7.x.x or Later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 56Loading Applications Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 56Functional Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 60

Generic Application Software - Upgrade Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 61Application Software Upgrade Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 61Functional Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 64

System Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 65To Complete the System Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 65VCR Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 65DVR Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 65Printer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 65Print Key Assignment and Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 66Restore Patient, Report, and User-Defined Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 66Cycle System Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 67Standby Operation Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 68


Table of Contents xxix


To Place the System in the Standby Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 68To Wake the System from Standby Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 68

Functional Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 69

Console Lock Assembly Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 70Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 70Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 70Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 70Console Lock Assembly Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 71Console Lock Assembly Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 71

Release Lock Assembly Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 72Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 72Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 72Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 72Release Lock Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 72Release Lock Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 73

Gas Shock Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 74Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 74Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 74Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 74Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 75Top Tray Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 76

Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 76Gas Shock Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 78Install the New Gas Shock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 81Reassemble Z-Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 83

Gas Spring Wirecable Replacement Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 86Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 86Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 86Wirecable Removal Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 86Wirecable Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 88Wirecable Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 90

Frog Leg Angle Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 92Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 92Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 92Kit Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 92Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 92Frog Leg Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 92Functional Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 95


xxx Table of Contents


CHAPTER 9

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1Purpose of Chapter 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1LOGIQ™ 9 Models Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 2

List of Abbreviations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 3

Console View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 4

External Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 5

Additional Console Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 7

Operator I/O Mechanical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 9Bumper Kit, Frogleg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 12

Operator Control Panel Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 13

Gas Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 14

Monitor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 16CRT Monitor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 16Monitor Assembly - 17” LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 17Monitor Assembly - 19” LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 18

Operator Control Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 20Upper Op Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 20Lower Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 22Lower Op Panel - Buttons and Knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 24

Front End Processor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 26

I/O Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 32

3-D Externals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 34

Back End Processor Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 35BEP 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 35BEP 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 36BEP 3.x / 4.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 38

Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 41

Interconnect Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 44


Table of Contents xxxi


Peripheral Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 44Peripheral Cable - Analog Color Printer with BEP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 48Peripheral Cable - USB Printer Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 49AC Distribution Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 50

Power Distribution Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 61

Air Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 62

Voice Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 63Voice Scan Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 65

4D Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 66

Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 67

Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 68

Customer Documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 69

Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 70


xxxii Table of Contents


CHAPTER 10Care & Maintenance

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1Purpose of Chapter 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1

Why do Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2Keeping Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2Quality Assurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2

Maintenance Task Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2How often should care & maintenance tasks be performed? . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2

Tools Required. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 4

Special Tools, Supplies and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 4Specific Requirements for Care & Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 4

System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 5Preliminary Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 5Functional Checks (See Also Chapter 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 6

System Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 6Peripheral/Option Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 7

Input Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 7Mains Cable Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 7

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 8General Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 8Air Filter Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 8

Physical Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 9Optional Diagnostic Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 9

View the Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 9Probe Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10

Probe Related Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10Basic Probe Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10Basic Probe Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10

Using a Phantom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10

Electrical Safety Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 11Safety Test Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 11GE Healthcare Leakage Current Limits for LOGIQ™ 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 12Outlet Test - Wiring Arrangement - USA & Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 13Grounding Continuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 14

Meter Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 14


Table of Contents xxxiii


Chassis Leakage Current Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 15Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 15Generic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 16Data Sheet for Chassis Source Leakage Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 17

Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage–Lead to Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 17Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 17Generic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 18

Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage–Lead to Lead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 19Isolated Patient Lead (Sink) Leakage-Isolation Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 19

Data Sheet for ECG Leakage Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 20Probe Leakage Current Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 21

Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 21Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 21Generic procedure on Leakage Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 23Meter procedure using probe adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 23Meter Procedure Using Probe Adapter to Measure Probe

Isolation (Sink) Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 25

When There's Too Much Leakage Current... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 27ULTRASOUND INSPECTION CERTIFICATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 28

Site Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 29


xxxiv Table of Contents


P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Chapter 1 Introduction 1-1

1/18/10CHAPTER1.FM

Chapter 1Introduction

Section 1-1Overview

1-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 1This chapter describes important issues related to safely servicing the LOGIQ™ 9 scanner. The service provider must read and understand all the information presented in this manual before installing or servicing a unit.

1-1-2 Purpose of Service ManualThis Service Manual provides installation and service information for the LOGIQ™ 9 Ultrasound Scanning System.

Table 1-1 Contents in Chapter 1

Section Description Page Number

1-1 Overview 1-1

1-2 Service Manual Overview 1-2

1-3 Important Conventions 1-9

1-4 Safety Considerations 1-16

1-5 Labels Locations 1-18

1-6 Dangerous Procedure Warnings 1-18

1-7 Battery Safety 1-20

1-8 Lockout/Tagout Requirements (For USA Only) 1-21

1-9 Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts 1-21

1-10 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) 1-22

1-11 Customer Assistance 1-23

P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

1-2 Section 1-2 - Service Manual Overview

1/18/10CHAPTER1.FM

Section 1-2Service Manual Overview

1-2-1 Contents in this Service Manual1.) Chapter 1 - Introduction: Contains a content summary and warnings.2.) Chapter 2 - Site Preparation: Contains pre-installation requirements for the LOGIQ™ 9.3.) Chapter 3 - System Setup: Contains installation procedures.4.) Chapter 4 - Functional Checks: Contains functional checks that are recommended as part of the

installation, or as required during servicing and periodic maintenance.5.) Chapter 5 - Components and Functions (Theory): Contains block diagrams and functional

explanations of the electronics.6.) Chapter 6 - Service Adjustments: Contains instructions on how to make available adjustments to

the LOGIQ™ 9.7.) Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting: Provides procedures for running diagnostic or related

routines for the LOGIQ™ 9.8.) Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures: Provides disassembly procedures and reassembly

procedures for all changeable Field Replaceable Units (FRU).9.) Chapter 9 - Renewal Parts: Contains a complete list of field replaceable parts for the LOGIQ™ 9.10.)Chapter 10 - Care & Maintenance: Provides periodic maintenance procedures for the LOGIQ™ 9.

1-2-2 Typical Users of the Basic Service Manual• Service Personnel (installation, maintenance, etc.)• Hospital’s Service Personnel• Contractors (Some parts of Chapter 2 - Pre-Installation)



1/18/10CHAPTER1.FM

1-2-3 LOGIQ™ 9 Models Covered by this Manual

Table 1-2 LOGIQ™ 9 Model Designations

Part Number Description

2188900 LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP1.0

2188900-2 LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP1.0

2188900-3 LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP1.0




2351100 LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.1 BT’02

2351100-2 LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.1 BT’02

2351100-3 LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP2.1 BT’02




2404587 LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP3 BT’04

2404587-2 LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP3 BT’04

2404587-3 LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP3 BT’04




5177000 LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP3.5/4.x BT’07 and BT’09*

5177000-2 LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP3.5/4.x BT’07 and BT’09*

5177000-3 LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP3.5/4.x BT’07 and BT’09*

*BT09 is a software-only upgrade



1/18/10CHAPTER1.FM

1-2-4 Product Description

1-2-4-1 Overview of the ProductLOGIQ™ 9 is a phased and linear array ultrasound imaging scanner. It has provisions for analog input sources like ECG and Phono. A Doppler probe may also be connected and used.

The system can be used for:

- B-Mode- M-Mode- Color Flow Mode (CFM)- Power Doppler Imaging (PDI) with topographic and directional maps- PW Doppler with high PRF- B-Flow Mode- M-Color Flow Mode, with B-Mode Gray Scale and Color Flow Imaging

LOGIQ™ 9 is a digital beamforming system. Signal flow travels from the Probe Connector Panel to the Front End Electronics, to the Back-End Processor, and finally displayed on the monitor and peripherals. System configuration is stored on the hard drive and all necessary software is loaded from the hard drive on power up.



1/18/10CHAPTER1.FM

1-2-4-1 Overview of the Product (cont’d)

Figure 1-1 LOGIQ™ 9 BT04 - Major Components

Front Bumper

Backend Processor Chassis

CD-ROM3.5” MOD

B/W Printer

Operator Console

Gel Warmer

Monitor Controls

Name Plate

Monitor (CRT)

Op. Panel Upper Bezel

Touchscreen/Display

TGC Slidepot Knobs

Front CoverVCR

Probe Connector

Swivel Lock

Brake Release

or DVD



1/18/10CHAPTER1.FM


Figure 1-2 LOGIQ™ 9 BT06 with 17” LCD Option - Major Components

Front Bumper

Backend Processor

CD-ROM

B/W Printer

Operator Console

Gel Warmer

Monitor Controls

Name Plate

17”LCD Monitor


Touchscreen/Display

TGC Slidepot Knobs

Front CoverVCR

Probe Connector

Swivel Lock Brake Release

or DVD

Subwoofer Knob(Do not adjust)

Chassis



1/18/10CHAPTER1.FM


1-2-4-2 History - Hardware/Software versionsThe contents in this sub-section is in Chapter 9.

1-2-4-3 History - Peripherals/Software versionsThe contents in this sub-section is in Chapter 9.

1-2-4-4 FRUs for Back End ProcessorThe contents in this sub-section is in Chapter 9.

1-2-4-5 History - Supported ProbesThe contents in this sub-section is in Chapter 9.

1-2-4-6 How to Turn the Scanner On and OffPlease refer to Chapter 4, section 4-2-2 "Power On / Boot Up" , for a detailed description of how to turn the scanner ON and to Chapter 4, section 4-2-4 "Power Off / Shutdown" for a detailed description of how to turn the scanner OFF.

1-2-4-7 How to Check for Hardware/Software version and Installed OptionsTo verify hardware versions on the boards, refer to Section 9-11 "Front End Processor Assembly"

Please refer to Section 4-3 "Software Configuration Checks" to check the software versions on local software on the boards.

Please refer to Chapter 4 to check for installed options.

Figure 1-3 LOGIQ™ 9 with 19” LCD

Operator Console

Gel Warmer

Monitor Controls

Name Plate

19” LCD Monitor


Touchscreen/Display

TGC Slidepot KnobsSubwoofer Knob(Do not adjust)



1/18/10CHAPTER1.FM

1-2-4-8 Product Manuals

NOTE: The LOGIQ™ 9 Unpacking Procedure is delivered on paper.

See Section 9-23 "Customer Documentation" for customer documentation available for the product.

1-2-4-9 Purpose of Operator Manual(s)The Operator Manual(s) should be fully read and understood before operating the LOGIQ™ 9 and also kept near the unit for quick reference.



1/18/10CHAPTER1.FM

Section 1-3Important Conventions

1-3-1 Conventions Used in Book

1-3-1-1 Model DesignationsThis manual covers the LOGIQ™ 9 scanners.

1-3-1-2 IconsPictures, or icons, are used wherever they reinforce the printed message. The icons, labels and conventions used on the product and in the service information are described in this chapter.

1-3-1-3 Safety Precaution MessagesVarious levels of safety precaution messages may be found on the equipment and in the service information. The different levels of concern are identified by a flag word that precedes the precautionary message. Known or potential hazards are labeled in one of following ways:

NOTE: Notes provide important information about an item or a procedure. Information contained in a NOTE can often save you time or effort.

DANGER DANGER IS USED TO INDICATE THE PRESENCE OF A HAZARD THAT WILL CAUSE SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH IF THE INSTRUCTIONS ARE IGNORED.

WARNINGWARNING WARNING IS USED TO INDICATE THE PRESENCE OF A HAZARD THAT CAN CAUSE SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE IF INSTRUCTIONS ARE IGNORED.

CAUTION Caution is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that will or can cause minor personal injury and property damage if instructions are ignored.

NOTICE Equipment Damage PossibleNotice is used when a hazard is present that can cause property damage but has absolutely no personal injury risk. Example: Disk drive will crash.


1-10 Section 1-3 - Important Conventions

1/18/10CHAPTER1.FM

1-3-2 Standard Hazard Icons

Other hazard icons make you aware of specific procedures that should be followed.

Important information will always be preceded by the exclamation point contained within a triangle, as seen throughout this chapter. In addition to text, several different graphical icons (symbols) may be used to make you aware of specific types of hazards that could cause harm.

Table 1-3 Standard Hazard Icons

ELECTRICAL MECHANICAL RADIATION

LASER HEAT PINCH

Table 1-4 Standard Icons Indicating a Special Procedure Be Used

AVOID STATIC ELECTRICITY TAG AND LOCK OUT WEAR EYE PROTECTION

LASERLIGHT

Signed Date

TAG &

LOCKOUT EYEPROTECTION



1/18/10CHAPTER1.FM

1-3-3 Product IconsThe following table describes the purpose and location of safety labels and other important information provided on the equipment.

Table 1-5 Product Icons

LABEL/SYMBOL PURPOSE/MEANING LOCATION

Identification and Rating Plate

Manufacturer’s name and address. Rear panel

Identification and Rating Plate

Date of manufacture Rating Plate

Serial Number Rating Plate

Catalog Number Rating Plate

Type/Class Label Used to indicate the degree of safety or protection.

Equipment Type BF (man in the box symbol) IEC 878-02-03 indicates B Type equipment having even more electrical isolation than standard Type B equipment because it is intended for intimate patient contact.

Probe connectors PCG connectoror Rear of Console

Equipment Type BF Applied Part (man in the box with paddle) symbol is in accordance with IEC 60417-5334. Probe

Equipment Type CF (heart in the box symbol) IEC 878-02-05 indicates equipment having a high degree of protection suitable for direct cardiac contact.

ECG connectorSurgical probes



10/12/10CHAPTER1.FM

Defibrillator-proof type of equipment. At the ECG connector on front of system.

“CAUTIONThis unit weighs...

Special care must be used to avoid..."

This precaution is intended to prevent injury that may result if one person attempts to move the unit considerable distances or on an incline due to the weight of the unit.

On the console where easily seen during transport

"CAUTION" The equilateral triangle is usually used in combination with other symbols to advise or warn the user.

Various

Follow Instructions for Use. “ATTENTION” - Consult accompanying documents” is intended to alert the user to refer to the operator manual or other instructions when complete information cannot be provided on the label.

Various

Follow Instructions for Use. “ATTENTION” - Consult accompanying documents” is intended to alert the user to refer to the operator manual or other instructions when complete information cannot be provided on the label.

May appear on some probes

"CAUTION - Dangerous voltage" (the lightning flash with arrowhead in equilateral triangle) is used to indicate electric shock hazards.

Various

"Mains OFF" Indicates the power off position of the mains power switch. Rear of system adjacent to mains switch

Table 1-5 Product Icons (Continued)




10/12/10CHAPTER1.FM

"OFF/Standby" Indicates the power off/standby position of the power switch.CAUTIONThis Power Switch DOES NOT ISOLATE Mains Supply

Adjacent to On-Off Switch

"Mains ON" Indicates the power on position of the mains power switch."ON" Indicates the power on position of the power switch.CAUTIONThis Power Switch DOES NOT ISOLATE Mains Supply

Front Panel Switch

"Protective Earth" Indicates the protective earth (grounding) terminal. Internal

"Equipotentiality" Indicates the terminal to be used for connecting equipotential conductors when interconnecting (grounding) with other equipment.

Rear of console

This unit carries the CE mark. The LOGIQ™ 9 unit complies with regulatory requirements of the European Directive 93/42/EEC concerning medical devices. It also complies with emission limits for a Group 1, Class B Medical Device as stated in EN 60601-1-2 (IEC 60601-1-2).

Rear of Console

NOTE: CE Mark not on systems manufactured after October 1,2010.

United States onlyPrescription Requirement label

Rear Panel

Authorized European Representative address. Rear Panel

NOTE: EC REP Mark not on systems manufactured after October 1,2010.





10/12/10CHAPTER1.FM

ETL Listing Mark Monogram Rear Panel

GOST Symbol. Russia Regulatory Country Clearance. Rear Panel

This symbol indicates that waste electrical and electronic equipment must not be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste and must be collected separately. Please contact an authorized representative of the manufacturer for information concerning the decommissioning of your equipment.

Rear Panel

No hazardous substance, above the maximum concentration value, is present. Maximum concentration values for electronic information products, as set by the People’s Republic of China Electronic Industry Standard SJ/T11364-2006, include the hazardous substances of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, cadmium, polybrominated biphenyl (PBB), and polybrominated diphenyl ether (PBDE).

Rear Panel

Indicates the presence of hazardous substance(s) above the maximum concentration value. Maximum concentration values for electronic information products, as set by the People’s Republic of China Electronic Industry Standard SJ/T11364-2006, include the hazardous substances of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, cadmium, polybrominated biphenyl (PBB), and polybrominated diphenyl ether (PBDE). “10” indicates the number of years during which the hazardous substance(s) will not leak or mutate so that the use of this product will not result in any severe environmental pollution, bodily injury, or damage to any assets.

Probe

Indicates the presence of hazardous substance(s) above the maximum concentration value. Maximum concentration values for electronic information products, as set by the People’s Republic of China Electronic Industry Standard SJ/T11364-2006, include the hazardous substances of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, cadmium, polybrominated biphenyl (PBB), and polybrominated diphenyl ether (PBDE). “20” indicates the number of years during which the hazardous substance(s) will not leak or mutate so that the use of this product will not result in any severe environmental pollution, bodily injury, or damage to any assets.

Rear Panel





10/12/10CHAPTER1.FM

or

This product consists of devices that may contain mercury, which must be recycled or disposed of in accordance with local, state, or country laws. (Within this system, the backlight lamps in the monitor display, contain mercury.)

Rear Panel

How to lower LCD prior to transport Rear of the LCD monitor.

How to lock Operator Panel prior to transport Rear of the LCD monitor.

DO NOT place a finger, hand or any object on the joint of the monitor or monitor arm to avoid injury when moving the monitor and monitor arm.

Rear of the LCD monitor.




1-16 Section 1-4 - Safety Considerations

1/18/10CHAPTER1.FM

Section 1-4Safety Considerations

1-4-1 IntroductionThe following safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation, service and repair of this equipment. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this manual, violates safety standards of design, manufacture and intended use of the equipment.

1-4-2 Human SafetyOperating personnel must not remove the system covers. Servicing should be performed by authorized personnel only. Only personnel who have participated in a LOGIQ™ 9 Training are authorized to service the equipment.

1-4-3 Mechanical Safety

WARNINGWARNING Prior to elevating scanner, verify that the floating keyboard is locked in its lowest position. Verify that the front brake is locked and the scanner is unable to swivel. Verify that the rear brakes are in the locked position.

WARNINGWARNING Ultrasound probes are highly sensitive medical instruments that can easily be damaged by improper handling. Use care when handling and protect from damage when not in use. DO NOT use a damaged or defective probe. Failure to follow these precautions can result in serious injury and equipment damage.

WARNINGWARNING Never use a probe that has fallen to the floor. Even if it looks ok, it may be damaged.

WARNINGWARNING REMEMBER: If the front caster swivel lock is engaged for transportation, pressing the release pedal once disengages the swivel lock. You must depress the release pedal a second time to engage the brake.

WARNINGWARNING The system should NOT be moved with the Operator I/O Panel extended. Move the Operator I/O Panel to its centered and locked position. Lower the Operator I/O Panel as much as possible before moving the system.

WARNINGWARNING While the software install procedure is designed to preserve data, you should save any patient data, images, system setups to a MOD, CD, DVD or hardcopy before doing a software upgrade.

CAUTION Remember to remove the MOD before continuing with the software install.



1/18/10CHAPTER1.FM

1-4-3 Mechanical Safety (cont’d)

NOTE: Special care should be taken when transporting the unit in a vehicle:

• Secure the unit in an upright position.• Lock the wheels (brake).• DO NOT use the Control Panel as an anchor point.• Place the probes in their carrying case.• Eject any Magneto Optical disk, CD or DVD from their drive.

1-4-4 Electrical Safety

1-4-4-1 Safe PracticesTo minimize shock hazard, the equipment chassis must be connected to an electrical ground. The system is equipped with a three-conductor AC power cable. This must be plugged into an approved electrical outlet with safety ground. If an extension cord is used with the system, make sure that the total current rating of the system does not exceed the extension cord rating.

The power outlet used for this equipment should not be shared with other types of equipment.

Both the system power cable and the power connector meet international electrical standards.

CAUTION The LOGIQ™ 9 weighs at least 171kg (376 lbs.) when ready to use, depending on installed monitors and peripherals. Care must be used when moving it or replacing its parts. Failure to follow the precautions listed could result in injury, uncontrolled motion and costly damage.ALWAYS:Be sure the pathway is clear.Use slow, careful motions.Use two people when moving on inclines or lifting more than 16 kg (35 lbs).

CAUTION Keep the heat venting holes on the monitor unobstructed to avoid overheating of the monitor.

CAUTION To avoid injury when you move the LCD monitor and the monitor arm, do NOT put your finger, hand, or object on the joint of the monitor or the monitor arm.

CAUTION Before you move or transport the system, make sure to lock the LCD monitor arm firmly and flip down the monitor to prevent damage to the system.

CAUTION Do NOT grab the speakers to move the monitor and the monitor arm when adjusting the LCD. However, when you turn up the monitor from flip-down status, you can grab the upper corner of the monitor.

CAUTION To avoid injury or damage to the monitor, make sure there is nothing within range of the LCD before moving the monitor and monitor arm. This includes people as well as things.

NOTICE Be careful not to pinch any of the cables.

WARNINGWARNING IF A LOGIQ™ 9 IS ENERGIZED, AND THE FRONT END POWER SUPPLY (FEPS) COVER IS REMOVED, THE VOLTAGE TEST POINTS POSE A POTENTIAL SHOCK HAZARD.

WARNINGWARNING CONNECTING A LOGIQ™ 9 SCANNER TO THE WRONG VOLTAGE LEVEL WILL MOST LIKELY DESTROY THE SCANNER.


1-18 Section 1-5 - Labels Locations

1/18/10CHAPTER1.FM

1-4-4-2 ProbesFollow these guidelines before connecting a probe to the scanner:

• Inspect the probe prior to each use for damage or degradation to the:- Housing- Cable strain relief- Lens- Seal- Connector pins- Locking mechanism

• Do not use a damaged or defective probe.• Never immerse the probe connector or adapter into any liquid.

Section 1-5Labels Locations

Refer to the LOGIQ™ 9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 2, for the label locations.

Section 1-6Dangerous Procedure Warnings

Warnings, such as the examples below, precede potentially dangerous procedures throughout this manual. Instructions contained in the warnings must be followed.


WARNINGWARNING IF THE COVERS ARE REMOVED FROM AN OPERATING LOGIQ™ 9, SOME METAL SURFACES MAY BE WARM ENOUGH TO POSE A POTENTIAL HEAT HAZARD IF TOUCHED, EVEN WHILE IN SHUT DOWN MODE.

WARNINGWARNING EXPLOSION WARNINGDO NOT OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT IN AN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE. OPERATION OF ANY ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IN SUCH AN ENVIRONMENT CONSTITUTES A DEFINITE SAFETY HAZARD.

WARNINGWARNING Do Not Substitute Parts or Modify EquipmentBecause of the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not install substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification of the equipment.



1/18/10CHAPTER1.FM

Section 1-6 Dangerous Procedure Warnings (cont’d)

WARNINGWARNING When the top console is in its locked position, the gas shock is compressed and stores mechanical energy. During normal operation the top console, the weight of the monitor and the mechanical force of the gas shock are in balance. Take care if/when you activate this gas shock. Personal injury can occur after the panel is removed and the shock pressure is released. Take care when you repair the elevation assembly.

WARNINGWARNING Ensure that the system is turned off and unplugged. To verify that the Front End Power Supply (FEPS) is in a zero energy state, wait at least 20 seconds for the charge on the FEPS capacitors to bleed off before handling the power supply board.

WARNINGWARNING Use extreme caution as long as LOGIQ™ 9 is un-stable, not resting on all four Casters.

WARNINGWARNING Tilting the console requires two people in order to avoid injury to service personnel and damage to the equipment.


WARNINGWARNING Beware of possible sharp edges on all mechanical parts. If sharp edges are encountered, the appropriate PPE should be used to reduce the risk of injury.

WARNINGWARNING Wear all PPE including gloves as indicated in the chemical MSDS.

WARNINGWARNING Do Not attempt to charge batteries other than the type included in the kit (NiMH). Standard alkaline batteries CANNOT be recharged.

READ all safety precautions that come from the battery and battery charger manufacturers.

WARNINGWARNING Risk of electrical shock, system must be turned off and disconnected from power source. Cord must be controlled at all times. Wait at least 20 seconds for the charge on the FEPS capacitors to bleed off before handling the power supply board.


1-20 Section 1-7 - Battery Safety

1/18/10CHAPTER1.FM

Section 1-7Battery Safety

To avoid the risk of injury, follow the warning and cautions to make sure that the battery does not burst, ignite, or generate heat of fumes.

CAUTION The battery pack contains a 24V charge that will cause a spark when it is re-connected to the power supply without power applied to the Back End Processor. Be careful that this spark does not damage any equipment or cause any personal injury.

To avoid the spark, connect the battery with power applied to the BackEnd Processor.

WARNINGWARNING • The battery has a safety device. Do not disassemble or alter the battery.• Charge the batteries only when the ambient temperature is between 0° and 40° C (32° and

104° F).• Do not short-circuit the battery by directly connecting the negative terminals with metal

objects.• Do not heat the battery or discard it in a fire.• Do not expose the battery to temperature over 60° C (140° F). Keep it away from fire and

other heat sources.• Do not charge the battery near a heat source, such as a fire or heater.• Do not leave the battery in direct sunlight.• Do not drop packs from height as it may cause possible malfunction damage.• Do not pierce the battery with a sharp object, hit it, or step on it.• Do not use a damaged battery.• Do not solder a battery.• Do not connect the battery to an electrical power outlet.• Do not contact PCM directly to prevent packs from ESD damage.

CAUTION To avoid the battery bursting, igniting, or fumes from the battery causing equipment damage, observe the following precautions:• Do not immerse the battery in water or allow it to get wet.• Do not put the battery into a microwave oven or pressurized container.• If the battery leaks or emits an odor, remove it from all possible flammable sources.• If the battery emits an odor or heat, is deformed or discolored, or in a way appears

abnormal during use, recharging or storage, immediately remove it and stop using it. If you have any questions about the battery, consult GE or your local representative.

• Store the battery between -20° C (-4° F) and 60° C (140°F).• Use only GE recognized batteries.• In case of the long term (3 months or more) storage:

• Store the battery in a temperature range of 10° C (50° F) and 30° C (86°F).• When charging for the first time after long-term storage, recover such packs to

original performance by repeating several cycles of full charging and discharging.• When storing packs for more than 6 months, charge at least once per 6 month period to

prevent leakage and deterioration in performance due to self-discharging.



1/18/10CHAPTER1.FM

Section 1-8Lockout/Tagout Requirements (For USA Only)

Follow OSHA Lockout/Tagout requirements by ensuring you are in total control of the electrical Mains plug.

To apply Lockout/Tagout:

1.) Plan and prepare for shutdown.2.) Shutdown the equipment.3.) Isolate the equipment.4.) Apply Lockout/Tagout Devices.5.) Control all stored and residual energy.6.) Verify isolation.

All potentially hazardous stored or residual energy is relieved.

.

Section 1-9Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts

Equipment being returned must be clean and free of blood and other infectious substances.

GEHC policy states that body fluids must be properly removed from any part or equipment prior to shipment. GEHC employees, as well as customers, are responsible for ensuring that parts/equipment have been properly decontaminated prior to shipment. Under no circumstance should a part or equipment with visible body fluids be taken or shipped from a clinic or site (for example, body coils or an ultrasound probe).

The purpose of the regulation is to protect employees in the transportation industry, as well as the people who will receive or open this package.

NOTE: The US Department of Transportation (DOT) has ruled that “items that were saturated and/or dripping with human blood that are now caked with dried blood; or which were used or intended for use in patient care” are “regulated medical waste” for transportation purposes and must be transported as a hazardous material.

NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ™ 9When servicing parts of the system where there is exposure to voltage greater than 30 Volts:1. Turn off the breaker.2. Unplug the system.3. Maintain control of the system power plug.4. Wait for at least 20 seconds for capacitors to discharge as there are no test points to verify isolation.Beware that the AC Control Box, Front End Processor and Back End Processor may be energized even if the power is turned off when the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet.

Signed Date

TAG &

LOCKOUT


1-22 Section 1-10 - Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

1/18/10CHAPTER1.FM

Section 1-10Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

1-10-1 What is EMC?Electromagnetic compatibility describes a level of performance of a device within its electromagnetic environment. This environment consists of the device itself and its surroundings including other equipment, power sources and persons with which the device must interface. Inadequate compatibility results when a susceptible device fails to perform as intended due interference from its environment or when the device produces unacceptable levels of emission to its environment. This interference is often referred to as radio–frequency or electromagnetic interference (RFI/EMI) and can be radiated through space or conducted over interconnecting power of signal cables. In addition to electromagnetic energy, EMC also includes possible effects from electrical fields, magnetic fields, electrostatic discharge and disturbances in the electrical power supply.

1-10-2 ComplianceThe LOGIQ™ 9 unit conforms to all applicable conducted and radiated emission limits and to immunity from electrostatic discharge, radiated and conducted RF fields, magnetic fields and power line transient requirements.

For applicable standards refer to the Safety Chapter in the Basic User Manual.

NOTE: For CE Compliance, it is critical that all covers, screws, shielding, gaskets, mesh, clamps, are in good condition, installed tightly without skew or stress. Proper installation following all comments noted in this service manual is required in order to achieve full EMC performance.

1-10-3 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Prevention

WARNINGWARNING Do not touch any boards with integrated circuits prior to taking the necessary ESD precautions: 1. Always connect yourself, via an arm-wrist strap, to the advised ESD connection point located on the Rear of the scanner (to the right of the power connector). 2. Follow general guidelines for handling of electrostatic sensitive equipment.

WARNINGWARNING Risk of electrical shock, system must be turned off. Avoid all contact with electrical contacts, conductors and components. Always use non-conductive handles designed for the removal and replacement of ESD sensitive parts. All parts that have the potential for storing energy must be discharged or isolated before making contact.



1/18/10CHAPTER1.FM

Section 1-11Customer Assistance

1-11-1 Contact InformationIf this equipment does not work as indicated in this Service Manual or in the User Manual, or if you require additional assistance, please contact the local distributor or appropriate support resource, as listed below.

Before you call, identify the following information, and acquire image (Alt+D) to send to Milwaukee:

1.) System ID serial number.2.) Software version.3.) Date and time of occurrence.4.) Sequence of events leading to issue.5.) Is the issue repeatable?6.) Imaging mode, probe, preset/application.7.) Media brand, speed, capacity, type.8.) Save secondary image capture, cine loop, 4D multi-volume loop.

NOTE: Restart the application before resuming clinical scanning.

Table 1-6 Phone Numbers for Customer Assistance

Location Phone Number

USA

GE HealthcareUltrasound Service Engineering9900 Innovation DriveWauwatosa, WI 53226

Service: On-site

Service: Parts

Applications Support

1-800–437–1171

1-800-558-2040

1-800-682-5327 or 1-262-524-5698

Canada 1-800-668-0732

Latin AmericaService

Applications Support

1-800-321-7937

1-262-524-5698

EuropeGE Ultraschall Deutschland GmbH& Co. KGBeethovenstraBe 239Postfach 11 05 60, D-42655 SolingenGermany

Phone: +33 (0) 130-831-300 (General Imaging and Cardiac)+43 (0) 7682-3800-26 (Voluson-Logiqbook)

Fax: +49 (0)2122-8024-31

Asia (Singapore)GE Ultrasound AsiaService Department - Ultrasound298 Tiong Bahru Road #15-01/06Central PlazaSingapore 169730

Tel: +65 6291-8528

Fax: +65 6291-7006

Japan Support Center Phone: 81-426-48-2940Fax: 81-426-48-2905


1-24 Section 1-11 - Customer Assistance

1/18/10CHAPTER1.FM

1-11-2 System Manufacturer

Table 1-7 System Manufacturer

Manufacturer FAX Number

GE Healthcare - GE Medical Systems Ultrasound and Primary Care Diagnostics, LLC9900 Innovation DriveWauwatosa, WI 53226USA

414-721-3865


Chapter 2 Site Preparation 2-1

1/18/10CHAPTER2.FM

Chapter 2Site Preparation

Section 2-1Overview

2-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 2This chapter provides the information required to plan and prepare for the installation of a LOGIQ™ 9. Included are descriptions of the facility and electrical needs to be met by the purchaser of the unit.



2-1 Overview 2-1

2-2 General Console Requirements 2-2

2-3 Facility Needs 2-6


2-2 Section 2-2 - General Console Requirements

1/18/10CHAPTER2.FM

Section 2-2General Console Requirements

2-2-1 Console Environmental Requirements

NOTE: Temperature in degrees C. Conversion to Degrees F = ((Degrees C * 9/5) + 32).

2-2-1-1 CoolingThe cooling requirement for the LOGIQ™ 9 is 3500 BTU/hr. This figure does not include cooling needed for lights, people, or other equipment in the room. Each person in the room places an additional 300 BTU/hr. demand on the cooling system.

2-2-1-2 LightingBright light is needed for system installation, updates and repairs. However, operator and patient comfort may be optimized if the room light is subdued and indirect. Therefore a combination lighting system (dim/bright) is recommended. Keep in mind that lighting controls and dimmers can be a source of EMI which could degrade image quality. These controls should be selected to minimize possible interference.

2-2-2 Electrical Requirements

NOTE: GE Healthcare requires a dedicated power and ground for the proper operation of its Ultrasound equipment. This dedicated power shall originate at the last distribution panel before the system.

Sites with a mains power system with defined Neutral and LiveThe dedicated line shall consist of one phase, a neutral (not shared with any other circuit), and a full size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet.

Sites with a mains power system without a defined NeutralThe dedicated line shall consist of one phase (two lines), not shared with any other circuit, and a full size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet.

NOTE: Please note that image artifacts can occur, if at any time within the facility, the ground from the main facility's incoming power source to the Ultrasound unit is only a conduit.

2-2-2-1 LOGIQ™ 9 Power Requirements

2-2-2-2 Inrush CurrentInrush current is not a factor to consider due to the inrush current limiting properties of the power supplies.

Table 2-2 Environmental Requirements - LOGIQ™ 9

Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Humidity Heat Dissipation

10o to 35oC -10° to 60° C 30 - 85% non-condensing 3500 BTU pr hour

Table 2-3 Electrical Specifications for LOGIQ™ 9

Voltage Tolerances Current Frequency

100-120 VAC ±10% 9.5 A 50-60 Hz

200-240 VAC ±10% 4.75 A 50-60 Hz



1/18/10CHAPTER2.FM

2-2-2-3 Site Circuit BreakerIt is recommended that the branch circuit breaker for the machine be readily accessible.

2-2-2-4 Site Power OutletsA dedicated AC power outlet must be within reach of the unit without extension cords. Other adequate outlets for the external peripherals, medical and test equipment needed to support this unit must also be present within 1 m (3.2 ft.) of the unit. Electrical installation must meet all current local, state, and national electrical codes.

2-2-2-5 Unit Power PlugIf the unit arrives without a power plug, or with the wrong plug, you must contact your GE dealer or the installation engineer must supply what is locally required.

2-2-2-6 Power Stability Requirements

Voltage drop-out Max 10 ms.

Power Transients(All applications)Less than 25% of nominal peak voltage for less than 1 millisecond for any type of transient, including line frequency, synchronous, asynchronous, or aperiodic transients.

CAUTION POWER OUTAGE MAY OCCUR. The LOGIQ™ 9 requires a dedicated single branch circuit. To avoid circuit overload and possible loss of critical care equipment, make sure you DO NOT have any other equipment operating on the same circuit.


2-4 Section 2-2 - General Console Requirements

1/18/10CHAPTER2.FM

2-2-3 EMI LimitationsUltrasound machines are susceptible to Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) from radio frequencies, magnetic fields, and transients in the air or wiring. Ultrasound machines also generate EMI. The LOGIQ™ 9 complies with limits as stated on the EMC label. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.

Possible EMI sources should be identified before the unit is installed.

Electrical and electronic equipment may produce EMI unintentionally as the result of a defect. These sources include:

• medical lasers, • scanners, • cauterizing guns, • computers, • monitors, • fans, • gel warmers, • microwave ovens,• light dimmers • portable phones. The presence of a broadcast station or broadcast van may also cause interference.

See Table 2-4 for EMI Prevention tips.

Table 2-4 EMI Prevention/Abatement

EMI Rule Details

Be aware of RF sourcesKeep the unit at least 5 meters or 15 feet away from other EMI sources. Special shielding may be required to eliminate interference problems caused by high frequency, high powered radio or video broadcast signals.

Ground the unit Poor grounding is the most likely reason a unit will have noisy images. Check grounding of the power cord and power outlet.

Replace all screws, RF gaskets, covers, cores

After you finish repairing or updating the system, replace all covers and tighten all screws. Any cable with an external connection requires a magnet wrap at each end. Install the shield over the front of card cage. Loose or missing covers or RF gaskets allow radio frequencies to interfere with the ultrasound signals.

Replace broken RF gaskets If more than 20% or a pair of the fingers on an RF gasket are broken, replace the gasket. Do not turn on the unit until any loose metallic part is removed.

Do not place labels where RF gaskets touch metal

Never place a label where RF gaskets meet the unit. Otherwise, the gap created will permit RF leakage. Or, if a label has been found in such a position, move the label.

Use GE specified harnesses and peripherals

The interconnect cables are grounded and require ferrite beads and other shielding. Also, cable length, material, and routing are all important; do not change from what is specified.

Take care with cellular phones Cellular phones may transmit a 5 V/m signal; that could cause image artifacts.

Properly dress peripheral cables

Do not allow cables to lie across the top of the card cage or hang out of the peripheral bays. Loop the excess length for peripheral cables inside the peripheral bays. Attach the monitor cables to the frame.



1/18/10CHAPTER2.FM

2-2-4 Scan Probe Environmental Requirements

NOTE: Temperature in degrees C. Conversion to Degrees F = (Degrees C * 9/5) + 32).

2-2-5 Time and Manpower RequirementsSite preparation takes time. Begin Pre-installation checks as soon as possible. If possible, allow six weeks before delivery, for enough time to make necessary changes.

Table 2-5 Environmental Requirements - Probes

Operating Temperature Storage Temperature

Standard Probes 10o to 40o C -10° to 60° C

4D Probes 18o to 40o C -10o to 50 o C

NOTICE SYSTEMS AND ELECTRONIC PROBES ARE DESIGNED FOR STORAGE TEMPERATURES OF -20 TO +50 degrees C. WHEN EXPOSED TO LARGE TEMPERATURE VARIATIONS, THE PRODUCT SHOULD BE KEPT IN ROOM TEMPERATURE FOR 10 HOURS BEFORE USE.

CAUTION The LOGIQ™ 9 weighs at least 168kg (370 lbs.) when ready to use, depending on installed monitors and peripherals. Care must be used when moving it or replacing its parts. Failure to follow the precautions listed could result in injury, uncontrolled motion and costly damage.ALWAYS:Be sure the pathway is clear.Use slow, careful motions.Use two people when moving on inclines or lifting more than 16 kg (35 lbs).


2-6 Section 2-3 - Facility Needs

1/18/10CHAPTER2.FM

Section 2-3Facility Needs

2-3-1 Purchaser ResponsibilitiesThe work and materials needed to prepare the site is the responsibility of the purchaser. Delay, confusion, and waste of manpower can be avoided by completing pre-installation work before delivery. Use the Pre installation checklist to verify that all needed steps have been taken. Purchaser responsibility includes:

• Procuring the materials required.• Completing the preparations before delivery of the ultrasound system.• Paying the costs for any alterations and modifications not specifically provided in the sales contract.

NOTE: All electrical installations that are preliminary to the positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the equipment must be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations, and testing must also be performed by qualified personnel. The products involved (and the accompanying electrical installations) are highly sophisticated and special engineering competence is required. All electrical work on these products must comply with the requirements of applicable electrical codes. The purchaser of GE equipment must only utilize qualified personnel to perform electrical servicing on the equipment.

The desire to use a non–listed or customer provided product or to place an approved product further from the system than the interface kit allows presents challenges to the installation team. To avoid delays during installation, such variances should be made known to the individuals or group performing the installation at the earliest possible date (preferably prior to the purchase).

The ultrasound suite must be clean prior to delivery of the machine. Carpet is not recommended because it collects dust and creates static. Potential sources of EMI (electromagnetic interference) should also be investigated before delivery. Dirt, static, and EMI can negatively impact system reliability.



1/18/10CHAPTER2.FM

2-3-2 Required Features

NOTE: GE Healthcare requires a dedicated power and ground for the proper operation of its Ultrasound equipment. This dedicated power shall originate at the last distribution panel before the system.

Sites with a mains power system with defined Neutral and LiveThe dedicated line shall consist of one phase, a neutral (not shared with any other circuit), and a full size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet.

Sites with a mains power system without a defined NeutralThe dedicated line shall consist of one phase (two lines), not shared with any other circuit, and a full size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet.

NOTE: Please note that image artifacts can occur, if at any time within the facility, the ground from the main facility's incoming power source to the Ultrasound unit is only a conduit.

• Door opening is at least 76 cm (30 in) wide.• Proposed location for unit is at least 0.3 m (1 ft.) from the wall for cooling• Power outlet and place for any external peripheral are within 2 m (6.5 ft) of each other with

peripheral within 1 m of the unit to connect cables.

NOTE: The LOGIQ™ 9 has four outlets inside the unit. One is for the monitor and three for on-board peripherals.

• Power outlets for other medical equipment and gel warmer• Power outlets for test equipment and modem within 1 m (3.2 ft) of unit• Clean and protected space to store transducers (in their cases or on a rack)• Material to safely clean probes (done with a plastic container, never metal)

2-3-3 Desirable Features• Door is at least 92 cm (3 ft.) wide• Circuit breaker for dedicated power outlet is easily accessible• Sink with hot and cold water• Receptacle for bio–hazardous waste, like used probe sheaths• Emergency oxygen supply• Storage for linens and equipment• Nearby waiting room, lavatory, and dressing room• Dual level lighting (bright and dim)• Lockable cabinet ordered by GE for its software and proprietary manuals



1/18/10CHAPTER2.FM

2-3-4 Minimal Floor Plan Suggestion

Figure 2-1 Minimal Floor Plan



1/18/10CHAPTER2.FM

2-3-5 Networking Setup Requirements

2-3-5-1 Stand Alone Scanner (without Network Connection)None.

2-3-5-2 Scanner Connected to Hospital’s NetworkSupported networks: DICOM Network (option)

2-3-5-3 Purpose of the DICOM Network FunctionDICOM services provide the operator with clinically useful features for moving images and patient information over a hospital network. Examples of DICOM services include the transfer of images to workstations for viewing or transferring images to remote printers. As an added benefit, transferring images in this manner frees up the on-board monitor and peripherals, enabling viewing to be done while scanning continues. With DICOM, images can be archived, stored, and retrieved faster, easier, and at a lower cost.

2-3-5-4 DICOM Option Pre-installation RequirementsTo configure the LOGIQ™ 9 to work with other network connections, the site’s network administrator must provide some necessary information.

Use the Connectivity Setup Worksheet on 3-22 to record the required information that must include:

• A host name, local port number, AE Title, IP address and Net Mask for the LOGIQ™ 9. • The IP addresses for the default gateway and other routers at the site for ROUTING

INFORMATION.• The host name, IP address, port and AE Title for each device the site wants connected to the

LOGIQ™ 9 for DICOM APPLICATION INFORMATION. A field for the make (manufacturer) and the revision of the device, is also included. This information may be useful for solving errors.

2-3-5-5 InSite Requirements• Network 10/100 or 10/100/1G Interface.• Optional analog phone line for older products.



1/18/10CHAPTER2.FM

This page was intentionally left blank.


Chapter 3 System Setup 3-1

1/18/10CHAPTER3.FM

Chapter 3System Setup

Section 3-1Overview

3-1-1 The Purpose of Chapter 3This chapter contains information needed to unpack and set up the unit. Included are procedures to receive, unpack and configure the equipment. System operation is verified at the factory.



3-1 Overview 3-1

3-2 Set Up Reminders 3-2

3-3 Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment 3-4

3-4 Preparing for Set Up 3-6

3-5 Completing the Setup 3-8

3-6 System Configuration 3-11

3-7 Available Probes 3-21

3-8 Software/Option Configuration 3-21

3-9 Connectivity Setup Worksheet 3-22

3-10 Before Starting a Software Upgrade 3-23

3-11 Loading Base Image Software 3-23

3-12 Loading Application Software 3-23

3-13 System Setup 3-23

3-14 Connecting USB Line Printers - Black/White and Color 3-24

3-15 Paperwork 3-25

3-16 Checks 3-26


3-2 Section 3-2 - Set Up Reminders

1/18/10CHAPTER3.FM

Section 3-2Set Up Reminders

3-2-1 Average Set Up Time

3-2-2 Set Up Warnings1.) Since the LOGIQ™ 9 weighs at least 168kg (370 lbs.) without options, two people are required to

unpack it. Two people are also required for installing any additional items in excess of 16 kg (35 lbs).2.) There are no operator serviceable components. To prevent shock, do not remove any covers or

panels. Should problems or malfunctions occur, turn off the breaker, and unplug the power cord. Only qualified service personnel should carry out servicing and troubleshooting.

3.) After being transported, the unit may be very cold or hot. If this is the case, allow the unit to acclimate before you turn it on. It requires one hour for each 2.5°C increment its temperature is below 10°C or above 40°C.

3-2-2-1 Brake Pedal Operation

3-2-2-2 Operator I/O Panel PositionIf weight is placed on the Operator I/O Panel in its extended position, the console could tip over

Table 3-2 Average Set Up Time

Description Average Set Up Time Comments

Unpacking the scanner 0.5 hours

Scanner wo/options 0.5 hours Dependant on the required configuration

DICOM Option 0.5 - 2.0 hours Dependant on the configuration amount

CAUTION Equipment damage possibility. Turning the system on without acclimation after arriving at site may cause the system to be damaged.

Table 3-3 Acclimation Time

°C 60 55 50 45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 -5 -10 -15 -20 -25 -30 -35 -40

°F 140 131 122 113 104 96 86 77 68 59 50 41 32 23 14 5 -4 -13 -22 -31 -40

hrs 8 6 4 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20

WARNINGWARNING REMEMBER: If the front caster swivel lock is engaged for transportation, pressing the release pedal once disengages the swivel lock. You must depress the release pedal a second time to engage the brake.

WARNINGWARNING The system should NOT be moved with the Operator I/O Panel extended. Move the Operator I/O Panel to its centered and locked position. Lower the Operator I/O Panel as much as possible before moving the system.



1/18/10CHAPTER3.FM

3-2-3 Safety Reminders

DANGER WHEN USING ANY TEST INSTRUMENT THAT IS CAPABLE OF OPENING THE AC GROUND LINE (I.E., METER’S GROUND SWITCH IS OPEN), DON’T TOUCH THE UNIT!

CAUTION Two people should unpack the unit because of its weight. Two people are required whenever a part weighing 16 kg (35 lbs) or more must be lifted.

CAUTION If the unit is very cold or hot, do not turn on its power until it has had a chance to acclimate to its operating environment.

CAUTION To prevent electrical shock, connect the unit to a properly grounded power outlet. Do not use a three- to two-prong adapter. This defeats safety grounding.

CAUTION Do NOT wear the ESD wrist strap when you work on live circuits and more than 30 V peak is present.

CAUTION Do not use a 20 Amp to 15 Amp adapter on the 120 Vac unit’s power cord. This unit requires a dedicated 20 A circuit and can have a 15A plug if the on-board peripherals do not cause the unit to draw more than 14.0 amps.

CAUTION Do not operate this unit unless all board covers and frame panels are securely in place. System performance and cooling require this.

CAUTION OPERATOR MANUAL(S) The User Manual(s) should be fully read and understood before operating the LOGIQ™ 9 and kept near the unit for quick reference.

CAUTION ACOUSTIC OUTPUT HAZARDAlthough the ultrasound energy transmitted from the LOGIQ™ 9 probe is within FDA limits, avoid unnecessary exposure. Ultrasound energy can produce heat and mechanical damage.

Figure 3-1 Environmental Labels


3-4 Section 3-3 - Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment

1/18/10CHAPTER3.FM

Section 3-3Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment

CAUTION Two people are needed to unpack the unit because of its weight.Attempts to move the unit considerable distances or on an incline by one person could result in injury or damage or both.Two people are required whenever a part weighing 16 kg (35 lbs) or more must be lifted or pushed up or down a slope.

CAUTION Remember to use relevant Personal Protecting Equipment during packing/unpacking. Check with your local EHS representative.

Table 3-4 Unpacking Procedure

Step Task

1. Open the four hinges on each door

2. Remove the doors at both ends of the box

3. Place the front door against the rear edge of the pallet. The front door can be used as a ramp.

4. Carefully remove the accessory box, and any other items, including the wooden shelf above the scanner’s keyboard and all the filling material, from the wooden box.

Be sure to place theramp (front door) asillustrated here.

Front Doorused as ramp.



1/18/10CHAPTER3.FM

5. Press once on the swivel lock to release the brake.

Caution: Two people are needed in the next step due to the weight of the equipment.

6. Carefully move the scanner out of the wooden box, down the ramp.

7. Remove the clear plastic (wrapped around the scanner) from the unit.

Table 3-4 Unpacking Procedure (Continued)

Step Task

Swivel Lock


3-6 Section 3-4 - Preparing for Set Up

10/12/10CHAPTER3.FM

Section 3-4Preparing for Set Up

3-4-1 Verify Customer OrderCompare items received by the customer to that which is listed on the delivery order. Report any items that are missing, back ordered, or damaged.

3-4-2 Physical Inspection

3-4-2-1 System Voltage SettingsVerify that the scanner is set to the correct voltage.The Voltage settings for the LOGIQ™ 9 Scanner are found on a label to the right of the Power switch and External I/O, on the rear of the system.

3-4-2-2 Rating Plate

NOTE: This Rating Plate example is a representation of several designs used.

Figure 3-2 Rating Plate Example

200 kg

GE Healthcare LOGIQ 9

CISPR 11GROUP 1 CLASS A

Rating Plate



10/12/10CHAPTER3.FM

3-4-2-3 ETL Testing Laboratories Safety Rating LabelThis ETL label is required for all USA systems.

3-4-2-4 Video FormatsCheck that the video format is set to the locally used video standard, NTSC or PAL.

3-4-3 EMI ProtectionThis unit has been designed to minimize the effects of Electo-Magnetic Interference (EMI). Many of the covers, shields, and screws are provided primarily to protect the system from image artifacts caused by this interference. For this reason, it is imperative that all covers and hardware are installed and secured before the unit is put into operation.

Figure 3-3 ETL Label Example

WARNINGWARNING CONNECTING A LOGIQ™ 9 SCANNER TO THE WRONG VOLTAGE LEVEL WILL MOST LIKELY DESTROY THE SCANNER.

200 kg

GE Healthcare LOGIQ 9

CISPR 11GROUP 1 CLASS A

ETL Label


3-8 Section 3-5 - Completing the Setup

1/18/10CHAPTER3.FM

Section 3-5Completing the Setup

3-5-1 Power On / Boot Up

NOTE: After turning off a system, wait at least ten seconds before turning it on again. The system may not be able to boot if power is recycled too quickly.

3-5-1-1 Scanner Power On

1.) Connect the Power Cable to the back of the system.2.) Ensure the Cable Clip slips securely over the shoulders on the molded plug.3.) Connect the Main Power Cable to a hospital grade power receptacle with the proper rated voltage.

Never use an adapter that would circumvent the safety ground. 4.) Switch ON the Circuit Breaker at the rear of the system.

When power is applied to the scanner and the rear Circuit Breaker is turned ON, power is distributed to the Cooling Unit, Control Panel, Monitor, Internal and External I/O Boards, Peripherals and the Back-end Processor.

Figure 3-4 Circuit Breaker and Power Cable on Back of Scanner, with Power On

NOTICE When AC power is applied to the scanner, the On / Off switch on the Control panel (Figure 3-5) indicates the Back End Processor is in standby mode:

For BT03 systems and prior, the On / Off switch illuminates amber.For BT04 systems and later, the On / Off switch blinks amber and green.

Cable ClipCircuit Breaker

Mains Power Cable



1/18/10CHAPTER3.FM

3-5-1-2 Back-end Processor Boot Up

1.) Press the On / Off switch on the Control Panel once.When the On / Off switch on the Control Panel is pressed once, the Back-end Processor starts and the software code is distributed to initiate the scanner.

No status messages are displayed during this process.

3-5-2 Power Off / Shutdown


3-5-2-1 Back-end Processor Power Down

1.) Press the On / Off switch on the Control Panel once to display the SYSTEM - EXIT menu.2.) Select Shutdown from the SYSTEM - EXIT menu.

Figure 3-5 On / Off switch

Figure 3-6 System Exit Menu

On / Off switch


3-10 Section 3-5 - Completing the Setup

1/18/10CHAPTER3.FM

3-5-2-2 Scanner Shutdown

1.) Switch OFF the Circuit Breaker at the back of the system.2.) Disconnect the Mains Power Cable is necessary. For example: Relocating the scanner.

3-5-3 Transducer Connection and Removal1.) To connect a transducer to one of the three right-most transducer receptacles:

a.) Ensure that the transducer twist lock lever is in the horizontal position.b.) Insert the transducer connector on the receptacle guide pin until it touches the receptacle

mating surface.c.) Twist the transducer twist lock lever to vertical position to lock it in place.

2.) To disconnect a transducer from one of the three right-most transducer receptacles:

a.) Turn the transducer twist lock lever to the horizontal position.b.) Separate the transducer connector from the receptacle mating surface.

NOTE: It is not necessary to turn OFF power to connect or disconnect a transducer.

Figure 3-7 Circuit Breaker and Power Cable on Back of Scanner, with Power On

NOTICE Disconnecting the Mains Power Cable before switching OFF the Circuit Breaker will activate the uninterruptible power system (UPS) in the backend processor, forcing an ordered shutdown of the system.

NOTICE The UPS serves only as a battery backup that allows for a soft shut-down of the scanner to prevent file corruption. IT DOES NOT REGULATE INCOMING VOLTAGE.


Mains Power Cable



1/18/10CHAPTER3.FM

Section 3-6System Configuration

3-6-1 System Specifications

3-6-1-1 Physical DimensionsThe physical dimensions of the LOGIQ™ 9 unit are summarized in Table 3-5 and Table 3-6.

Table 3-1 lists the size of LOGIQ™ 9, with monitor and on-board peripherals.

3-6-1-2 Console Weight

3-6-1-3 Acoustic Noise Output:Less than 70dB(A) according to DIN 45635 - 19 - 01 - KL2.

3-6-2 Electrical Specifications

Table 3-5 Physical Dimensions of LOGIQ™ 9

HeightWidth Depth

Minimum Maximum

127 cm / 50 inches 160.7 cm / 63.25 inches 64 cm / 25.2 inches 89.9 cm / 35.4 inches

Table 3-6 Weight of LOGIQ™ 9 and Monitors, With and Without Peripherals

Model With Peripherals - kg [lbs] Without Peripherals - kg [lbs]

LOGIQ™ 9 with CRT 206 [454] 185 [408]

LOGIQ™ 9 with CRT, Upgraded to LCD

(includes counterweight)206 [454] 185 [408]

LOGIQ™ 9 with LCD 192 [423] 168 [370]

Table 3-7 Electrical Specifications for LOGIQ™ 9

Voltage Tolerances Current Frequency

100-120 VAC ±10% 9.5 A 50-60 Hz

200-240 VAC ±10% 4.75 A 50-60 Hz


3-12 Section 3-6 - System Configuration

1/18/10CHAPTER3.FM

3-6-3 On-Board Optional Peripherals

Table 3-8 Approved On-Board Peripherals

Device Manufacturer Model Video Signal

B/W Video Printer SONY UP-895MDW NA

B/W Video Printer SONY UP-D897MD NA

Video Cassette Recorder MitsubishiHS_MD3000UHS_MD3000E

NTSCPAL

Video Cassette Recorder SONY SVO-9500MDSVO-9500-MDP

NTSCPAL

Color Video Printer SONY

UP-51MDUP-D21UP-D55

UP-D23MD



1/18/10CHAPTER3.FM

3-6-4 External I/O Connector Panel (Back of system)

Figure 3-8 External I/O Panel Labels (Prior to BT03)

Figure 3-9 External I/O Panel Connectors

1 2 3 4 6 7

9 10 11 12 13 148

5



1/18/10CHAPTER3.FM

3-6-4 External I/O Connector Panel (Back of system) (cont’d)

Table 3-9 External I/O Connector Descriptions

Item Connector Name Table Number Description

1 Audio Output (Left) RCA Phono Jack

2 Audio Output (Right) RCA Phono Jack

3 Trigger Output BNC Connector

4 Footswitch Table 3-10Hirose Electric Co. RM12BRB-5S,

Footswich transport shelf is in the back at the bottom

5 RS232 Com1 DSUB 9 pin male

6 Expose 1 Table 3-11 Mini-phone Jack

7 Expose 2 Table 3-11 Mini-phone Jack

8 Modem Connection Table 3-12 RJ-11 with global adapter kit for connection

9 Composite Video Out BNC Connector, Color Output

10 B/W Video Out BNC Connector, Black and White Output

11 S-Video Output Table 3-13 4 pin mini-DIN

12 S-VGA Output Table 3-14 DSUB-HD22 15 Pin female

13 USB (1) Table 3-15

14 Ethernet Connection Table 3-16 RJ-45 Connector



1/18/10CHAPTER3.FM

3-6-4-1 External I/O Pin Outs

Table 3-10 Footswitch Connector

Pin No Output Signal Description

1 Foot 1 Left switch

2 Floating Ground Ground

3 Foot 2 Center switch

4 Floating Ground Ground

5 Foot 3 Right switch

Table 3-11 Remote Expose 1 & 2 Connectors


1 SHUTTER/PRINT Print command to external device

2 Signal GND Ground

Table 3-12 Modem, RJ11 Modular 6 Pin


2 TEL L4 Telephone L4




Others NC Non-connection

Table 3-13 S-Video Connector, 4 Pin


1 SVIDEO OUT/IN YG Y (Luma) GND

2 SVIDEO OUT/IN CG C (Chroma) GND

3 SVIDEO OUT/IN Y Y (Luma) SIGNAL

4 SVIDEO OUT/IN C C (Chroma) SIGNAL



1/18/10CHAPTER3.FM

3-6-4-1 External I/O Pin Outs (cont’d)

Table 3-14 S-VGA Connector, Shrinked Sub-D 15 Pin


1 VGA OUT1 R Red

2 VGA OUT1 G Green

3 VGA OUT1 B Blue

4, 9,11,12,15 N/C N/C

5, 6, 7, 8, 10 GND GND

13 VGA OUT1 HS H Sync

14 VGA OUT1 VS V Sync

Table 3-15 USB (A) Connector


1 VCC USB Power Supply

2 - Data USB Data (-)

3 + Data USB Data (+)

4 GND USB Power Ground

Table 3-16 Ethernet Connector, RJ45 Modular 8 Pin


1 ETHER TD Ethernet RD+

2 ETHER TD Ethernet RD-

3 ETHER RD Ethernet TD+

6 ETHER RD Ethernet TD-

Others NC Non-connection



1/18/10CHAPTER3.FM

3-6-5 Other I/O Ports (Front of system)

Figure 3-10 Front Connectors

Table 3-17 Front I/O Connector Descriptions

Item Connector Name Description

1 USB On BEP 3.x/4.x Only

2 USB On BEP 3.x/4.x Only

3 CW CW probe connection port (optional)

4 4D 4D Probe connection port (optional)

5 Probe Connectors The two left most connectors are recommended for 4D Probe placement

6 USB On upper console for wired voice connection Only

1 2

3

4

6

5



1/18/10CHAPTER3.FM

3-6-5 Other I/O Ports (Front of system) (cont’d)

Table 3-18 CW Connector, J1 (Optional)


2 DOPIN COAX CENTER, RED JACKET

3 DOPIN GND COAX SHIELD, RED JACKET

5 ID0 R1-2

6 PCW COAX CENTER, WHT JACKET

7 PCW GND COAX SHIELD, WHT JACKET

8 ID1 R1-1

10 OUTER SHIELD

Shell OUTER SHIELD

Table 3-19 4D Connector (Optional)

Pin No Signal

4 GND

8 SIN_DRV

7 SIN_RTN

2 ACTIVE

5 COS_RTN

6 COS_DRV

3 HALL1

Table 3-20 Flock of Birds, Small Connector (Optional, not shown in Figure 3-10)

Pin No Signal

1 EEC

2 EXC_RTN

3 Rx_Y

4 Rx_X

5 Rx_RTN

6 Rx_Z

7 EXC

8 EED



1/18/10CHAPTER3.FM

3-6-5 Other I/O Ports (Front of system) (cont’d)

Table 3-21 Flock of Birds, Large Connector (Optional, not shown in Figure 3-10)

Pin No Signal

1 TYRTNO

2 EECO_TX

3 EED_TX

4 PWM_EMI

5 TXRTN0

6 TZRTN0

7 VCC_

8 GND

Center TYRTNO



1/18/10CHAPTER3.FM

3-6-6 Video SpecificationVideo specifications may be needed to be able to connect laser cameras or other devices to the LOGIQ™ 9.

NOTE: 800x600 75hz is the only output available for external video connectors

Table 3-22 Video Specifications

Timing Parameter

CRT

1024x76875Hz

External Video Connection

CRT and LCD

800x60075Hz

LCD

1280x102460Hz

Horizontal Rate [kHz] 60.02 46.88 64.00

Horizontal Period [µs] 16.66 21.33 15.62

Pixel Clock [MHz] 78.75 49.50 108.00

H Blank Width [µs] 3.66 5.17 3.77

H Sync Width [µs] 1.22 1.62 1.03

H Front Porch [µs] 0.20 0.32 0.44

Active Horizontal Period [µs] 13.00 16.16 11.85

Vertical Rate [Hz] 75.03 75.00 60.00

Vertical Period [ms] 13.33 13.33 16.67

V Sync Width [lines=ms] 32=0.53 25=0.53 not available at printing

V Front Porch [lines=µs] 3=50.00 3=64.00 .016ms

Equalization Gate [lines=µs] 1=16.66 1=21.3 N/A

Lines: Field/Frame 800 625 1066

Active Lines/Frame 768 600 1024



1/18/10CHAPTER3.FM

Section 3-7Available Probes

See Specifications in the LOGIQ™ 9 User Reference Manual for probes and intended use.

See Chapter 9 "Renewal Parts" on page 9-1, for part numbers to be used when ordering new or replacement probes.

Section 3-8Software/Option Configuration

Refer to the LOGIQ™ 9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 16, Customizing Your System for information on configuring items like Hospital, Department, Language, Units (of measure), Date, Time and Date Format.

For information on configuring Software Options, Refer to the LOGIQ™ 9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 16, Customizing Your System.

For information on configuring DICOM Connectivity, Refer to the LOGIQ™ 9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 16, Customizing Your System.


3-22 Section 3-9 - Connectivity Setup Worksheet

1/18/10CHAPTER3.FM

Section 3-9Connectivity Setup Worksheet

Site System Information

Services (Destination Devices)

TCP/IP Settings

Device Type Manufacturer Name IP Address Port AE Title123456789101112

Name - AE Title:

Dept:

LOGIQ SN: Type:

Floor:

Room:

REV:

Comments:

CONTACT INFORMATION

Name Title Phone E-Mail Address

Site:

IP Settings

IP Address:

Subnet Mask:

Default Gateway:

Remote Archive Setup

Remote Archive IP:

Remote Archive Name:



1/18/10CHAPTER3.FM

Section 3-10Before Starting a Software Upgrade

This information has been moved, see Section 8-6 "Before Starting a Software Load" on page 8-17

Section 3-11Loading Base Image Software

This information has been moved, see Section 8-8 "Loading Base Image Software - R4.x.x and prior" on page 8-26Section 8-9 "Loading Base Image Software - R6.x.x" on page 8-33, orSection 8-10 "Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later" on page 8-38

Section 3-12Loading Application Software

This information has been moved, see Section 8-11 "Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior" on page 8-44Section 8-12 "Loading Application Software - R6.x.x" on page 8-49, orSection 8-13 "Loading Application Software - R7.x.x or Later" on page 8-56

Section 3-13System Setup

This section has been moved - See Section 8-15 on page 8-65


3-24 Section 3-14 - Connecting USB Line Printers - Black/White and Color

1/18/10CHAPTER3.FM

Section 3-14Connecting USB Line Printers - Black/White and Color

3-14-1 Printer Set Up (R4.x and later)1.) Attach the USB cable from the printer to the USB port on the back of the ultrasound system. The

New Hardware detected pop-up will be displayed briefly.2.) If you’re attaching an HP Deskjet 990Cxi or 970Cxi printer or HP Deskjet 6122, the system should

immediately recognize the newly attached printer and automatically install and configure the printer for you without any additional user intervention.

On Systems Running Software prior to R4.x.x follow the steps in 3-14-2 on page 3-24.

3-14-2 Printer Set Up (R2.x)

3-14-2-1 To Set Up Printer Before Installing Application SoftwareIf you must connect the printer in the following order: Base Image Software -> Printer -> Application software, complete the following steps:

1.) Install the Base Image Software.2.) Plug in the printer USB cable and the system will recognize the device. 3.) Load the Application Software. .



1/18/10CHAPTER3.FM

Section 3-15Paperwork

NOTE: During and after installation, the documentation (i.e. User Manuals, Installation Manuals...) for the peripheral units must be kept as part of the original system documentation. This will ensure that all relevant safety and user information is available during operation and service of the complete system.

3-15-1 Product Locator InstallationUpon completion of the system set up, complete and mail the Product Locator Installation card.

NOTE: The Product Locator Installation card may vary from the Product Locator cards below.

3-15-2 User Manual(s)Check that the correct User Manual(s), for the system and software revision, is included with the installation. Specific language versions of the User Manual may also be available. Check with your GE Sales Representative for availability.

Figure 3-11 Product Locator Installation Card


3-26 Section 3-16 - Checks

1/18/10CHAPTER3.FM

Section 3-16Checks

Perform all functional checks.


Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4-1

1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM

Chapter 4Functional Checks

Section 4-1Overview

4-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 4This chapter provides procedures for quickly checking major functions of the LOGIQ™ 9 scanner diagnostics by using the built-in service software, and power supply adjustments. System operation is verified at the factory.

4-1-2 Required Equipment• An empty (blank) MO Disk (If system has a Magneto-Optical Drive) or blank CD-R or DVD-R.• At least one transducer. See “Probes” on page 1-70. for an overview.

(normally you should check all the transducers used on the system)

Table 4-1 Chapter 4 Contents


4-1 Overview 4-1

4-2 General Procedure 4-2

4-3 Software Configuration Checks 4-23

4-4 Peripheral Checks 4-24

4-5 Mechanical Function Checks 4-25

NOTICE Most of the information pertaining to this Functional Checks chapter is found in the LOGIQ™ 9 Quick Guide / User Guide (see below).

Table 4-2 Quick Guide / User Guide Direction Numbers

Application Software Version Direction Number

R2.X 2309820-100

R3.X 2384458-100

R4.X 5113779-100

R6.X 5140807-100

R7.X 5173872-100

R9.X 5338270-100 (User Guide)


4-2 Section 4-2 - General Procedure

1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM

Section 4-2General Procedure

CAUTION SYSTEM REQUIRES ALL COVERSOperate this unit only when all board covers and frame panels are securely in place. The covers are required for safe operation, good system performance and cooling purposes.


Signed Date

TAG &

LOCKOUT



1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM

4-2-1 System Features

4-2-1-1 Control Panel

Figure 4-1 Control Panel Tour

1. Touch Panel and Controls 11. Depth

2. Touch Panel Brightness Control 12. Imaging Feature Keys

3. Video 13. Freeze and Print Keys

4. Audio On/Off and Volume 14. Probe Holder

5. TGC 15. Gel Holder

6. Reverse 16. On/Off Switch

7. Additional Feature Keys 17. 4D probe holder insert

8. Keyboard 18. USB Connector - for wired mic only

9. Mode/Gain Keys 19. Subwoofer Volume knob - retain settings set at factory

10. Imaging/Measurement Keys

2

14

4

8

3

15 1 5

147

10 9 12

13

11

6

1817

16

19



1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM

4-2-1-2 Touch Panel

NOTE: Different menus are displayed depending on which Touch Panel Menu is selected.

At the bottom of the Touch Panel, there are five combination rotary dials/push buttons. The functionality of these rotaries changes, depending upon the currently displayed menu. Press the button to switch between controls (as with Focus Position/Number), or rotate the dial to adjust the value.

Figure 4-2 Touch Panel Display Tour - BT06

Table 4-3 Touch Panel Display

1. Patient Enters Patient screen.

2. Scan Enters scanning mode screen.

3. Reports Activates default report and Touch Panel of report choices.

4. End Exam Activates Image Management and Touch Panel with end of exam options.

5. Utility Activates the configuration system.

6. Preset Selects the application to use.

7. Probe Indicator Indicates and selects the probes.



1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM

4-2-1-3 Monitor Display

Figure 4-3 Monitor Display Tour

Table 4-4 Monitor Display Features

1. Institution/Hospital Name, Date, Time, Operator Identification.2. Patient Name, Patient Identification.3. Power Output Readout4. GE Symbol: Probe Orientation Marker.5. Image Preview.6. Gray/Color Bar.7. Cine Gauges8. Worksheet/Direct Report 9. Measurement Summary Window.10. Image.11. Measurement Calipers.12. Measurement Results Window + Direct Report13. Image Clipboard.14. Probe Identifier. Exam Preset.

15. Imaging Parameters by Mode.16. Focal Zone Indicator.17. TGC.18. Depth Scale.19. Body Pattern.20. Image Management Icons: Active Images, Delete, Previous/Next

Image and Menu.21. Current date and time, Caps Lock: (lit when on), network

connection indicator (PC=connected, PC with X=not connected), Human face (VoiceScan), iLinq, system messages display.

22. Trackball Functionality Status: Scroll, M&A (Measurement and Analysis), Position, Size, Scan Area Width and Tilt.



1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM


NOTE: Do not cycle the Circuit Breaker ON-OFF-ON in less than five -5- seconds. When turning OFF the Circuit Breaker, the system should de-energize completely before turning the circuit breaker ON.

NOTE: When turning on a system from standby mode, it takes a few seconds before it responds. Do not push the On/off button again during this period. A second push will initiate a full shutdown.

NOTE: If the unit has been unplugged or main breaker in the OFF state for more than 3 to 5 days, the unit may not boot, or may beep when turned on.


NOTE: On BEP3.X and BEP4.X, there is a blinking stand-by indicator. When the ON/OFF switch blinks between green and amber, the system is in STANDBY.

4-2-2-1 To Connect Mains Power to the ScannerConnecting the LOGIQ™ 9 scanner involves preliminary checks of the power cord, voltage level and compliance with electrical safety requirements.

1.) Ensure that the wall outlet is of appropriate type, and that the power switch is turned OFF.2.) Verify that the onsite mains voltage is within the limits indicated on the rating label near the Circuit

Breaker on the rear of the unit.3.) Verify the Circuit Breaker at the rear of the scanner is OFF.4.) Verify that the power cable is without any visible damage.5.) Connect the Power Cable to the back of the system.6.) Ensure the Cable Clip slips securely over the shoulders on the molded plug.

DANGER ALWAYS CONNECT THE UNIT TO A FIXED POWER SOCKET WHICH HAS THEPROTECTIVE GROUNDING CONNECTOR.

DANGER NEVER USE A THREE-TO-TWO PRONG ADAPTER; THIS DEFEATS THESAFETY GROUND.

DANGER ENSURE THAT THE POWER CORD AND PLUG ARE INTACT AND THAT THEPOWER PLUG IS THE PROPER HOSPITAL-GRADE TYPE (WHERE REQUIRED).

CAUTION SYSTEM REQUIRES ALL COVERSOPERATE THIS UNIT ONLY WHEN ALL BOARD COVERS AND FRAME PANELS ARESECURELY IN PLACE. THE COVERS ARE REQUIRED FOR SAFE OPERATION, GOOD SYSTEMPERFORMANCE AND COOLING PURPOSES.

NOTICE Use only power supply cords, cables, and plugs provided by or designated by GE Healthcare.



1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM

4-2-2 Power On / Boot Up (cont’d)

7.) Connect the Power Cable to an appropriate mains power outlet, allowing sufficient slack so that the unit can be moved slightly.

8.) Switch ON the Circuit Breaker at the rear of the system.

When power is applied to the scanner and the rear Circuit Breaker is turned ON, power is distributed to the Cooling Unit, Control Panel, Monitor, Internal and External I/O Boards, Peripherals, the Back End Processor and the Front End Power Supply.

NOTE: If the system is left in the OFF condition (system unplugged from the wall and circuit breaker in the OFF position) for an extended period of time (greater than three days), the system may not boot up or beep when turned on. If this occurs, plug in the system, set the circuit breaker to the ON position, and allow the system’s UPS battery to recharge for several hours. DO NOT use standby during this time.

4-2-2-2 To Boot Up Back End Processor

1.) Press the ON/OFF switch on the Control Panel once.The Back-End Processor starts and the software code is distributed to initiate the scanner. No status messages are displayed during this process.

Figure 4-4 Circuit Breaker and Power Cable on Back of Scanner

NOTICE When AC power is applied to the scanner, the ON/OFF switch on the Control panel illuminates amber, indicating the system is in System Ready Mode.

Figure 4-5 ON/OFF switch for Back End Processor Boot Up


Mains Power Cable

ON / OFF Switch



1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM

4-2-3 Standby ModeUse Standby Mode to decrease the power off/on time while transporting system for a portable exam.

NOTE: DO NOT put the system in Standby Mode more than 20 times in a row. You should power off the system daily.

4-2-3-1 To Place System in Standby Mode

1.) Press the ON/OFF switch at the front of the system once. The System-Exit window displays.2.) Use the Trackball to select Standby.

The Monitor Display and Touch Panel turn black. The On/Off switch indicator is green.

3.) After the monitor blacks out, wait at least 20 additional seconds before unplugging the power cable or switching off the breaker. The system does not fully enter Standby Mode until after the following occurs:

- If you have a CD/DVD drive, the Power On/Off button starts blinking on/off.- If you have a CD drive only, the green lights beneath the CD drive show no activity for 15

seconds.

NOTE: Starting with BT04, the ON/OFF Switch will blink while the system is in Standby Mode. Because of a hardware dependency, this feature is not supported on systems that upgrade to BT04.

4.) Once in Standby Mode, unplug the system from the wall. The system beeps.

NOTE: DO NOT press the ON/OFF switch while the system is unplugged, this will turn the system off.

5.) Transport the system as needed and plug it back in within 15 minutes. If the system is unplugged for longer than 15 minutes, the battery is discharged and the system shuts down. This assumes a fully-charged battery.

NOTE: It takes ten hours to recharge the battery. Expected battery lifetime for frequent standby use is six months.To maintain battery life, keep the system plugged in with the circuit breaker in the ON position.


See Moving the System in the Basic User Manual for more information.

4-2-3-2 To Wake the System from Standby Mode

1.) Press ON/OFF switch QUICKLY! Less than.25 seconds. If you press the On/Off switch too long, the system will shutdown. It takes about 45 seconds for the system to become fully functional.

NOTE: If the ON/OFF switch is pressed too long, the system shuts down instead of coming out of Standby Mode.

NOTE: Waking the system from Standby without AC connected will turn off the system.



1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM



4-2-4-1 To Power Off Back-End Processor

1.) Press the ON/OFF switch on the Control Panel once to display the SYSTEM - EXIT menu.2.) Select Shutdown from the SYSTEM - EXIT menu.3.) Allow the system to close files and shutdown. Wait until the standby light turns amber.

Figure 4-6 System Exit Menu for Back End Processor Power Off



1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM

4-2-4-2 To Shut Down Scanner

.

1.) From the rear of the system, switch OFF the Circuit Breaker.2.) Slip the Cable Clip off the shoulders on the molded plug, then disconnect the Mains Power Cable

from the scanner.

Figure 4-7 Circuit Breaker and Power Cable on Back of Scanner

NOTICE Disconnecting the Mains Power Cable before switching OFF the Circuit Breaker will activate the uninterruptible power system (UPS) in the backend processor, forcing an ordered shutdown of the system.

NOTICE The UPS serves only as a battery backup that allows for a soft shut-down of the scanner to prevent file corruption. IT DOES NOT REGULATE INCOMING VOLTAGE.

WARNINGWARNING Disconnecting the Mains Power Cable is required before servicing or relocating the scanner.For USA only:Follow OSHA Lockout/Tagout requirements by ensuring you are in total control of the electrical Mains Power Cable plug.Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ™ 9When servicing parts of the system where there is exposure to voltage greater than 30 Volts:1. Turn off the breaker.2. Unplug the system.3. Maintain control of the system power plug.4. Wait for at least 20 seconds for capacitors to discharge as there are no test points to verify isolation.Beware that the AC Control Box, Front End Processor and Back End Processor may be energized even if the power is turned off when the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet.


Mains Power Cable

Signed Date

TAG &

LOCKOUT



1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM

4-2-5 Probe/Connectors Usage

4-2-5-1 To Connect a Probe

1.) Place the probe's carrying case on a stable surface and open the case.2.) Carefully remove the probe and unwrap the probe cable.3.) DO NOT allow the probe head to hang free. Impact to the probe head could result in irreparable

damage.4.) Turn the connector locking handle counterclockwise.5.) Align the connector with the probe port and carefully push into place.6.) Turn the connector locking handle clockwise to secure the probe connector.7.) Carefully position the probe cable in the probe cord holder spot so it is free to move, but not

resting on the floor.

4-2-5-2 To Activate a ProbeSelect the appropriate probe from the probe indicators on the Touch Panel.

The probe activates in the currently-selected operating mode. The probe's default settings for the mode and selected exam are used automatically.

4-2-5-3 To Deactivate a ProbeWhen deactivating the probe, the probe is automatically placed in standby mode.

1.) Press the Freeze key.2.) Gently wipe the excess gel from the face of the probe. (Refer to the Basic User Manual for

complete probe cleaning instructions.)3.) Carefully slide the probe around the right side of the keyboard, toward the probe holder.

Ensure that the probe is placed gently in the probe holder.

4-2-5-4 To Disconnect a ProbeProbes can be disconnected at any time. However, the probe should not be selected as the active probe.

1.) Move the probe locking handle counterclockwise. Pull the probe and connector straight out of the probe port.

2.) Carefully slide the probe and connector away from the probe port and around the right side of the keyboard. Ensure the cable is free.

3.) Be sure that the probe head is clean before placing the probe in its storage box.



1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM

4-2-6 Using CINE

4-2-6-1 To Activate CINE

1.) Press Freeze, then roll the Trackball to activate CINE. 2.) To start CINE Loop playback, press Run/Stop. To stop CINE Loop playback, press Run/Stop.

4-2-6-2 To Omit Images

1.) Roll the Trackball to the frame you want to delete and press Omit Image.

4-2-6-3 To Restore Images

1.) To undo deleting an image from the CINE Loop, press Restore Image.

4-2-6-4 To Move Quickly to Start/End Frame

1.) Press First to move to the first CINE frame.2.) Press Last to move to the last CINE frame.

4-2-6-5 To Start Frame/End Frame

1.) Turn the Start Frame dial to the left to move to the beginning of the CINE Loop. Turn the dial to the right to move forward through the CINE Loop.

2.) Turn the End Frame dial to the right to move to the end of the CINE Loop. Turn the dial to the left to move backward through the CINE Loop.

4-2-6-6 To Adjust the CINE Loop Playback Speed

1.) Turn the Loop Speed dial right/left to increase/decrease the CINE Loop playback speed.

4-2-6-7 To Disconnect B-Mode CINE from Timeline CINE

1.) To review the B-Mode CINE Loop only, press Cine Mode Selection and select B Only. 2.) To review the Timeline CINE Loop only, press Cine Mode Selection and select TL Only. 3.) To return to linked B-Mode and Timeline CINE Loop review, press Cine Mode Selection and

select B/TL.

4-2-6-8 To Move through a CINE Loop Frame By Frame

1.) Turn Frame by Frame to move through CINE memory one frame at a time.



1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM

4-2-7 Image Management Quick Guide / User Guide For Image Management functionality, refer to the LOGIQ™ 9 Quick Guide / User Guide. It talks about several topics:

• Clipboard • TCP/IP

• Printing Images • Services (Destinations)

• Browsing and Managing an Exam’s Stored Image • Buttons

• Connectivity, and Dataflow Concept and Creation • Views

• Starting an Exam • Verifying and Pinging a Device

• Configuring Connectivity

Table 4-5 Quick Guide / User Guide Direction Numbers

Application Software Version Direction Number

R2.X 2309820-100

R3.X 2384458-100

R4.X 5113779-100

R6.X 5140807-100

R7.X 5173872-100

R9.X 5338270-100 (User Guide)



1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM

4-2-8 System B/M-Mode ChecksFor a basic functional check of the system’s different modes, the Quick Guide / User Guide will familiarize you with image optimization for B-Mode, M-Mode, Color Flow, and Doppler.

Figure 4-8

Table 4-6 B/M-Mode Functions

Control Description

Power Output (Acoustic Power) Optimizes image quality and allows user to reduce beam intensity. 10% increments between 0-100%. Values greater than 0.1 are displayed

Dynamic Range Controls how echo intensities are converted to shades of gray, thereby increasing the adjustable range of contrast.

Focus Number and PositionIncreases the number of transmit focal zones or moves the focal zone(s) so that you can tighten up the beam for a specific area. A graphic caret corresponding to the focal zone position(s) appears on the right edge of the image.

Rejection Selects a level below which echoes will not be amplified (an echo must have a certain minimum amplitude before it will be processed).

Edge Enhance Brings out subtle tissue differences and boundaries by enhancing the gray scale differences corresponding to the edges of structures. Adjustments to M Mode's edge enhancement affects the M Mode only.

Frame Average Temporal filter that averages frames together. This has the effect of presenting a smoother, softer image.

Colorize Enables gray scale image colorization. To deactivate, reselect a Gray Map.

Gray Map Determines how the echo intensity levels received are presented as shades of gray.

Rotation (Up/Down) Rotates the image by selecting the value from the pop up menu.

Frequency Multi Frequency mode lets you downshift to probe's next lower frequency or shift up to a higher frequency.

Frame Rate/Resolution Optimizes B Mode frame rate or spatial resolution for the best possible image.

B Flow Provides intuitive representation of non-quantitative hemodynamics in vascular structures.

Sensitivity/PRI Adjusts the sample rate for the flow signal.

Background On/Off Background On lets you view the anatomy roadmap; Background Off lets you view just flow information.

Sweep Speed Changes the speed at which the timeline is swept.



1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM

4-2-9 System CFM and PWD Checks

Figure 4-9 CFM and PWD Functions

Table 4-7 CFM and PWD Functions

Baseline Adjusts the baseline to accommodate faster or slower blood flows to eliminate aliasing.

PRF/Wall FilterVelocity scale determines pulse repetition frequency. If the sample volume gate range exceeds single gate PRF capability, the system automatically switches to high PRF mode. Multiple gates appear, and HPRF is indicated on the display.

Angle Correct Estimates the flow velocity in a direction at an angle to the Doppler vector by computing the angle between the Doppler vector and the flow to be measured

Threshold Assigns the gray scale level at which color information stops.

Map Allows a specific color map to be selected. After a selection has been made, the color bar displays the resultant map.

Invert Allows blood flow to be viewed from a different perspective, i.e. red away (negative velocities) and blue toward (positive velocities). The real-time or frozen image can be inverted.

Packet Size Controls the number of samples gathered for a single color flow vector.

Quick Angle Correct Quickly adjusts the angle by 60 degrees

Doppler Display Formats

Display layout can be preset to have B-Mode and Time-motion side-by-side or over-under.In the side-by-side layout, there are three display alternatives defined: equal priority, time-motion priority or time-motion with B-Mode reference.In the over-under layout, there are three display alternatives defined: time-motion priority, B Mode priority or equal priority.

Sample Volume Gate Length Sizes the sample volume gate

Scan Area Slants the B-Mode or Color Flow linear image left or right to get more information without moving the probe



1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM

4-2-10 Basic Measurements

NOTE: The following instructions assume that you first scan the patient and then press Freeze.

4-2-10-1 To Measure Distance and Tissue Depth

1.) Press Measure once to display an active caliper.2.) Move the Trackball to position the active caliper at the start point (distance) or the most

anterior point (tissue depth).3.) Press Set to fix the start point.

The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper.

4.) Move the Trackball to position the second active caliper at the end point (distance) or the most posterior point (tissue depth).

5.) Press Set to complete the measurement.The system displays the distance or tissue depth value in the measurement results window.

NOTE: Before you complete a measurement:

• To toggle between active calipers, press Measure.• To erase the second caliper and the current data measured and start the measurement again, press

Clear once.

NOTE: To rotate through and activate previously fixed calipers, turn Cursor Select.

NOTE: After you complete the measurement, to erase all data that has been measured to this point, but not data entered onto worksheets, press Clear.

4-2-10-2 To Measure Circumference/Area (Ellipse)

1.) Press Measure once to display an active caliper.2.) Move the Trackball to position the active caliper.3.) Press Set to fix the start point.

The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper.

4.) Move the Trackball to position the second caliper.5.) Turn the Ellipse control; an ellipse with an initial circle shape appears.

NOTE: Be careful not to press the Ellipse control as this activates the Body Pattern.

6.) Move the Trackball to position the ellipse and to size the measured axes (the calipers).7.) To increase the size, turn the Ellipse control in a clockwise direction. To decrease the size,

turn the Ellipse control in a counterclockwise direction.8.) To toggle between active calipers, press Measure. 9.) Press Set to complete the measurement.

The system displays the circumference and area in the measurement results window.

NOTE: Before you complete a measurement:

• To erase the ellipse and the current data measured, press Clear once. The original caliper is displayed to restart the measurement.

• To exit the measurement function without completing the measurement, press Clear again.



1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM

4-2-10-3 WorksheetsMeasurement/Calculation worksheets are available to display and edit measurements and calculations. There are generic worksheets as well as Application specific worksheets. The worksheets are selected from the Measurement Touch Panel.

4-2-10-4 Report Pages Measurements/Calculations that are included on the worksheet can also be displayed on Report Pages. Report Pages can be customized to meet the appropriate needs of the user.



1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM

4-2-11 The MOD (Magnetic Optical Drive)

4-2-11-1 For BT03 and priorThe onboard 3.5 inch Magnetic Optical disk drive supports the following densities:

- Standard: 640MB; 540MB; 230MB; and 128MB- Overwrite: 1.3GB, 640MB; and 540MB

Figure 4-10 Magnetic Optical Drive - BT03 and prior

Magnetic Optical Drive (MOD) Eject Button



1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM

4-2-11-2 For BT04 and laterThe LOGIQ™ 9 supports the portable, external Fujitsu DynaMO 1300 U2 Pocket Magnetic Optical (MO) drive to read old media and to use up unused MO disks.

NOTE: The MO drive is intended to be a temporary storage solution only and NOT for everyday use. For permanent storage, ALWAYS use the DVD drive that is shipped with your system.

To Connect the Portable MO Drive

1.) Connect the USB cable to the back of the MO drive. The MO drive is powered by the USB port; therefore, no power cord is needed.

2.) Set the MO drive inside the side Peripheral Storage Area, next to the image printer. Make sure the MO drive sits far enough inside the storage area, but close enough to reach while plugged into the USB port.

3.) Connect the USB cable to the USB port on the back of the system.

Figure 4-11 Magnetic Optical Drive - BT04 and later



1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM

4-2-11-2 For BT04 and later (cont’d)Alternative Site for MO Drive. If you have a printer that takes up the entire storage area, there is an alternative site above the Front Peripheral Storage Area. To connect the portable MO drive to the LOGIQ 9 system:

1.) Connect the USB cable to the back of the MO drive. 2.) Set the MO drive above the Front Peripheral Storage Area, far enough away from the edge. 3.) Connect the USB cable to the USB port on the front of the system.

Figure 4-12 Magnetic Optical Drive - BT04 and later

CAUTION DO NOT connect the MO drive to the USB port adjacent to the top of the Control Panel.

If you intend to use the MO drive semi-permanently, attach the MO drive to the system using velcro, or other secure method (not supplied by GE).

DO NOT lock the Control Panel into place while the MO Drive is located above the Front Peripheral Storage Area. DO NOT load any CDs that accompany the MO device.



1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM

4-2-11-3 Using the MOD

1.) Before installing an MO disk in the MOD, check the MO disk for loose hardware or damaged labels which could jam inside the MOD. Also, ensure that the slide switch in one corner of the disk is set so that the disk is write enabled (disk hole closed).

2.) Insert the disk into the MOD with the label facing up.

3.) There are different methods to eject a disk from the MOD. In some cases disk ejection is automatic. Manual ejection methods are listed below in preferred order from best (1) to worst (4).

a.) When in Archive Menu, use the softkey choice –or– click Image Presets up, then click the left softkey switch up for ARCHIVE, then toggle the switch under EJECT MOD.

b.) Press the Eject switch on the MOD while system is ON.c.) Press and hold the Eject switch while the system is booting.d.) Mechanical ejection. Insert the end of a paper clip into the hole next to the Eject switch while

system power is OFF.

NOTICE Never move the unit with a disk in the MOD because the drive actuator will not be locked and the MOD could break.

NOTICE Avoid mechanical ejection whenever possible. Mechanical ejection leaves the actuator unlocked and the MOD susceptible to damage if moved. If forced to use this method, reboot the system, then insert and eject a known good disk using one of the other manual ejection methods.



1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM

4-2-12 USB DrivesConnect only one USB drive (USB HDD/USB flash drive) to the system in total. DO NOT connect two or more devices at the same time.

NOTE: Do not create multiple partitions. Use USB Drive with single partition.

The USB Flash Drive is an ESD-sensitive device. GE only supports the NDL 256MByte 066E0690 USB Flash Drive.

4-2-13 Backup and Restore Database, Preset Configurations and ImagesThe Backup and Restore procedures vary based on the application software that is installed. For the appropriate Backup and Restore information, see the LOGIQ™ 9 Quick Guide / User Guide

CAUTION Before removing the USB Flash Drive from the USB port, press Eject (F3) and select USB Drive from the pull-down menu to disconnect the USB Flash Drive.



1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM

Section 4-3Software Configuration Checks

Table 4-8 Software Configuration Checks

Step Task to do Notes

1. Verify Date and Time is correct

2. Verify that Location (Hospital Name) is correct

3. Verify Language settings are correct

4. Verify assignment of Printer Keys

5. Verify all of the customer’s options are set up correctly


4-24 Section 4-4 - Peripheral Checks

1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM

Section 4-4Peripheral Checks

Check that peripherals work as described below:

Table 4-9 Peripheral Checks

Step Task to do Notes

1. Press Freeze. Stops image acquisition.

2. Press (Print 1), (Print 2), (Print 3) or (Print 4) on the Control Panel

Prints image displayed on the screen on B&W or Color printer, depending on the key assignment configuration

3. Press VIDEO on the Control Panel. Starts the video counter at a different point:

4. Press UPDATE MENU in the Trackball area. Displays the Video Set Counter / Search Dialog window

5. Use the alphanumeric keyboard to enter the counter number in the counter field. Displays number

6. Press Set Counter to save the change. Saves number

7. Press VIDEO on the Control Panel Returns to the scanning mode

8. Press REC/PAUSE on the Control panel.Starts RecordingDisplays a red dot in the VCR status area on the Title bar to indicate that recording has begun

9. Press REC/PAUSE on the Control panel.Stops recordingChanges the video status icon to (Pause)

10. Press video on the Control Panel and the assignable play

Plays back an examination

11. Use the Assignable keys on the Control PanelPerforms actions on the recorded session, such as stop, pause, rewind or fast forward.Updates the video status icon accordingly

12.While in playback mode, use the Trackball to adjust the video playback speed and scroll through the record.

Searches on the tape

13. Press the assignable PAUSE Stops the tape at the desired frame.

14. Press Freeze while playing back a recorded session.

Stores the last few seconds of a recorded sequence as a cineloop. Enables the user to perform further operations on the stored section (see 4-2-6 for further information on cineloop operation).



1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM

Section 4-5Mechanical Function Checks

4-5-1 Operator I/O Movement - Standard Monitor

Figure 4-13

Step Task Note(s)

1. Pull handle up under the platform towards you to release horizontal lock

Maneuvers the Display Platform horizontally at present level of height

2. Pull handle at left hand grip toward you to release the Vertical Lock

Maneuvers the Display Platform up and down (between the vertical end stops) as long as you pull

the handle toward you

3. Pull both handles toward you to release both Vertical and Horizontal locks

Maneuvers the Display Platform both horizontally and vertically as long as you keep pulling these handles

toward you

Table 4-10 Standard Display Platform Maneuverability Checks


4-26 Section 4-5 - Mechanical Function Checks

1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM

4-5-2 Operator I/O Movement - 17” LCD (Option)

Figure 4-14 Operator Movement

Step Task Note(s)

1. Move Up/Down Use both hands, one at the top 17” LCD the 17” LCD and one at the bottom, to adjust the LCD up and down,

2. Tilt Forward/Back Use both hands, one at the top of the 17” LCD and one at the bottom, to rotate the screen forward and back.

3.Move Left/Right

Use both hands, one at the lower left handle hold of the 17” LCD and one at the lower right handle hold, to adjust the

screen left and right.

Table 4-11 17” LCD Display Platform Maneuverability Checks

Hold here for Steps 1 and 2


Hold here for Step 3




1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM

4-5-3 Operator I/O Movement - 19” LCD (Option)

Figure 4-15 Operator Movement

Step Task Note(s)

1 Tilt Forward/Back Use both hands, one at the top of the 19” LCD and one at the bottom, to rotate the screen forward and back.

2.Move Left/Right

Use both hands, one at the lower left handle hold of the 19” LCD and one at the lower right handle hold, to adjust the screen left

and right.

Table 4-12 19” LCD Display Platform Maneuverability Checks




4-28 Section 4-5 - Mechanical Function Checks

1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM

4-5-4 Brakes and Direction Locks ChecksCheck that the brakes and direction locks function as described below.

NOTE: The swivel lock and brake cannot be engaged (pressed down) at the same time since pressing the main brake releases the swivel lock and pressing the swivel lock releases the main brake. Therefore, if the swivel lock is engaged you need to press the main brake pedal (#2) twice to lock the scanner from rolling. Once will release the swivel lock and once again will engage the main brake in full lock as stated in step 1.

4-5-5 Site LogUse the site log found on Section 10-9 "Site Log" on page 10-29 to record site visits.

Table 4-13 Brakes and Direction Lock Instructions

Step Task Note(s)

1. Press on pedal no. 2

Engages the brakes in full lock

2. Press on pedal no.1

Releases the brake


Engages swivel lock.You may need to move the system around a little to get the wheels to lock into the locked

direction.


Releases swivel lock


Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-1

1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

Chapter 5Components and Functions (Theory)

Section 5-1Overview

5-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 5This chapter explains LOGIQ™ 9’s system concepts, component arrangement, and subsystem function. It also describes the Power Distribution System (PDS) and probes.



5-1 Overview 5-1

5-2 General Information 5-2

5-3 Front End Processor 5-7

5-4 Back End Processor (BEP 1) 5-22

5-5 Back End Processor (BEP 2) 5-27

5-6 Back End Processor (BEP 3.x) 5-34

5-7 Back End Processor (BEP 4.x) 5-39

5-8 BEP Power On Path 5-44

5-9 BEP Power Off Path 5-45

5-10 Operator Console Control PWA 5-46

5-11 Patient I/O (Currently not supported by the LOGIQ™ 9) 5-54

5-12 Internal I/O 5-55

5-13 Top Console 5-63

5-14 Monitor 5-64

5-15 External I/O 5-65

5-16 Peripherals 5-68

5-17 Modem and USB Modem 5-69

5-18 Power Distribution 5-71

5-19 Mechanical Descriptions 5-76

5-20 Air Flow Control 5-79

5-21 Service Platform 5-79

5-22 4D Option 5-91

5-23 Continuous Wave Doppler Option 5-96

5-24 PCI CW Doppler PWA card 5-97


5-2 Section 5-2 - General Information

1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

Section 5-2General Information

LOGIQ™ 9 is a phased and linear array ultrasound imaging scanner. It has provisions for analog input sources like ECG and Phono. A Doppler probe may also be connected and used.

The system can be used for:

- B-Mode- M-Mode- Color Flow Mode (CFM)- Power Doppler Imaging (PDI) with topographic and directional maps- PW Doppler with high PRF- B-Flow Mode- M-Color Flow Mode, with B-Mode Gray Scale and Color Flow Imaging

LOGIQ™ 9 is a digital beamforming system. Signal flow travels from the Probe Connector Panel to the Front End Electronics, to the Back-End Processor, and finally displayed on the monitor and peripherals. System configuration is stored on the hard drive and all necessary software is loaded from the hard drive on power up.

Figure 5-1 LOGIQ™ 9 BT04 - Major Components

Front Bumper

Backend Processor Chassis

CD-ROM3.5” MOD

B/W Printer

Operator Console

Gel Warmer

Monitor Controls

Name Plate

Monitor


Touchscreen/Display

TGC Slidepot Knobs

Front CoverVCR

Probe Connector

Swivel Lock

Brake Release

or DVD



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

Section 5-2 General Information (cont’d)

Figure 5-2 LOGIQ™ 9 BT06 with LCD Option - Major Components

Front Bumper

Backend Processor

CD-ROM

B/W Printer

Operator Console

Gel Warmer

Monitor Controls

Name Plate

17”LCD Monitor


Touchscreen/Display

TGC Slidepot Knobs

Front CoverVCR

Probe Connector

Swivel Lock Brake Release

or DVD

Subwoofer Knob(Do not adjust)

Chassis



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

Section 5-2 General Information (cont’d)

Figure 5-3 LOGIQ™ 9 with 19” LCD

Operator Console

Gel Warmer

Monitor Controls

Name Plate

19” LCD Monitor


Touchscreen/Display

TGC Slidepot KnobsSubwoofer Knob(Do not adjust)



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-2-1 Block Diagram

Figure 5-4 LOGIQ™ 9 Simple Block Diagram

FRONT END PROCESSOR

PROBES

FRONTPLANE

FRONT END BACKPLANE DOPPLER

ATX POWER SUPPLY

UPS

AC POWER

OP I/O PANEL 17" Monitor

USER INTERFACE

SONY COLOR PRINTERUP-2900MD

PC2IOPCVIC

PC MOTHERBOARD

POWER ON/OFF (RESET*)

FLOCK

OF

BIRDS

(optional)

EthernetPC2IPSOUND

CARDPCI

VIDEO

AGP

VIDEO

XD

IF

RFA

MP

TD

3

TD

4

TD

5

TD

6

TD

7

TD

0

TD

1

TD

2

FE

PS

SC

B

EQ

4

BM

P

EXTERNAL I/O

MODEMAC CONTROLLER

XFMR BOX

TO MONITOR

TO PC

TO PERIPHERIALS

TO MODEM

TO CARD RACK

230Vac230Vac

115Vac

115 or 230Vac

230V

ac

115V

ac

BACK END PROCESSOR

ECG Patient Interface

3.5" MOD

CD-ROMHard Drive

SONY VCRSVO-9500MD

SONY B/W PRINTERUP-890MD

TO OUTLET

INTERNAL I/O

PCI CABLE

230Vac

Vid

eo O

utpu

ts

Net

wor

k C

onne

ctio

n

US

B C

onne

ctio

n



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-2-2 Dataflow Control Description

5-2-2-1 Data SetsEach scan mode will produce data to a corresponding data set in the Image Memory. The data sets are represented in ring-buffers. Each active data set will be allocated to one of the following types of acquisition data:

• 2-D tissue data• Doppler data• M-mode data• 2-D Color flow • Trace data• Video Y-component data• Video UV-component data• Color M-mode data• RF data



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

Section 5-3Front End Processor

The Front End Processor generates the strong bursts transmitted by the probes as ultrasound into the body. It also receives weak ultrasound echoes from blood cells and body structure, amplifies these signals and converts them to a digital signal.

Figure 5-5 The Front End

XDIF TD

BoardSum

Rigel

Equalization

Barrel ShiftDigital Gain NCO FIR

TGC Gen

XDIFControl

CommutatorControl

TemperatureSensors

PowerSupplyMonitors

Scan BusInterface

B Mode Processor

SyntheticAperture

Axial InterpDetector

VectorCompound

SmoothingFilter

RateConverter

DynamicRange

EdgeEnhance

FocalZoneSplicer

B ModeM ModeOutput

M PeakHoldScan Bus

Interface

TDControl

Bus

40P040P1

TxSyncBPCLK

HVPwr SupControl

I,Q

Grey 2D, M

PCI Cable to BEP

Scan Control Board

ScanSequencer

TD ControlTxSyncRxSyncGenerator

SystemClockGenerator/Distributor

PCI-PCIBridge

Ring Buffer

I,QCapture

ProcessedCapture(B, M)

PCI Bus

Scan Bus

T/R SwitchProbePortMUX

A/D

Pulser

RFAmp

PreAmp TGC

VideoCapture

Top Plane

Front EndPower Supply

240VAC

+5 V

+3.3 V

+5 V analog

-5 V analog

PS ON

Internal I/O

+12 V

+120 V

I,Q

I2C Master

Scan Bus

PCI Bus


5-8 Section 5-3 - Front End Processor

1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-3-1 Front End Processor Power Supply Board (FEPS, FEPS2, FEPS2.1)The power supply assembly receives approximately 220VAC from the secondary side of the mains isolation transformer.

The FEPS assembly supplies DC regulated power to the Front End card rack of the LOGIQ™ 9. The assembly is configured as a PCB which fits into the right-most slot of the Front End card rack. It interfaces with the back plane to supply power to the Front End circuit boards.

A general enable signal (PS_ON) controls enabling and disabling all FEPS Low Voltage outputs. These include +5VA, -5VA, +5V, 3V3, +12V, and +15V (all except PHVP ‘High Voltage’). An Enable circuit on the FEPS detects when PS_ON becomes valid and holds all outputs off until then.

The high voltage lockout circuit monitors the +5VA, -5VA, +12VA and 3V3 supplies and locks out the PHVP supply in the event that any one of them go below 10% of their nominal value.

PWR_OK is an active high TTL compatible output which provides a status indication of the AC input power. It should be capable of sinking 5mA maximum. The signal switches to a TTL ‘High’ when the AC input voltage reaches the minimum specified input level at power up. Upon loss of input voltage, PWR_OK will go ‘Low’.

5-3-2 FEPS3.xThe FEPS3 Board was introduced with R3.0.0 Software and BT’03. It is not backward compatible with prior hardware as it provides the new voltages (+/- 6V and 13V) required by the TDs (5.x and TD6) and RFAMP2.

Table 5-2 FEPS, Output Comparison

System NameFEPS, FEPS2, FEPS2.1

Nominal OutputFEPS3.x

Nominal Output

5VPA +5.05V +6.0V

5VNA -5.05V -6.0V

5VP +5.05V +5.05V

3V3 3.33V 3.33V

PHVP +121.2V / +24.2 +121.2V / +24.24V

12VP 12.12 13.0V

15VP +15.15 +15.15



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-3-3 Front End SubsystemThe LOGIQ™ 9 Front End Subsystem consists the XDIF (Transducer Interface) board, RF Amp board and eight TD (Transmit Delay) boards.

The Front End Subsystem provides 128 receive and 128 transmit channels as well as gain and bandpass filtering of the received signal.

5-3-3-1 XDIF (Transducer Interface) Board

The XDIF supports four 128 Channel probe ports with the ability to select one of the four probe ports. The XDIF supports a probe multiplexer requiring a 200V (+100V and -100V). The multiplexer in the probe will select 128 of the out of up to 192 channels.

The XDIF uses a T/R (Transmit/Receive) switch on each output to the RF Amplifier board. During transmit the T/R switch prevents the high voltage transmit pulser from damaging the receive preamplifier. During receive the T/R switch isolates the receive preamp from the transmit high voltage pulser.

5-3-3-2 Top PlaneConnects the receive signals from the XDIF board to the RF Amplifier board at the front of the circuit boards.

Figure 5-6 Basic Front End SubSystem

Figure 5-7 XDIF Board Functions



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-3-3-3 RF Amp, RF Amp1.2, RF Amp2 Board(Radio Frequency Amplifier Board)

The RF Amplifier board shall contain 128 channels of the circuitry that is necessary to amplify the small electronic echo signals that are received from the probe transducers. Each channel shall consist of a low-noise, active input termination preamplifier, a time-gain compensation (TGC) amplifier, and a low noise differential drive amplifier (buffer). The RF Amp board shall physically reside in the Beamformer card cage adjacent to the XDIFF board.

The probe level analog input signals shall enter the RF Amp board on a series of board to board connectors that mate the RF Amplifier Board to the XDIFF Board. These connectors carry the transducer level receive signals that originate at the probe and make their way through the probe interface relays, and T/R switches. The digital interface, power supplies, and reference ground shall be provided to the RF Amp board by the system backplane.

Each amplified signal generated by the RF Amp board shall provide a differential output and drive filter circuitry located on the TD boards via the system backplane. The TD boards perform an anti-alias filtering operation and convert the transducer signals to a 12 bit data stream that feeds the digital beamforming electronics.

RF Amp2 BoardThe RF Amp2 Board was introduced with R3.0.0 Software and BT’03. It is not backward compatible with prior hardware as it requires the new voltages (+/- 6V and 13V) provided by the FEPS3 Board.

Figure 5-8 RF Amp, RF Amp2 Functions

Figure 5-9 RF Amp Board Functional Block Diagram



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-3-3-4 TD, TD4, TD5.x, TD6 (Time Delay) Boards (8)

Major functions of the TD boards are:

- Transmitter- Analog Receive- A/D (Analog to Digital conversion)- Digital Receiver (Rigel Beamformer Chip)- Control & Timing

The TD (Time Delay) boards send 128 transmit signals to the XDIF board. The 128 receive channels from the RF board get low pas filtered, converted from analog to digital and then use the Rigel beamformer chip to generate complex digital data signals representing one or two beams of ultrasound echo information sent to the EQ board.

Figure 5-10 Basic TD Board Functions

Figure 5-11 Basic TD Input/Output Signals



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-3-3-4 TD, TD4, TD5.x, TD6 (Time Delay) Boards (8) (cont’d)

Major control signal from the EQ board are the Digital TGC/VREF and Serial Control Bus (I2C). Control signal between the Scan Control board consist of Power, Timing Clocks, TD Control Bus and Fault Interrupts

Time Delay (TD, TD4, TD5) Board Function Summary:

• Each board assigned to a subset of 16 channels.• Generates and amplifies the excitation waveform for each channel.• Digitizes the input RF signal from the RF Amplifier board.• Applies dynamic apodization, dynamic receive delays, and filters to the digitized RF signal.• Automatically adapts receive beams for speed or resolution depending on scans.• Sums detected echo channel to channel, then board to board. (Boards must be contiguous.) The

last TD forwards the total output to the EQ.• Monitors current consumed for transmit and issues a fault signal if overcurrent is detected.

TD5 and TD5.1 (Time Delay 5)The TD5 Board was introduced with R3.0.0 Software and BT’03. It is not backward compatible with prior hardware as it requires the new voltages (+/- 6V and 13V) provided by the FEPS3 Board.

TD5.1 has same functionality as TD5 but larger and fewer ASICs. You can mix TD5s and TD5.1s

TD6 and (Time Delay 6)The TD6 Board was introduced with R6.0.0 Software and BT06. It is not backward compatible with prior hardware as it requires the new voltages (+/- 6V and 13V) provided by the FEPS3 Board.

TD6 has same functionality as TD5.

Figure 5-12 Basic TD Input/Output Control Signals

NOTICEd

DO NOT MIX TD6 boards with TD5.x boards.



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-3-4 Scan Control Board (SCB, SCB2)The Scan Control Board combines onto one board the basic functionality of Image Port (IP), Front End Control and Timing (FECT), Scan Sequencer (SS2) and the Scan Trigger (System Timing).

Figure 5-13 SCB Simplified Block Diagram

FEC INT:TD_HVFAULT*

HVINT*I2CINT*

PRBINT*CWINT*

(From IP2 Block)SCAN TIGGERS(2:0)

EQ_BE_RxSyncPA_SCB_ACFAIL(1:0)

QRS*

LOC_SCAN_BUS(17:0)

System ClocksMFG Test ClocksSCB_EQ_RxSync

VIDEO_DAT(4:0)

From BMP (EBM)BM_SCB_DAT(9:0)

From MEQ (EBM)IQ_SCB_DAT(31:0)

FE_SYTM_BUS(59:0) FECB_CLK(10:0)

LOC_CLK IP_CLK

IP_CLK

EQ_BE_RxSync

LOC_SCAN_BUS(13:0)

LOC

_SLV

_PC

I_B

US

(60:

0)

To MEQ & BMP (EBM)GLOB_SEC_PCI(61:0)

IP_CLKPCI 33MHz

VID_CLK

VP_DAT(7:0)

SCAN SEQUENCER BLOCK

Scan Sequencerand

Peripherals

Scan BusI/FVP_ADR(4:0)

VP_STB

SCAN I/F LE

To MEQ, BMP (EBM)SYS_SCAN_BUS(13:0)

SYSTEM TIMING BLOCK

FECT BLOCK

Front End ControlBoard Block

SystemTimingControl

ClockGeneration

To TD BoardsFEC_TD_BUS(80:0)

LOC_CLK

DSP PCI & CTRLPCI Slave

andDecode

PCI Interface

IMAGE PORT 2 BLOCK

ImageMemory

IPCONTROL

IP_CLK

IP_CLK

IP_CLK

Videoand

PipelinkInput

IP C

TR

L

Loca

l PC

I Bus

Cable From PCPRIM_PCI(52:0)



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-3-4-1 SCB, SCB2 High Level Features• Generates and buffers system clocks:

- 40 MHz (40P0 and 40P1)- 10 Mhz (BPCLK)- TXSync- RxSync

• Configures the beamformer to fire B/M-Mode, Color, or PW Doppler vectors.• Controls scan sequencing in real-time; setting the vector firing order and timing intervals.• PCI interface to Back End Processor (BEP), BMP, and EQ or EBM/EBM2.• Buffers B/M data from BMP/EBM/EBM2, data from the EQ/EBM/EBM2 (for Color and PW Doppler),

and video data from the VCR to transmit to the BEP for software processing and display.• Interface between Host PCI and TD boards.

5-3-4-2 CompatibilityOnly SCB2 Boards should be used with R3.0.0 software and greater

5-3-4-3 Scan Control Board LEDs

Table 5-3 SCB LED Indications

Function Monitored

LED Number LED Color LED Function

I960 Processor DS1 Red i960 Fail

DS2 Yellow i960 Local Bus Activity

Image Port DS3 Red Toggles during Image Port Frames

DS4 Green Toggles during Image Port Frames

DS5 Yellow IP Master Enable

DS6 Yellow IP Master Ready

Pipelink DS7 Red IQ Left FIFO Error

DS8 Red IQ Right FIFO Error

DS9 Red BM FIFO Error

DS10 FIFO’s Empty

Scan Sequence DS11 Red Crash

DS12 Yellow FIFO Error

DS13 Yellow Command Pulse

DS14 Yellow Unused

DS15 Yellow Pause

DS16 Green Unused

DS17 Green Happy Light - Toggles during Scan Sequence

DS18 Green Happy Light - Toggles during Scan Sequence



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-3-4-3 Scan Control Board LEDs (cont’d)

Table 5-4 SCB2 2365739 LED Indications

LED Number LED Color LED Function

DS1 Green FPGA Programming Done (Passed)

DS2 Red i960 Fail

DS5 Green Toggles during Image Port Frames

DS6 Red Toggles during Image Port Frames

DS7 Red Crash

DS8 Yellow FIFO Error

DS9 Yellow Command Pause

DS10 Yellow Unused

DS11 Yellow Pause

DS12 Green Unused

DS13 Green Happy Light (toggles during Scan Sequence)

DS14 Green Happy Light (toggles during Scan Sequence)



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-3-5 Equalization (EQ) Board (component of EBM Board)

5-3-5-1 General DescriptionThe EQ dynamically gains and filters the received signal output from the final beamformer sum. TGC control calculates range dependent analog and digital gains. The digital gain is applied to the I/Q signal. The gained signal is then rotated in frequency to place the frequency of interest in the passband of the subsequent FIR lowpass filter. The rotator center frequency may also be range dependent. These controls, and the selection of the FIR coefficients may also be processing bank, vector number, or transmit focal zone dependent.

Figure 5-14 EQ Board Block Diagram

ScanControl

Bus

SCANControl

I/F

LocalBoard

Control

TemperatureMonitoring

Circuits

VoltageMonitoring

Circuits

IICSPROM

IICA/D

Converters

LocalBoardControl

LocalBoardControl

XDIF/Probe BusTo: XDIF & Relay

Comm Control BusTo: XDIF

LocalBoardControl

XDIFand

Probe I/F

Commutator

Control I/F

LocalBoardControl

CLK-10MHZ

CLK-10MHZ

AnalogDelay

BaseTGC

DynamicApodization

AnalogTGC

DigitalTGC

TGC BusTo: TDs

V-RefGen

MUX

BARRELSHIFTER

GainMod’s

5

GainMod’s

5LUTDelay

Td: I-dat

21

I (L,R)

5

Td: Q-dat

21

Q (L,R)

16

17

17

16

I (L,R) I (L,R)

16

Q (L,R)

16

Q (L,R)

16

I (L,R)

16

Q (L,R)

16

I (L,R)

16

Q (L,R)

16

I (L,R)

16

Q (L,R)

16

I (L,R)

Q (L,R)MULTIPLIER NCOM

NCOFPGA

FIR

FIR

CoefRAM

CoefRAM

�Data Pipe BusTo: BMP/SCB

BARRELSHIFTAND

OUTPUTFPGA

EQ Board Block Diagram



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-3-5-2 Basic Functions• Compensates for the attenuation of the transmitted signal in tissue by depth: performs TGC based

on focal zone.• Compensates for frequency shift (TFC) in tissue, needed in B-Mode and M-Mode.• Filters out harmonics and optimizes signal to noise ratio.• Delivers amplified and corrected I & Q data to the BMP and the Scan Control Board.• Interfaces probe detection and probe ID signals between the XDIF and the host.• Controls transducer commutator (multiplexer) for muxed probes with more elements than channels

in the beamformer.• Monitors active probe temperature.• Masters the front end (FE) I2C busses for voltage and temperature monitoring.• Turns off PHVP on the card rack power supply if a TD board pulls too much power or malfunctions.



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-3-6 B/M Mode Processor (BMP) Board

5-3-6-1 General DescriptionThe B/M-mode Processor (BMP) subsystem takes the digital complex data from the EQ subsystem and converts it to either B-mode (2D) or M-mode (timeline) data.

• Processes I & Q data for B-Mode and M-Mode imaging.• Calculates echo signal’s amplitude.• Converts sample rate to display rate.• Implements dynamic range and edge enhancement.• Splices multiple focal zones into one image.• Sends processed B/M data to the Scan Control Board.

Figure 5-15 BMP Internal Functions

Figure 5-16 BMP Control Inputs/Outputs



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-3-7 EBM, EBM2 BoardThe EBM Board was used on forward production units starting with BT’02 (November 2002). The EBM2 Board was used on forward production units starting with R3.0.0 Software (BT’03 October 2003). The detailed functionality is found in the previous EQ and BMP sections.

5-3-7-1 OverviewThe EBM/EBM2 board is the data path interface board between the last Time Delay board (TD) and the Scan Control Board (SCB). The EBM/EBM2 receives data from the Time Delay boards, processes the data for depth attenuation effects, and passes the data on to the B/M processor, then to the Scan Control Board. This board is composed of two main sections the Equalization (EQ) and the B/M Mode Processor (BMP).

The EQ section compensates for the attenuation of ultrasound in tissue. The attenuation of ultrasound in tissue is usually modeled as being linearly dependent on frequency and depth. The EQ section provides two major data processing functions to compensate for this phenomenon, Time Gain Control (TGC), and Time Frequency Control (TFC). Using TGC and TFC, the EQ ”equalizes” image signals by removing depth dependent attenuation effects from the signal, hence the name ”equalization” board. In layman terms, the EQ gives a point deeper in the body an equal opportunity to contribute to the ultrasound image as one closer to the body’s surface.

The BMP section process IQ Vectors from the EQ to create B and M mode vectors. This design is composed of 12 major blocks; Synthetic Aperture, Axial Interpolator, Detector/Vector Compounder, Smoothing Filter, Rate Converter, Dynamic Range Compression, Edge enhance, Splicer, B–Mode Output, M–Mode Output, Vector Configuration and the PCI Interface.

5-3-7-2 Modes of OperationThe EBM/EBM2 equalization design section supports two input data buses from the final summer of the TD board set. The two buses are referred to as the I and Q data buses (or pipes). Each two’s complement bus is 24 bits wide and passes data from the final TD board to the EBM/EBM2 board. Different system modes of operation cause the two data pipes to handle data in different ways. The EBM/EBM2 board transfers output data to the Scan Control Board over two, two’s complement sixteen bit I and Q buses. Internal EBM/EBM2 board data pipes are sixteen bit two’s complement format.



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-3-7 EBM, EBM2 Board (cont’d)

5-3-7-3 EBM/EBM2 Interface with XDIF relay boardThe EBM/EBM2 EQ section supports an eight-bit read/write data interface to the XDIF relay board. The interface is used to transfer commutator control information to the selected probe and provides host access to the XDIF relay board itself. The EBM/EBM2 board monitors four probes present and four probe hook lines from the XDIF relay board. The EBM/EBM2 EQ section monitors the lines, and generates an interrupt signal when any of the signals change state. The interrupt signal will be debounced to limit the frequency with which probe interrupts may be generated. The EBM/EBM2 board also measures the temperature of the selected probe over two lines from the XDIF relay board. The SCE pulse signal connected to the EBM/EBM2 EQ section in order to be able to support the Global Beamforming future development.

Figure 5-17 EBM/EBM2 Board Block Diagram

Power Supply HV Control

Probe Temperature

Sensor

High SpeedSSRAM ~ 9Mbit

Fan Control /Power SupplyMeasurement

Configuration Flash

(Host Programmed)

BarrelShifter

Delay

Multiplier

NCOLUT

17

I(L,R)

17

Q(L,R)

16Q(L,R)

ComplexMult

32-tapFIR

32-tapFIR

16

I(L,R)

16

Q(L,R)

BarrelShift &Output Block

16

I(L,R)

16

Q(L,R)

CoefRAM

CoefRAM

24

I(L,R)TD: I-Data

24

Q(L,R)TD: Q-Data

CLK-10MHzCLK-40MHz

16

5

Analog Delay

BaseTGC Analog

TGC V-refGEN

DynamicApodization

Digital TGC

MUX

SCANCtrlI/F

PCII/F

I2CI/F

XDIF/Probe

I/F

16

Q(L,R)

16

I(L,R)

TGC / Vref Bus

CommutatorCtrlI/F

Gain Mod’s

5

PSCtrlI/F

TestVector

Generator

SyntheticAperture

AxialInterpolation

LowPassFilter

Detector &Vector

Compound

16

16

16

16

16

16

15

RateConverter15

VectorConfiguration

DynamicRange

Compress

EdgeEnhance Splicer8 8

B-ModeOutput

M-ModeOutput

8

8

15

8

8

B/M ModeOutput

Test VectorCapture

10 MSB

PCII/F

Local SCAN Bus

FIFO8Kx18

FIFO8Kx18

FIFO8Kx18

SRAM64Kx16

PCI BUS

SCAN CONTROL BUS

I2C BUS

CLK-20MHz

CLK-20MHz

IQ (Q) Data

(I) Data

XDIF Interface BuXDIF Probe Interf

Power Supply Con

RXSYNCTXSYNC

TXSYNC

RXSYNC Delayed

RXSYNC Delay

HV Line

16I(L,R)

5TFC



Probe Temperature

Sensor

Probe Temperature

Sensor





Configuration Flash

(Host Programmed)

Configuration Flash

(Host Programmed)

BarrelShifter

Delay

BarrelShifter

Delay

MultiplierMultiplier

NCONCOLUT

17

I(L,R)

17

Q(L,R)

17

I(L,R)

17

I(L,R)

17

Q(L,R)

17

Q(L,R)

16Q(L,R)

16Q(L,R)

ComplexMult

ComplexMult

32-tapFIR

32-tapFIR

32-tapFIR

32-tapFIR

16

I(L,R)

16

Q(L,R)

16

Q(L,R)



16

I(L,R)

16

I(L,R)

16

Q(L,R)

16

Q(L,R)

CoefRAMCoefRAM

CoefRAMCoefRAM

24

I(L,R)TD: I-Data

24

Q(L,R)TD: Q-Data

CLK-10MHzCLK-40MHz

16

5

Analog Delay

Analog Delay

BaseTGCBaseTGC Analog

TGCAnalog TGC V-ref

GENV-refGEN

DynamicApodization

DynamicApodization

Digital TGC

Digital TGC

MUXMUX

SCANCtrlI/F

SCANCtrlI/F

PCII/FPCII/F

I2CI/FI2CI/F

XDIF/Probe

I/F

XDIF/Probe

I/F

16

Q(L,R)

16

I(L,R)

TGC / Vref Bus

CommutatorCtrlI/F

CommutatorCtrlI/F

Gain Mod’s

5

PSCtrlI/F

PSCtrlI/F

TestVector

Generator

TestVector

Generator

SyntheticApertureSyntheticAperture

AxialInterpolation

AxialInterpolation

LowPassFilter

LowPassFilter

Detector &Vector

Compound

Detector &Vector

Compound

16

16

1616

1616

16

16

1616

1616

16

16

1616

1616

1515

RateConverter

RateConverter1515

VectorConfiguration

VectorConfiguration

DynamicRange

Compress

DynamicRange

Compress

EdgeEnhance

EdgeEnhance SplicerSplicer88 88

B-ModeOutputB-ModeOutput

M-ModeOutput

M-ModeOutput

88

88

1515

88

88

B/M ModeOutput

Test VectorCapture

B/M ModeOutput

Test VectorCapture

10 MSB

PCII/FPCII/F

Local SCAN Bus

FIFO8Kx18FIFO8Kx18

FIFO8Kx18FIFO8Kx18

FIFO8Kx18FIFO8Kx18

SRAM64Kx16SRAM

64Kx16

PCI BUS

SCAN CONTROL BUS

I2C BUS

CLK-20MHz

CLK-20MHz

IQ (Q) Data

(I) Data

XDIF Interface BuXDIF Probe Interf

Power Supply Con

RXSYNCTXSYNC

TXSYNC

RXSYNC Delayed

RXSYNC Delay

HV Line

16I(L,R)

16I(L,R)

5TFC



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-3-7 EBM, EBM2 Board (cont’d)

5-3-7-4 B–Mode Output BlocksThe B–mode output block collect vector data and tags for delivery to the Scan Control Board. It can form output vectors from one or multiple input vectors (multi–transmit focus). The vector tags are used to form the control bytes in the output vector. Only complete vectors are sent to the BM_OUTPUT Block. The maximum vector length shall be 512 pixels.

5-3-7-5 M–Mode Output BlockM–mode acquisition is nearly always a multiple firings per output vector operation. When the vector rate is higher than the display rate a peak accumulate function shall be used to provide an output which is the point–by–point peak signal amplitude of all the firings since the last output. The M–mode output block usually outputs one processed M vector after combining the receive vectors from several firings. The maximum ratio of input vectors to output vectors is 256, although this number is transparent to the hardware. M_GATE tag shall control when the current peak accumulation stops, the vector is sent and a new vector is formed. The peak accumulation shall be reset after the data is sent to the BM_OUTPUT Block.


5-22 Section 5-4 - Back End Processor (BEP 1)

1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

Section 5-4Back End Processor (BEP 1)

The Back End Processor (BEP 1) receives the data from the Front End Electronics, stores it in memory, performs scan conversion to pixel domain, and drives the system RGB monitor.

Back End Processor software is also providing Color Flow, Doppler, and M-Mode Processing.

NOTE: Specifications mentioned about the Back End Processor (BEP) will be minimum requirements. The actual hardware could exceed these specifications as technology advances.

Figure 5-18 CPU/Back End Processor BEP1

SOUND CARD

SLOT 5

DIGITAL OUTSPEAKER OUT

MIC INLINE OUT

LINE IN

PCI VIDEO

SLOT 3

AGP VIDEO

SLOT 2

SLOT 7

10/100bT

PARALLEL

COM1

COM2 (EXT)

USB1

USB2

PC MOTHERBOARD

PCIO MODULEATX POWER SUPPLY

UPS

HARD DRIVE

ECG

MOD

CD RW

IDE #2

JWR1

SLOT 4

PC2IPRS232 #3RS232 #4

I2C

PC2IP

SLOT 6

AC POWER

RS422

RGB OUT

JFP1

SVGA OUT 1

SVGA OUT 2

S/C VIDEO OUT

SVGA IN

POWER

PCI BIRD CARD

Front Panel

ETHERNET

PCIO Board

PCVIC Board

HD LED

IDE #1

UPS Battery

Optional 3D�system

SLOT 1

Control

MIDDLE DRIVE BAY

BOTTOM DRIVE BAY

INTERNAL DRIVE BAY

TOP DRIVE BAY

CPU #1

CPU #2

256

MB

DIM

M

256

MB

DIM

MD

IMM

Slo

t #1

DIM

M S

lot #

2

DIM

M S

lot #

3

DIM

M S

lot #

4

JWOL1

AGP Slot

PCI Slot #1

PCI Slot #2

PCI Slot #3

PCI Slot #4

PCI Slot #5



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-4-1 EnclosureThe EMC enclosure shall house an ATX Power Supply with UPS battery backup, an ATX style motherboard with minimum of 512 MB of RAM and two 733MHz processors

5-4-2 PCI CardsFive (5) PCI slots on the mother board shall contain the following:

1.) PCI Video Card - Digital Video to the Touch Panel2.) Sound Card - Sound Blaster Live for audio to speakers3.) Blank or PCI Bird 3D Card - Option4.) PC2IP Card - GE designed. PCI Bus interface to the Front End Processor5.) Network Interface Card - 3Com Ethernet Card

5-4-3 AGP Video Card - SVGA Video to the PCVIC Card• Analog output shall comply with the SVGA specification.• Resolution shall be 800x600.• Support for 32 bit True Color• Minimum of 8 Mbytes of high speed Video RAM, expandable to at least 16 Mbytes.• 128-bit internal memory interface.• Hardware supported asynchronous bit block transfer (80 Mpixels/sec).• Full Direct 3D and Open-GI support (desirable).

5-4-4 PCIO BoardThis GE designed board does not plug into any slot but is mounted to the inside of the PC chassis.

- Power and Internal PCI control signals

5-4-5 PCI Video Card- Input from AGP Video card- SVGA output to the image monitor- RGB output to color printer



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-4-6 UPS Battery OperationThe UPS batteries provide power to the Back End Processor to enable a controlled shut down of the processor. The UPS batteries will drain slightly when the system is in the off condition. The off condition is defined as:

- Circuit Breaker in the OFF position- System unplugged from the wall outlet

If the system is left in the OFF condition for an extended period of time (3 to 5 days or more), the system may not boot up or may beep when turned ON. Should this occur, the system needs to recharge the UPS batteries. This could take 15 minutes to as long as 24 hours, depending on the battery age, system input voltage and system temperature.

To eliminate draining the UPS batteries, the system should remain plugged into the wall outlet with the circuit breaker in the ON position.

The expected life of the battery is approximately one (1) year.

5-4-7 Internal Storage Devices:• A 20 or 40 Gigabyte EIDE Hard Disk Drive (HDD) inside the Back End Processor cabinet.• 3.5 inch Magneto-Optical Drive (MOD) (available from front of scanner).• CD-RW Drive (available from front of scanner).

5-4-8 Location of the Back End Processor

Figure 5-19 Backend Processor 1 mounted in scanner

P3 Backend Processor

Front of Scanner

Rear Side of Scanner

P4 Backend Processors typically have a fan in the center of the coverLeft Side of scanner



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-4-9 Inputs (BEP 1)

5-4-9-1 AC Power

5-4-9-2 DC Voltages

5-4-9-3 Input Signals

5-4-9-4 Bi-directional Signals

Table 5-5 AC Power

Input Description Connection from:

230 VAC AC Power AC Distribution Box > Backend Processor

Table 5-6 DC Input Voltages

Input Description Connected to:

+5Vstb Standby voltage DC Power Supply via Backplane

GND Electrical Ground DC Power Supply via Backplane and II/O

Table 5-7 Input Signals

Signal Name Description Signal Path

PWR_OK* Power verification signal from Card Rack Card Rack > IIO > PC2IO

ON/OFF Switch Signal from the ON/OFF switch on the Control Panel and from the Reset button on the rear of the External I/O.

Top Console > IIO > PC2IOON/OFF Reset (EIO) > IIO > PC2IO

I2C Register Interrupt Interrupt signal from I2C Bus EIO > IIO > PC2IO

Microphone in to BEP Microphone signal from Monitor (Top Console) Top Console > IIO > BEP

Audio in to BEP Audio from VCR or Doppler AudioReplay Audio from VCR > IIO > BEP

Doppler Audio Out from Card Rack > IIO > BEP

Table 5-8 Bi-directional Signals


UPS Control RS232 Control Signals to and from the UPS BEP > IIO

RS232 XDCTRL Not Used PC2IO > IIO > Not Used

I2C Bus Data bus used for Remote Control of External Units and for reading module versions. PC2IO > IIO > EIO

Spare RS232 Not Used PC2IO > IIO > Not Used

VCR Remote Ctrl (RS232) Control signal to Internal VCR PC2IO > IIO > VCR

USB #1 USB bus to Top Console PC2IO > IIO > Top Console

COM 1 Can be configured to transfer report page data PC2IO > IIO > EIO

COM 2 Modem PC2IO > IIO > EIO (Rear of Module) > Modem

Ethernet Standard TCP/IP Ethernet BEP > IIO > EIO > External Network

USB #2 USB Bus for External Units BEP > IIO > EIO > External USB Unit



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-4-10 Outputs

Table 5-9 Output Signals


+5VDC DC Voltage PC2IO > IIO

+12VDC DC Voltage PC2IO > IIO

PS_ON* TBD (Active Low) PC2IO > IIO > Card Rack

Standby TBD PC2IO > IIO > Top Console

SVideo SVideo Out PCVIC > PC2IO > IIO > EIO

CVideo Composite Color Video PCVIC > PC2IO > IIO > EIO

VGA VGA High Resolution Video to External Video Screen PCVIC > PC2IO > IIO > EIO

VGA VGA High Resolution Video to Internal Video Screen (Top Console) BEP > Top Console

BW Video RGB BW Video from RGB. This signal is not used on LOGIQ™ 9

PCVIC > PC2IO > IIO > EIOThis signal is not used on LOGIQ™ 9

Audio Out Audio Out from BEPBEP > IIO > Internal VCR

BEP > IIO > EIO > External VCR

TRIG Video Trig Signal PC2IO > IIO > EIO



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

Section 5-5Back End Processor (BEP 2)

The Back End Processor (BEP 2) receives the data from the Front End Electronics, stores it in memory, performs scan conversion to pixel domain, and drives the system RGB monitor.



Figure 5-20 CPU/Back End Processor BEP2

Frame Grabber

RGB OUT

SVGA OUT

1

SVGA OUT

2

S/C VIDEO

OUT

DVI IN

POWER

DGIO Board

DGVIC Board

Control

512 M

B D

IMM

512 M

B D

IMM

Channel A

DIM

M S

lot

#0

Channel B

DIM

M S

lot

#0

Channel A

DIM

M S

lot

#1

Channel B

DIM

M S

lot

#1

10/100bT

PARALLEL

COM1

USB1/2

PC

MOTHERBOARD

AT

X P

OW

ER

SU

PP

LY

UP

S

HARD DRIVE

ECG

MOD

DVD RW

IDE

#2

PO

WE

R

AC

PO

WE

R

Front Panel

Header

Front

PanelHD Led

SA

TA

0

MIDDLE DRIVE

BAY

BOTTOM DRIVE

BAY

INTERNAL DRIVE BAY

TOP DRIVE BAY

CHASSIE FAN

CPU

AGP Slot

RS232 #3

RS232 #4

I2C

PC2IPIIB

RS422

USB3/4

USB3/4

Motherboard

SVGA

PCI Slot #2

PCI Slot #1

PCI Slot #5

FAN quick disconnect

Chassis

Rear Fan

FP

US

B 1

CP

U F

an

SCSI Card

PCI Slot #3

PCI Slot #4

PCI Slot #6

AGP card with DVI Output

FP

US

B2

USB5/6



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-5-1 EnclosureThe EMC enclosure shall house an ATX Power Supply with UPS battery backup, an ATX style motherboard with minimum of 512 MB of RAM and one 2GHz processor.

5-5-2 PCI CardsSix (6) PCI slots on the mother board shall contain the following:

1.) Sound Card - Sound Blaster Live for audio to speakers2.) Blank or FOB3.) PCI Video Card - Digital Video to the Touch Panel4.) USB Control5.) PC2IP Card - GE designed. PCI Bus interface to the Front End Processor6.) Blank or CW option

5-5-3 AGP Video Card - DVI Video to the DGVIC• Analog output shall comply with the SVGA specification.• Resolution shall be 800x600.• Support for 32 bit True Color• Minimum of 8 Mbytes of high speed Video RAM, expandable to at least 16 Mbytes.• 128-bit internal memory interface.• Hardware supported asynchronous bit block transfer (80 Mpixels/sec).• Full Direct 3D and Open-GI support (desirable).

5-5-4 PCIO Board:This GE designed board does not plug into any slot but is mounted to the inside of the PC chassis.

- Power and Internal PCI control signals

5-5-5 PCVIC Card- Input from Motherboard AGP Video (BEP 2.0)

This GE designed board does not plug into any slot but is mounted to the inside of the PC chassis.

- SVGA output to the image monitor- RGB output to color printer



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-5-6 DGVIC, DGIO and ADD Cards BEP 2.1 (BT’02, November 2002)The ADD Card is a PCI card that mimics the AGP video and provides a digital video output to the DGVIC board.

The DGVIC converts the digital video to RGBS, SVGA (to Monitor and External I/O), S-video and Composite video outputs.

The DGIO provides signals and power to I/O boards. Signals like PS_ON, I2C, RS232, PC Power and PC On/Off.

5-5-7 Additional Memory (RAM) (BT’03, October 2003) - BEP2.2Additional memory was added to the motherboard for R3.0.0 Software and BT’03. One of the 256 MByte SIMM modules was replaced with a 512 MByte module. This brings the total RAM memory to 768MBytes and designated the unit to be a BEP2.2.

5-5-8 DGVIC/DGIO Upgrade It is possible that older P3 Back End Processor video chains could be upgraded to digital. This involves replacing the Analog AGP Video card with a Matrox video card that has analog and video outputs.

The PC2IO/PCVIC Tray assembly is also replaced with the DGIO/DGVIC Tray.

Digital video is supplied by the Matrox video card to the DGVIC for distribution to peripherals. Monitor video is taken directly from the Analog output of the Matrox video card instead of the DGVIC.

5-5-9 UPS Battery OperationThe UPS batteries provide power to the Back End Processor to enable a controlled shut down of the processor. The UPS batteries will drain slightly when the system is in the off condition. The off condition is defined as:




The expected life of the battery is approximately one (1) year.

5-5-10 Internal Storage Devices• A 40 Gigabyte EIDE Hard Disk Drive (HDD) inside the Back End Processor cabinet.• 3.5 inch Magneto-Optical Drive (MOD) (available from front of scanner).• CD-RW Drive (available from front of scanner).



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM


Figure 5-21 Backend Processor 2 mounted in scanner

BEP 2

Front of Scanner

Rear Side of Scanner

Left Side of scanner



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-5-12 Inputs

5-5-12-1 AC Power

5-5-12-2 DC Voltages


Table 5-10 AC Power













Microphone in to BEP Microphone signal from Monitor (Top Console) Top Console > IIO > BEP

Audio in to BEP Audio from VCR or Doppler AudioReplay Audio from VCR > IIO > BEP

Doppler Audio Out from Card Rack > IIO > BEP



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM


NOTE: BEP2.x processors have one Com Port and six USB Ports. The Com Port is connected to the modem via the Internal I/O. A USB to Serial Converter feeds the external serial connection via the Internal I/O. BEP 2.1 Processors have digital video coming from a Matrox or ADD card going to the DGIO/DGVIC Tray. BEP 2.x processors have Ethernet and Analog Video on the motherboard.

5-5-12-5 USB to Serial Adapter Cable Setup (RS232 Serial Port Connector on the External I/O)

The Prolific USB to RS232 Adapter Cable (black one) should be properly set up when the Base Image Load is applied to the system. However, if you need to set a specific parameter for the USB COM Port (COM1) perform the following steps:

- After booting up with the Service Key (Dongle), entering Maintenance Mode and Windows, select My Computer>Properties>Hardware Tab>Device manager.

- Under Ports (COM & LPT) select “Prolific USB-to-Serial Comm/Port (COM 3)” and select Properties.

- Under the Port Settings TAB you can set the Bits per second, Data bits, Parity Stop Bits and Flow Control to the desired values.




RS232 XDCTRL Not Used PC2IO > IIO > Not Used


Spare RS232 Not Used PC2IO > IIO > Not Used







Table 5-14 Factory Default Values

Signal Name Setting

Bits Per Second 9600

Data Bits 8

Parity None

Stop Bits 1

Flow Control None



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-5-13 Outputs



+5VDC DC Voltage DG2IO > IIO

+12VDC DC Voltage DG2IO > IIO

PS_ON* TBD (Active Low) DG2IO > IIO > Card Rack

Standby TBD DG2IO > IIO > Top Console

SVideo SVideo Out DGVIC > DG2IO > IIO > EIO

CVideo Composite Color Video DGVIC > DG2IO > IIO > EIO

VGA VGA High Resolution Video to External Video Screen DGVIC > DG2IO > IIO > EIO

VGA

VGA High Resolution Video to Internal Video Screen(Top Console)

BT06 17” LCD (with Matrox VID card)

BEP > Top Console

(2 connectors: LCD and PCI DGVIC)


DGVIC > DG2IO > IIO > EIOThis signal is not used on LOGIQ™ 9



TRIG Video Trig Signal PC2IO > IIO > EIO


5-34 Section 5-6 - Back End Processor (BEP 3.x)

1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

Section 5-6Back End Processor (BEP 3.x)

The Back End Processor (BEP 3.x) receives the data from the Front End Electronics, stores it in memory, performs scan conversion to pixel domain, and drives the system RGB monitor.



Figure 5-22 CPU/Back End Processor BEP3.x

On BEP 3.x with LCD units only:

This card is replaced with the Matrox Dual Output video card



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-6-1 EnclosureThe EMC enclosure shall house an ATX Power Supply with UPS battery backup, an ATX style motherboard with minimum of 512 MB of RAM and a 3.2 GHz processor.


1.) USB 2.0 Hub Card2.) Blank or PCI Bird Card3.) PCI Video Card4.) PCI DGVIC Card5.) PC2IP Card6.) Blank or CW Card

5-6-3 AGP Video Card - DVI Video to the DGVIC Card• Analog output shall comply with the SVGA specification.• Resolution shall be 800x600.• Support for 32 bit True Color• Minimum of 8 Mbytes of high speed Video RAM, expandable to at least 16 Mbytes.• 128-bit internal memory interface.• Hardware supported asynchronous bit block transfer (80 Mpixels/sec).• Full Direct 3D and Open-GI support (desirable).• AGP Video Card (CRT only)• Matrox Dual Output Video Card replaces standard AGP Video card (LCD only).

5-6-4 PCI DGVIC and ADD Cards The ADD Card is a PCI card that mimics the AGP video and provides a digital video output to the PCI DGVIC board.

The PCI DGVIC converts the digital video to SVGA (to External I/O), S-video and Composite video outputs. It also provides signals and power to I/O boards. Signals like PS_ON, I2C, RS232, PC Power and PC On/Off.

5-6-5 UPS Battery OperationThe UPS batteries provide power to the Back End Processor to enable a controlled shut down of the processor. The UPS batteries will drain slightly when the system is in the Off condition. The Off condition is defined as:




The expected life of the battery is approximately one (1) year. Expected battery lifetime for frequent standby use is six (6) months.



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-6-6 Internal Storage Devices:• A 80 Gigabyte EIDE Hard Disk Drive (HDD) inside the Back End Processor cabinet.• DVD Drive (available from front of scanner).


Figure 5-23 Backend Processor mounted in scanner

BEP 3 / 3.5

Front of Scanner

Rear of Scanner

Left Side of Scanner



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-6-8 Inputs (BEP 3.x)

5-6-8-1 AC Power

5-6-8-2 DC Voltages



NOTE: BEP3 processors have one Com Port and 12 USB Ports. The Com Port is connected to the Internal I/O. BEP 3 Processors have digital video coming from a Matrox or ADD card going to the DGIO/DGVIC or PCI DGVIC Tray. BEP 3 processors have Ethernet and Analog Video on the motherboard.

Table 5-16 AC Power

























1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-6-9 Outputs



+5VDC DC Voltage Bulkhead > IIO


PS_ON* TBD (Active Low) PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > Card Rack

Standby TBD PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > Top Console

SVideo SVideo Out PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > EIO

CVideo Composite Color Video PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > EIO

VGA VGA High Resolution Video to External Video Screen PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > EIO



PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > EIOThis signal is not used on LOGIQ™ 9



TRIG Video Trig Signal PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > EIO



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

Section 5-7Back End Processor (BEP 4.x)

The Back End Processor (BEP 4.x) receives the data from the Front End Electronics, stores it in memory, performs scan conversion to pixel domain, and drives the system RGB monitor.



Figure 5-24 CPU/Back End Processor BEP4.x



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-7-1 EnclosureThe EMC enclosure shall house an ATX Power Supply with UPS battery backup, an ATX style motherboard with minimum of 1 GB of RAM and a 3.4 GHz processor.


1.) PCI Video Card2.) Blank or PCI Bird Card3.) USB Cable4.) PCI DGVIC2 Card5.) PC2IP3 Card6.) Blank or CW Card

5-7-3 AGP Video Card - DVI Video to the DGVIC Card• Digital output shall comply with the DVI specification.• Resolution shall reflect the installed monitor specifications.• Support for 32 bit True Color• Minimum of 8 Mbytes of high speed Video RAM, expandable to at least 16 Mbytes.• 128-bit internal memory interface.• Hardware supported asynchronous bit block transfer (80 Mpixels/sec).• Full Direct 3D and Open-GI support (desirable).• PCI Express Video Card

5-7-4 PCI DGVIC2 and ADD2 Cards The ADD2 Card is a PCIe card that mimics the SVGA video and provides a digital video output to the PCI DGVIC2 board.

The PCI DGVIC2 converts the digital video to SVGA (to External I/O), S-video and Composite video outputs. It also provides signals and power to I/O boards. Signals like PS_ON, I2C, RS232, PC Power and PC On/Off.

5-7-5 UPS Battery OperationThe UPS batteries provide power to the Back End Processor to enable a controlled shut down of the processor. The UPS batteries will drain slightly when the system is in the Off condition. The Off condition is defined as:


If the system is left in the OFF condition for an extended period of time (3 to 5 days or more), the system needs to recharge the UPS batteries. This could take as long as 24 hours, depending on the battery age, system input voltage and system temperature.


The expected life of the battery is approximately one (1) year. Expected battery lifetime for frequent standby use is six (6) months.



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-7-6 Internal Storage Devices:• A 80 Gigabyte EIDE Hard Disk Drive (HDD) inside the Back End Processor cabinet.• DVD Drive (available from front of scanner).


Figure 5-25 Backend Processor mounted in scanner

BEP 4.x

Front of Scanner

Rear of Scanner

Left Side of Scanner



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-7-8 Inputs (BEP 4.x)

5-7-8-1 AC Power

5-7-8-2 DC Voltages



NOTE: BEP4.x processors have one Com Port and 12 USB Ports. The Com Port is connected to the Internal I/O. BEP4.x Processors have digital video coming from an ADD2 card going to the DGIO/DGVIC or PCI-DGVIC2 Tray. BEP4.x processors have Ethernet and Analog Video on the motherboard.

Table 5-21 AC Power










ON/OFF Switch Signal from the ON/OFF switch on the Control Panel.(Reset button on the rear of the External I/O not active) Top Console > IIO > PC2IO














1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-7-9 Outputs





PS_ON* TBD (Active Low) PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > Card Rack

Standby TBD PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > Top Console

SVideo SVideo Out PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > EIO

CVideo Composite Color Video PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > EIO

VGA VGA High Resolution Video to External Video Screen PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > EIO



PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > EIOThis signal is not used on LOGIQ™ 9



TRIG Video Trig Signal PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > EIO


5-44 Section 5-8 - BEP Power On Path

1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

Section 5-8BEP Power On Path

(refer to Figure 5-26 on page 5-44 )

The Back End Processor is powered ON by:

- Press and release the OP I/O Standby (On/Off) switch. - The signal from the OP I/O goes to the II/O (A4) and through the rack power relay in the

Internal I/O.- The PC Power ON signal from the II/O (B6) goes to the PC2IO (D2) then to the BEP

motherboard commanding the BEP Power Supply to turn ON.

Figure 5-26 BEP Power On Path



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

Section 5-9BEP Power Off Path

(refer to Figure 5-27 on page 5-45 )

The Back End Processor is powered Off by:

- Press and release the OP I/O Standby (On/Off) switch.- The signal from the OP I/O goes to the II/O (A4) and through the rack power relay in the

Internal I/O to the I2C register.

- Software detects the request to power down via the I2C buss from the II/O (B5) to the BEP (D1).

- The system begins a controlled shut down procedure closing applications, files, turning off FE rack power and finally BEP power.

Figure 5-27 BEP Power Off Path


5-46 Section 5-10 - Operator Console Control PWA

1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

Section 5-10Operator Console Control PWA

Figure 5-29 and Figure 5-28 show the audio path through the Operator Console Control Printed Wire Assembly.

Figure 5-28 USB-OP Console Control PWA - Power

Figure 5-29 USB-OP Console Control PWA - Audio



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-10-1 Console Main Cable

5-10-1-1 Main Cable Connector Functions - Prior to BT04

Figure 5-30 Main Cable Drawing - prior to BT04

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-10-1-1 Main Cable Connector Functions - Prior to BT04 (cont’d)

5-10-1-2 Main Cable Connectors with Pinouts - Prior to BT04

Table 5-26 Main Cable Composition Prior to BT04

Item Function Lower to Description

A Safety Ground Connector A - G Safety Ground Connector

B DVI to DVI Interface B - I Interface to the Touch Screen B- I

C RGB to the Main Monitor C - H RGB to the Main Monitor C - H

D 110 VAC to the Main Monitor D - J 110 VAC to the Main Monitor D - J

E USB Audio, Microphone E - K USB Audio, Microphone and DC for Operator Panel

F DC Power and Control F - K DC Power and Control to the Operator panel

G Safety Ground Connector A - G Safety Ground Connector

H RGB to the Main Monitor C- H RGB to the Main Monitor C - H

I DVI to DVI Interface B - I Interface to the Touch Screen B - I

J 110 VAC to the Main Monitor D - J 110 VAC to the Main Monitor D - J

K USB Audio, Microphone and DC E/F - K USB Audio, Microphone and DC for Operator Panel

L Microphone to the Operator panel E - L to the Operator panel Microphone

M “Z” Release Cable From piston to “Z” release handle on the console

Table 5-27 Connector A & G- Safety Ground

Pin Signal

1 Ground

Table 5-28 Connector B & I - Touch Screen Interface

Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal

1 LVDS Data 2- 10 LVDS Data 1+ 19 Ground

2 LVDS Data 2+ 11 Ground 20

3 Ground 12 21

4 13 22 Ground

5 14 +5V 23 LVDS Clock -

6 +5V 15 Return 24 LVDS Clock +

7 Return 16 +12V Backlight

8 17 LVDS Data 2-

9 LVDS Data 1- 18 LVDS Data 2-



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM


Table 5-29 Connector C & H - Touch Screen Interface


1 Red 6 Red Ground 11 nc

2 Green 7 Green Ground 12 nc

3 Blue 8 Blue Ground 13 H Sync

4 nc 9 nc 14 V Sync

5 nc 10 Sync Ground 15 nc

Table 5-30 Connector D & J - 110VAC to Monitor


1 110 VAC 2 Ground 3 Neutral

Table 5-31 Connector E - USB, Audio & Microphone


1 nc 6 USB 5V 11 Ground Audio - Right

2 nc 7 USB 5V 12 Ground Microphone

3 Audio - Left 8 USB D+ 13 Ground USB

4 Audio - Right 9 nc 14 Ground USB

5 Microphone 10 Ground Audio - Left 15 USB D-

Table 5-32 Connector F - Op Console Power


1 +15 6 +12V 11 Standby LED 0

2 +15 7 +12V 12 nc

3 nc 8 +12v 13 +12 Ground

4 On/Off SW0 9 +15 Ground 14 Ground USB

5 On/Off SW1 10 +15 Ground 15 USB D-



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM


Table 5-33 Connector K- Op Console Power, Audio, Mic, Control


1 Standby LED 0 13 +15V 25 nc

2 nc 14 + 15V Ground 26 nc

3 On/Off SW1 15 nc 27 USB 5V

4 On/Off SW0 16 nc 28 USB Ground

5 +12V 17 MIcrophone 29 USB 5V

6 +12V Ground 18 Microphone Ground 30 USB Ground

7 +12V 19 Shield Power/Control 31 USB D+

8 +12V Ground 20 Shield Audio/Mic 32 USB D-

9 +12V 21 Audio - Left 33 Shield USB

10 +12V Ground 22 Audio - Left Ground 34 nc

11 +15V 23 Audio - Right

12 + 15V Ground 24 Audio - Right Ground

Table 5-34 Connector L- Console Microphone

Pin Signal

1 Microphone

Microphone Ground



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-10-1-3 Main Cable Connector Functions - BT04 and after

Figure 5-31 Main Cable - BT04 and after

Table 5-35 Main Cable Composition - BT04 and after

Item Function Lower to Description

A Safety Ground Connector A & G Safety Ground Connector

B DVI to DVI Interface B & I Interface to the Touch Screen B- I

C Housing Terminals C & H Video for Main CRT

D 110 VAC to the Main Monitor D & J 110 VAC to the Main Monitor D - J

E USB Audio, Microphone E - K USB Audio, Microphone and DC for Operator Panel

F DC Power and Control F - K DC Power and Control to the Operator panel

G Safety Ground Connector A & G Safety Ground Connector

H RGB to the Main Monitor C & H RGB to the Main Monitor C - H

I DVI to DVI Interface B & I Interface to the Touch Screen B - I

J 110 VAC to the Main Monitor D & J 110 VAC to the Main Monitor D - J

K USB Audio, Microphone and DC E/F - K USB Audio, Microphone and DC for Operator Panel

M “Z” Release Cable From piston to “Z” release handle on the console

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-10-1-4 Main Cable Connectors with Pinouts - BT04 and after (5119218)

Table 5-36 Connector A & G- Safety Ground - BT04 and after (5119218)

Pin Signal

1 Ground

Table 5-37 Connector B & I - Touch Screen Interface - BT04 and after (5119218)


1 LVDS Data 2- 10 LVDS Data 1+ 19 Ground

2 LVDS Data 2+ 11 Ground 20

3 Ground 12 21

4 13 22 Ground

5 14 +5V 23 LVDS Clock -

6 +5V 15 Return 24 LVDS Clock +

7 Return 16 +12V Backlight

8 17 LVDS Data 0-

9 LVDS Data 1- 18 LVDS Data 0+

Table 5-38 Connector C & H - Video for Main CRT - BT04 and after (5119218)


1 TMDS Data 2- 10 TMDS Data 1+ 19 Ground

2 TMDS Data 2+ 11 Ground 20 nc

3 Ground 12 nc 21 nc

4 nc 13 nc 22 Ground

5 nc 14 +5V 23 TMDS Clock -

6 DDC Clock (SCL) 15 +5 Return 24 TMDS Clock +

7 DDC Data (SCA) 16 Hot Plug Detect C1 Analog Red

8 Analog Vert Sync 17 TMDS Data 0- C2 Analog Green

9 TMDS Data 1- 18 TMDS Data 0+ C3 Analog Blue

C4 Analog Horz Sync

C5 Ground



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-10-1-4 Main Cable Connectors with Pinouts - BT04 and after (5119218) (cont’d)

Table 5-39 Connector D & J - 110VAC to Monitor - BT04 and after (5119218)


1 110 VAC 2 Ground 3 Neutral

Table 5-40 Connector E - USB, Audio & Microphone - BT04 and after (5119218)


1 nc 6 USB 5V 11 Ground Audio - Right

2 nc 7 USB 5V 12 Ground Microphone

3 Audio - Left 8 USB D+ 13 Ground USB

4 Audio - Right 9 nc 14 Ground USB

5 Microphone 10 Ground Audio - Left 15 USB D-

Table 5-41 Connector F - Op Console Power - BT04 and after (5119218)


1 +15 6 +12V 11 Standby LED 0

2 +15 7 +12V 12 nc

3 nc 8 +12v 13 +12 Ground

4 On/Off SW0 9 +15 Ground 14 +12 Ground

5 On/Off SW1 10 +15 Ground 15 +12 Ground


5-54 Section 5-11 - Patient I/O (Currently not supported by the LOGIQ™ 9)

1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

Section 5-11Patient I/O (Currently not supported by the LOGIQ™ 9)

The Patient I/O is mounted inside the Backend Processor’s cabinet with its connector panel available on the front of the scanner.

The Patient IO contains the electronics for ECG, phono and two analog inputs. One of the inputs has programmable gain. The module extracts respiration from ECG. The electronics also contains a pacemaker detector. The four inputs are separately isolated because of safety requirements.

Inputs

- Phono (from a phono heart microphone)- ECG / Respiration- AUX1- AUX2 (Pulse/Pressure)

These signals are optically isolated from the rest of the system.

Outputs

Serial Trace Data via Internal I/O to the SPD Board.

Figure 5-32 Patient I/O - Block Diagram

Digital Trace Data

PHONO

AUX 1

ISOLATION

AUX 2

ECG / RESPIRATION

(Pulse/Pressure)

PHONO

ECG

AUX1

AUX2

A/D

(Pulse/Pressure)

to PC2IO



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

Section 5-12Internal I/O

The Internal I/O is the interface between the Card Cage, PC Module, and the rest of the system, including the Top Console and the Peripherals. Table 9-26 on page 9-45 and Table 9-30 on page 9-58 have information on cable call-outs.

Figure 5-33 Internal I/O Basic Interconnect

INTERNAL I/O

PC2IO

PCVIC

TV

vid

eo,

SG

VA

& I2

C

Pow

er

SVGA BD.

PC2IP

UPS

PAT I/O

RS232

Power

Power

Serial data, I2C

RS232, I2C& ctrl. signals

EXTERNAL I/O

PERIPHERALS(VCR & printers)

AC POWER& FANS

3D &ROTATIONADAPTER

FRONT-ENDPROCESSING

MODULE

SVGAMONITOR

TV - RGBS

TV

vid

eo, a

udio

,R

S23

2, c

trl.

sign

als

Ctr

l. si

gnal

s

Ctr

l. si

gnal

s

Ctr

l. si

gnal

sau

dio

& T

V v

ideo

Pow

er

TV video, SVGA, RS232 &I2C

Power

RS

232,

US

B, I

2C, E

ther

net,

SV

GA

, TV

vid

eo&

ctr

l sig

nals

Pow

er

TOP CONSOLE

US

B, a

udio

, ctr

l. si

gnal

s

Pow

er

SVGASVGA

BACK-END PROCESSING MODULE

Pow

er

Eth

erne

t, U

SB

,C

OM

1/2

& a

udio


5-56 Section 5-12 - Internal I/O

1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

Section 5-12 Internal I/O (cont’d)

Internal I/O Enhancement for BT’03 (FC200423)Modifications were made to the Internal I/O in October of 2003 to enhance the performance of the Microphone function. Resistor values were changed in the microphone amplifier circuit to increase the gain, a capacitor was added to reduce noise as well as a modified wiring scheme and differential pre-amp to reduce noise. This new FRU is backwards compatible.

Figure 5-34 Internal I/O Module Overview

50M

50M

LeftRight

RightLeft

AUDIO OUT

AUDIO IN

RS-232C

VIDEO OUT

VIDEO IN

SONY VCR SVO-9500MD

A8A9

A6A7

A2

A11

A10

USB, +12PC, MIC IN, AUDIO OUT

PC/VIC

PC2IO

D1

D2

Remote

ECG

MOD

CD/RWFLOCK OF BIRDS�

(option)

Ethernet

PC2IP

SOUND CARD

PCI VIDEO

AGP VIDEO

UPS CNTRL

Mic InLine OutLine In

10/100 T

USB #1USB #2

COM1

COM2 (EXT)

Power from PC

I/O-PC2IOSignals Cable

PC MODULE

Video Rcvr

Op Control

Audio AmpMic Pre-Amp

Video/Mic

AC Power

Speaker

MONITOR

OP PANELA1

A3

A4

A5

B5

B6

B7

B9

B8

B2

B1

B3

B4

A15

A14

TO CARD RACK

TO�INTERNAL I/O�

BOARD

To AC CONTROL ASSY�for FAN SPEED�

RegulationUSER INTERFACE

RS-232C

Video Output

B/W Video In

SONY B/W PRINTER�UP890MD

SONY�COLOR PRINTER�

UP-2900MD

INTERNAL I/O BOARD

PC�

MO

THER

BO

AR

D

D3

D4

D5

SVGA from AGP

SVGA Out

RGB & Sync

SVGA VIDEO

SVGA VIDEO

COLOR PRNT�VIDEO

COLOR PRNT�VIDEO

TOUCH PANEL�VIDEO

TOUCH PANEL�VIDEO

PCI Bus to FEP�Cardrack

RGB Out

On LCD units only:

Matrox Dual Output video card



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

Section 5-12 Internal I/O (cont’d)

The Internal I/O board performs buffering and distribution of video and control data from various sources to multiple destinations.

• SVGA (R, G, B and Sync.) are fed from the BEP, directly up to the system monitor. Another set of RGB can be fed to a color printer.

• Composite video, black and white video and S-Video are buffered and distributed to VCR and printers.

• The analog Doppler signals are fed from the Spectrum Doppler board to the VCR audio inputs and through a switch where audio from VCR playback also is input, to the BEP and then to the speakers.

• Serial RS-232 interface signals from the BEP are fed to the destinations; VCR, Color Printer and Modem.

• Serial USB interface signals from the BEP are fed to the Front Panel and to EIO.• Remote control signals for printers are generated on the I/O board.• The Footswitch is connected to the I/O board.• An AC Power Interface controls power on/off and fan speed.

Figure 5-35 Internal I/O Back End Processor Connections



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-12-1 Location in the UnitThe Internal I/O Module is plugged into the Card Rack (at the end nearest to the rear of the system).

5-12-2 LEDsNine green LEDs indicate that the respective DC Voltages are OK.

NOTE: The -15 V LED is not used on the LOGIQ™ 9. It is normal for it to be off (not lit).

5-12-3 FusesAll output voltages are fused

5-12-4 Jumpers and Dip-switchesThere are no Jumpers or Dip Switches on the Internal I/O.

Figure 5-36 Internal I/O: Green LEDs for Power Status.



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-12-5 Inputs

5-12-5-1 DC Voltages

5-12-5-2 Video Input Signals

5-12-5-3 Audio Input Signals


Input Description Connection from

+3.3 VDC Input DC Voltage DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32

+5 VDC Input DC Voltage DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32



-15 VDC -Not used on the L9 -Input DC Voltage DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32

+6 VDC (analog) Input DC Voltage DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32

–5 VDC (analog) Input DC Voltage DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32

+5 VDC Input DC Voltage Backend Processor > J17

+12 VDC Input DC Voltage Backend Processor > J17)

Table 5-43 Video Input Signals


SVGA Video Signal to External I/O PC2IO (Connector J16)

SVHS Video Signal to VCR & External I/O PC2IO(Connector J16)

SVHS Video Signal to MBD (IMP) VCR (Connector J11)

Luma Video Signal to B&W Printer and External I/O PC2IO (Connector J16)

Comp. Video Video Signal to External I/O PC2IO (Connector J16)

Comp. Video Video Signal to MBD (IMP) Color printer

Table 5-44 Audio Input Signals


Two channel audio

Audio signals, summed and distributed

MBD (IMP)

Two channel audio VCR

Two channel audio BEP



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-12-5 Inputs (cont’d)

5-12-5-4 Serial Ports

5-12-5-5 Control Signals

Table 5-45 Serial Ports


USB Standard USB Serial Bus BEPM - Top console

USB Standard USB Serial Bus BEPM - IEIO

Ethernet Standard Ethernet BEPM - IEIO

RS232 Standard RS232 Serial Bus BEPM COM1 - IEIO

RS232 Standard RS232 Serial Bus BEPM COM2 - IEIO

RS232 Standard RS232 Serial Bus PC2IO - Spare (J16)

RS232 Standard RS232 Serial Bus PC2IO - VCR (J16)

RS232 PC2IO - Color printer (Connector J16)

RS232 PC2IO – UPS (Connector J16)

Table 5-46 Control Signals


Control signals Spare MBD/FEC (Connector J16)

Control signals Spare MBD/FEC (Connector J16)

Trace trigger To EIO PC2IO (Connector J16)

Fan control signals To AC Power MBD (Connector J16)

Power control signals To MBD and AC Power PC2IO (Connector J16)

Power on/off To Relay Top Console ON/OFF Switch and EIO Test (Connector J16)

Standby To Top Console PC2IO (Connector J16)



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-12-6 Outputs

5-12-6-1 DC Voltage

5-12-6-2 AUDIO

5-12-6-3 Connectors – Solder Side

Table 5-47 DC Output Voltages

Output Description Connection to

+5 VDC +12 VDC

From BEP

Spare (Connector J21)+5 VDC, -15 VDC,

-5 VDC analog

From Card Rack

+5 VDC +12 VDC

From BEP

Not Used +5 VDC, -15 VDC,

-5 VDC analog

From Card Rack

+5 VDC, +15 VDC,

From Card Rack Not Used

+12 VDC From BEPTop Console

+15 VDC From Card Rack

+5 VDC+12 VDC

From BEP

EIO+5 VDC,

+15 VDC, -5 VDC analog

+6 VDC analog

From Card Rack

Table 5-48 Audio Outputs

Output Description Connection to

Audio (two channels) Audio (Doppler sound) from MBD (IMP), VCR, BEP

Top Console speakers and BEP

VCR and IEIO

Table 5-49 Connectors, Solder side


A12/J21 Spare power, 15pins D-sub, female

A13/J20 Spare – power, 15pins D-sub, female

A14/J24 AC power ctrl, 9pins D-sub, female

A15/P23 Rotation adapter – signals, 15pins D-sub, male

A16/P22 Spare – signals, 25pins D-sub, female

P30 EIO – signals and power, 110pins male



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-12-6 Outputs (cont’d)

5-12-6-4 Interface Connectors – Component SideTable 5-50 Connectors, Component Side


A1/J1 B&W printer, 15pins HD-sub, female.

A2/P4 VCR remote ctrl – RS232: 9pins D-sub, male.

A3/P5 Color printer - RS232: 9pins D-sub, male.

A4/J2 Top Console - Power & signals: 15pins D-sub, female.

A5/P4 Top Console - Signals: 15pins D-sub, male.

A6/J6 Audio out to VCR, left: Phono jack.

A7/J7 Audio out to VCR, right: Phono jack.

A8/J8 Audio in from VCR, left: Phono jack.

A9/J9 Audio in from VCR, right

A10/J10 SVHS out to VCR

A11/J11 SVHS in from VCR

B1/J12 USB to Top console

B2/J13 USB to external I/O

B3/J14 Ethernet

B4/J15 Audio I/O

B5/J16 PC2IO signals

B6/J17 PC2IO power

B7/P18 COM1

B8/P19 COM2

B9/P25 UPS remote control

J32 MBD – signals and power



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

Section 5-13Top Console

The Top Console includes a Stand By/On switch, a keyboard, different controls for manipulating the picture quality, and controls for use in Measure & Analyze (M&A).

BT’03 Consoles added a USB connector to the Upper Op Panel for the Wired Voice Scan Option. This connection should only be used for Wired Voice Scan.

Figure 5-37 Top Console

Figure 5-38 BT’03 Top Console


5-64 Section 5-14 - Monitor

1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

Section 5-14Monitor

17-inch High Resolution Monitor with no interlace scan includes loudspeakers for stereo sound output (used during Doppler scanning).

Figure 5-39 Monitors: CRT (top), 17” LCD option (left), 19” LCD (right)



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

Section 5-15External I/O

The External I/O is the interface between the scanner and all external items.

5-15-1 Location in the UnitOn the rear of the scanner, above the power inlet and power breaker.

5-15-2 Input Signals

Figure 5-40 External I/O


Input Description Connection from/via/to

Footswitch Connector

Footswitch is a mechanical switch that connect a signal to ground.

Internal level is TTL (0-3.3V)

Footswitch > External I/O > Internal I/O > PC2IO (BEP)

DC Voltages from BEP

+5 VDCUsed for Optical Couplers on RS232 signals PC2IO (BEP) > Internal I/O > External

I/O +12 VDC

DC Voltages from Card Rack

+5 VDC

Used for Optical Couplers on FootswitchCard Rack > Internal I/O > External I/O

+15 VDC

-5 VDC analog

+6 VDC analog

External I/O

Right Side of Scanner


5-66 Section 5-15 - External I/O

1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-15-3 Bi-directional Signals



Ethernet Standard 10/100 Base TX Ethernet Ethernet - External I/O - Internal I/O - BEP (Ethernet Connector)

COM1 Serial RS-232 port (Can be configured to transfer report page data to an external processor)

External Device - External I/O - Internal I/O - BEP (COM1)

USB Standard USB (Universal Serial Bus), (0-5V) USB Device - External I/O - Internal I/O - BEP (USB #2))

Modem Internal Modem Telephone Line ConnectionAnalog Phone Line - External I/O

(Connector Panel) - External I/O (Rear Side)- Modem

COM2 Serial RS-232 port (on rear side of External I/O)

Modem - External I/O (Rear Side) - Internal I/O - BEP (COM1)

Burn-in Power On/Off Control

Burn-in Power On/Off Control (on rear side of External I/O) - Used for factory testing. External I/O (Rear Side) - Internal I/O

Figure 5-41 External I/O

EXTERNAL I/OModule

TRIGGER

USB

SVGA OUT

MODEM

FOOTSWITCH

RS232 (COM1:)

Audio (R)

Audio (L)

C-Video OUT

10/100Base-TX

S-Video OUT

BW Video OUT

EXPOSE #1EXPOSE #2

External I/OUpper PWB

To MODEM

Modem PhoneConnection

Burn InPower

ON/OFFControl

Connection toInternal I/O Board

EXTERNAL I/O

PWB



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-15-4 Output Signals

Several signal are fed from the Internal I/O board to an External I/O board located on the rear of the system. This board contains data buffers and a galvanic isolation section.

Different types of signals are fed to connectors accessible on the External I/O.

• R, G, B and Sync are provided for external RGB monitors or printers.• Composite video, black and white video and S-VHS video are buffered and fed to output connectors

for external monitors and printers.• Two serial RS-232 ports are provided for external communication with e.g. the System CPU.• An Ethernet signal from the BEP is fed to an Ethernet connector. It is used for connectivity, including

DICOM Network.



Stereo Audio Stereo audio to external VCR. (Same signal as delivered to internal VCR).

Audio Source (Internal VCR/Microphone/BEP) > Internal I/O > External I/O > External VCR.

Composite Video External composite video, 1.0Vp-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced, sync negative.

PC2IO (BEP) > Internal I/O > External I/O > External Composite Video Device

Super Video (SVHS)

Super VideoLuminance: 1.0Vp-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced.

Color: 1.0Vp-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced.

PC2IO (BEP) > Internal I/O > External I/O > External VCR

Black and White video

External black and white video1.0Vp-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced, sync negative.

PC2IO (BEP) > Internal I/O > External I/O > External B/W Video Device

Trig Trigger Signal, 0-3.3V

SVGASVGA (RGBS) high resolution video output

(Same signal as sent to the systems monitor)

PCIDG/DG VIC > PC2IO (BEP) > Internal I/O > External I/O > External

Monitor

Remote Expose #1 A SW controllable relay, to control external peripherals PC2IO (BEP) > Internal I/O > External I/O > External Peripheral

Remote Expose #2 A SW controllable relay, to control external peripherals PC2IO (BEP) > Internal I/O > External I/O > External Peripheral


5-68 Section 5-16 - Peripherals

1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

Section 5-16Peripherals

A DVR or VCR, an analog or digital Black-and-White Video Printer, and an analog or digital Color Printer may be installed on the scanner. These devices receive video signals from the Internal I/O Board and power from the AC Control Box.

Peripherals are generally specified and approved regionally.

BT’02 (BEP 2.1 and above) systems have digital peripheral capabilities through USB or USB To SCSI converters.



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

Section 5-17Modem and USB Modem

5-17-1 General DescriptionMulti-Tech global modem. The modem is a standard modem that connects to an analog phone line for InSite capabilities.

A USB Modem was introduced at BT04. The USB modem does not require external power, and has no serial connection as it plugs directly into the back of the BEP.

BT07 and later do not support the modem.

5-17-2 Location in the Unit

5-17-3 Inputs/Outputs (non-USB Modem)• DC Voltage from Modem Power (AC/DC Converter)• RS232 from Backend Processor via Internal I/O and External I/O• Analog Phone line via External I/O

5-17-4 FusesNone

5-17-5 Jumpers and Dip-switchesNone

Figure 5-42 Modem: Location in Unit

Global Modem


5-70 Section 5-17 - Modem and USB Modem

1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-17-6 LEDs (non-USB Modem)The Modem has 10 LEDs on its front.

Figure 5-43 LEDs on Modem’s Front Panel

Table 5-54 LEDs on Modem

LED Color Description Normally State

- Red TD (Transmit Data) Flashes during use.

- Red RD (Receive Data) Flashes during use.

- Red CD (Carrier Detect)ON when detecting a carrier from another modem and during

communication.OFF indicates no or broken connection.

- Red 56 (56K Mode) During Power On: Briefly FlashingThese LEDs indicates communication speeds above 14 kbs. If one of this LEDs are ON during communication, it will stay ON

until the modem is reset or connected the next time.At speeds below 14 kbs, these LEDs are OFF.

- Red 33 (V.34 Mode)

- Red 14 (V.32bis Mode)

- Red OH (Off hook)ON when dialing, online, or answering a call

Flashes if puls dialingOff when modem not in use

- Red TR (Terminal Ready)

ON when the system initializes the modem. It indicates that the modem is ready for an outgoing or incoming call.

OFF indicates that communication on the RS232 (COM) port has been broken. The connected (remote) modem will

disconnect.

- Red EC (Error Correction (V.42))ON: Error Correction (V42) is turned ON

Blinking: Compression turned ONOFF: Normal operation.

- Red FX (Fax) Always OFF

TDRD CD 56 3314OHTRECFX



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

Section 5-18Power Distribution

Figure 5-44 Overall Power Distribution

P5FB

2008

04X

FM

R B

OX

FB20

0803

P6

P10

0P

101

P8 P7 P9 P10

P11

070C

5080

To

Co

lor

Pri

nte

r

To

VC

R

To

B/W

Pri

nte

r

070C

5080

070C

5080

FB20

0802

-4

To

FE

ca

rd r

ac

k

FB20

0802

-1

FB20

0802

-3

FB20

0802

-2

INT

ER

NA

L I

/O

Fan

Ass

embl

yFB

2005

80

A13

A12A14

FB20

0795

AC

CO

NT

RO

L B

OX

Mo

de

m

Re

se

rve

d f

or

Wir

ele

ss

Mic

2286

301

PS

_ON

_L(R

PW

ON

N)

L9 P

OW

ER

DIS

TRIB

UTI

ON

DIA

GR

AM

(AC

& D

C)

For 1

00-1

20V

, con

nect

toP

5 pi

n1-4

.Fo

r 220

-240

V,

conn

ect t

o P

5 pi

n 3-

6.F2F1 F3 F4 F5

100-

120V

220-

240V

BE

P

Po

we

r

Su

pp

ly

AC

Ad

ap

ter

120V

120/

230V

220V

220V

220V

5V 3.3V

-12V

5V_s

tndb

y

BE

P

DG

VIC

&D

GIO

B6

J31

J32

FB20

0798

A4 A5 P30

BE

P_12

V

RA

CK

_15V

BEP

_5V

RA

CK_

5VR

AC

K_1

5VB

EP_5

VB

EP_

12V

OP

Pa

ne

l

FB20

0320

PC

I Vid

eo

12

V c

om

es

fro

m B

EP

USB

HU

B

5VIN

VE

RTE

R

3.3V

INV

ER

TER

12V

3.3V 5V

15V

Aud

io

LCD

Dis

play

12V

B1

USB

15V

070D

2802

USB

12v

Ma

in A

C P

ow

er

In

RA

CK

_-5V

RA

CK

_3V3

Inru

sh c

urre

nt li

mite

r

RC

del

ay

AC

Det

ect

120V

AC

_ A

20VA

C12

0VA

C_

B

FAN

OU

T_L

PC

2IP

I96012

V5V

RP

WO

NN

RP

WIS

ON

EX

TE

RN

AL

I/O

J10

A1A2

A3A4

A5A6

A7A8

A9A

10A

11A

12

Fro

nt

En

d

Po

wer

Su

pp

ly

(FE

PS

)

A13

R FX D I F

T D 0

S C B

T D 1

T D 2

T D 3

T D 4

T D 5

T D 6

T D 7

E B M

5VP

A, 5

VN

A (A

nalo

g)

5VP

, 3.3

VP

(Dig

ital)

PH

VP

(120

V)

+/- 1

00V

Pow

er_O

K

PS

_ON

_L(R

PW

ON

N)

RP

WIS

ON

BT'

04 a

nd la

ter s

yste

ms,

the

mod

em is

USB

atta

ched

and

does

not

requ

ire A

C p

ower

.

No

te :

Rep

lace

d by

3 le

ad c

able

(FC

2005

71) a

nd Y

cab

le(5

1126

31) f

or B

T'04

and

late

r sys

tem

s.

No

te :

12V

Mot

herb

oard

Lo

ca

ted

un

de

r B

EP

Pe

rip

he

ral vo

lta

ge

se

lecto

r

To

ma

in m

on

ito

r

To

peri

ph

era

ls

To

op

tio

na

l m

od

em

To

BE

P

Mai

n C

B

Vo

lta

ge

fe

ed

ba

ck f

an

sp

ee

d c

on

tro

l co

min

g

fro

m E

BM

C22

D2

15

V c

om

es

fro

m F

EP

S

Ma

in M

on

ito

r

Ma

in C

ab

leB

EP_5

V

RA

CK

_15V

Lin

e F

ilte

r

RPW

ON

N =

Rac

k P

ower

on

RP

WIS

ON

= R

ack

Pow

er is

on

For B

EP P

ower

on/

off

sign

al p

ath

see

Sec

5-4-

14 (o

n)S

ec 5

-4-1

5 (o

ff)

To P

robe

Bia

s(v

ia X

DIF

)

EB

M g

ener

ates

+/-

100V

from

12V

PO

n ol

der s

yste

ms

the

EQ

pro

vide

s: -1

00V

(fro

m 1

2VP)

+100

V (f

rom

120

V)

15VP

24

V B

att

ery

Pa

ck

for

BE

P U

PS

Min

us le

ad h

as a

20A

fuse

Arro

ws

indi

cate

whi

ch b

oard

s us

eth

is v

olta

ge.

All

volta

ges

and

Pow

er_O

K s

igna

lar

e ge

nera

ted

inth

e FE

PS

exc

ept

as n

oted

.

120V

AC

FR

ON

T E

ND

CA

RD

RA

CK

12V

P (D

igita

l)

+/- 1

00V

from

EBM

for t

est

poin

t onl

yon

FEP

S


5-72 Section 5-18 - Power Distribution

1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-18-1 AC Power Distribution OverviewThe AC Power’s main tasks are to supply the various internal subsystems with AC power and to galvanically isolate the scanner from the on site Mains Power System. To reduce inrush current, an inrush current limiter as well as an EMI filter. Voltage to peripherals can be configured to either 115 VAC or 230 VAC. The AC Power also controls and supplies the 20VAC needed by the systems cooling fan.

5-18-2 AC Power PWB

The mains cord has plugs in both ends. A female plug connects to the scanner and a male plug to the mains outlet on site.

The mains voltage is routed via an EMI filter to the Mains Switch, located on the rear of the system.

The Mains Switch is of the auto fuse type, if for some reason the current grows to high, the switch will automatically break the power.

From the Mains Switch, the AC power is routed via an Inrush Current Limiter (titled: Inrush Limiter in Figure 5-45) to a internal outlet connector for the Mains Transformer.

The Transformer is the galvanic barrier between the rest of the scanner and the on site AC Mains.

Figure 5-45 AC Power Distribution

AC INLET BOXTO OUTLET

M

INRUSHLIMIT

Mainsswitch

230V

ac11

5Vac

230Vac

20Vac

230 115

Fanregulator

L

TRANSFORMER BOX

TO PERIPHERIALS (115 or 230 Vac)

TO MONITOR (115 Vac)

TO MODEM (230 Vac)

TO PC (230 Vac)

TO CARD RACK (230 Vac)

Cable #27

Cable #13

Cable #7TO A14 ON INTERNAL I/O

POWER SUPPLY ON,FAN SPEED CONTROL

CABLES INTERNAL IN AC CONTROL MODULE #27

AC DISTRIBUTION PWB



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-18-2 AC Power PWB (cont’d)

Input voltage to the transformer can be either 230VAC or 115 VAC (two different part numbers/FRUs). The configuration of the plug on the cable to the AC Transformer is different for the two AC Voltages.

From the AC Transformer, there are three outlets;

• 20 VAC• 115 VAC• 230 VAC

The 20 VAC is routed via the fan regulator to the system fan. (See separate description, Chapter 5 - Air Flow Control).

The 115 VAC is routed via a fuse to an AC Voltage selector, used for selecting the right output voltage for the Peripherals outlet and the Monitor. (The alternative voltage to this outlet is 230 VAC.)

The 230 VAC output from the Transformer is routed via a fuse and distributed to the AC Voltage selector for the Peripherals outlet and to the following AC outlets:

• Modem• Back End Processor• Card Rack

Figure 5-46 Connectors on Back of AC Controller


5-74 Section 5-18 - Power Distribution

1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-18-3 AC Controller Differences

Figure 5-47 Original AC Controller Functions



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-18-3 AC Controller Differences (cont’d)

Figure 5-48 AC Controller FC 200403/FC200404

AC C

ontro

ller F

C20

0403

/FC

2004

04


5-76 Section 5-19 - Mechanical Descriptions

1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

Section 5-19Mechanical Descriptions

5-19-1 Monitor

5-19-1-1 Standard• Tilt: 10° forwards and backwards.• Swivel: 90° rotation.

5-19-2 Top Console Positioning

• Vertical Access: The control panel offers 27 inches (200 mm) of vertical adjustment.• Horizontal Access: The control panel offers 45° of horizontal adjustment when the Z-arm is

released.

Figure 5-49 Top Console Positioning



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-19-2-1 17” LCD (Option)• Tilt Adjustable Monitor: Tilt Angle: Up 10°, Down 90°• Range of Movement: Up 89mm, Down 211mm

Left and Right from center: max 855mm• Monitor Arm Neck: plus or minus 90° • Monitor Arm Rotary: plus or minus 150° • Monitor Neck Swivel: plus or minus 90°

5-19-2-2 19” LCD• Side to side ± 33cm (± 15in)• Tilt/Rotate Adjustable Monitor• Tilt Angle: Up 20°, Down 90°• Rotate Angle: 90° right, 90° left• Fold-down and lock mechanism for transportation

CAUTION To avoid injury or damage, make sure nothing is within the range of motion before moving the monitor and monitor arm. This includes both objects and people.Pay attention to the monitor arm position to avoid hitting it against anyone or anything.

Figure 5-50 LCD Monitor - Positioning (17” LCD shown)

CAUTION To avoid injury or damage, make sure nothing is within the range of motion before moving the monitor and monitor arm. This includes both objects and people.Pay attention to the monitor arm position to avoid hitting it against anyone or anything.


5-78 Section 5-19 - Mechanical Descriptions

1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-19-3 Wheels/BrakesCheck that the brakes and direction locks function as described below.

NOTE: The swivel lock and brake cannot be engaged (pressed down) at the same time since pressing the main brake releases the swivel lock and pressing the swivel lock releases the main brake. Therefore, if the swivel lock is engaged you need to press the main brake pedal (#2) twice to lock the scanner from rolling. Once will release the swivel lock and once again will engage the main brake in full lock as stated in step 1.

Table 5-55 Brakes and Direction Lock Instructions

Step Task Expected Result(s)


To engage the brakes in full lock


To release the brake


To engage swivel lock.You may need to move the system around a little to get the wheels to lock into the locked

direction.


To release swivel lock



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

Section 5-20Air Flow Control

5-20-1 Air Flow DistributionThe fan at the rear of the scanner draws air into the scanner, through the foam filter, and pushes it through a flange that moves the air into a cavity on top of the card rack.

Air holes in the bottom of this cavity allow the air to move down through the card rack. Air exits the card rack through holes on its internal side panel into the interior of the scanner near the rear of the Backend Processor.

The internal fan in the Backend processor draws the air into the PC allowing it to pass through the interior of the PC, and exit the lower front area of the scanner.

Section 5-21Service Platform

5-21-1 IntroductionThe Service Platform contains a set of software modules that are common to all ultrasound and cardiology systems containing a PC backend. This web-enabled technology provides linkage to e-Services, e-Commerce, and the iCenter, making GE’s scanners more e-enabled than ever. The Service Platform will increase service productivity and reduce training and service costs.


5-80 Section 5-21 - Service Platform

1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-21-2 Global Service User Interface (GSUI)

5-21-2-1 InternationalizationThe user interface provided by the service platform is designed for GE personnel and as such is in English only. There is no multi-lingual capability built into the Service Interface.

5-21-2-2 Service LoginSelect the wrench icon in the status bar at the bottom of the scan display screen. This icon links the user to the service login screen.

NOTE: In R4.x.x and after, the wrench icon has been removed from the upper display. To access the Service Platform, click on Utility, then select Service.

5-21-2-3 Access / SecurityThe service interface has different access and security user levels. Each user is only granted access to the tools that are authorized for their use.

NOTE: OnLine Center access to the scanner requires a password and they must have ‘Disruptive’ permission and customer input to run diagnostics.

Every access request, whether successful or not, will be logged into a service access log that is viewable to authorized users.

Figure 5-51 Login Screen for Global Service User Interface

Table 5-56 Service Login User Levels

User Level Access Authorization Password

Operator

Authorized access to specified diagnostics, error logs and utilities. Same acquisition diagnostic tests as GE Service.

uls

Administrator uls

External Service gogems



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-21-3 Service Home PageThe navigation bar at the top of the Customer Service Home Page screen allows the user to select from several tools and utilities.

Figure 5-52 Customer Service Home Page



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-21-4 Error Logs TabFrom the Error Logs Tab the Log Viewer displays four categories with pull-down sub-menus and an Exit selection. The Service Interface allows scanner logs to be viewed by all service users.

NOTE: Beginning with R4.x application software, some of the Log Viewer screens are different than those shown in this section. However, the basic functionality has not changed. Also, some additional navigational features have been added, such as Last Page and Get Page.

The Filter Error log is keyed to GE Service login access permissions and is not available to customer level analysis.

NOTE: Beginning with R4.x application software, filtering has been removed and all users have the same access to the logs.

The log entries are color-coded to identify the error level severity at a glance.

The Service Interface supports the transfer of these logs to local destinations such as the MOD, CD-Rom or DVD drive.

Table 5-57 Log Entry Key

Severity Error Level Color Code

1 Information Green

2 Warning Blue

3 Error Red

Figure 5-53 Log Viewer / Logs / Log Entries



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-21-4-1 LogsThe eight sub-menus of the Logs category are System, Power, Infomatics, Temperature, Probe, Board, DICOM, and UPS Power.

NOTE: Figure 5-53 provides a graphical example of the log entries for the System Logs.

Log table headings for the different logs are as follows:

• SystemLog entry headings include Time Stamp, Error Level, Package, and Error Message, and TouchPanel keystrokes (BT06).

• PowerLog entry headings include Time Stamp, Error Level, Analog_5V, DC_5V, DC_3.3V, Pos_15V, Analog_12V, Pos_HV, Neg_5V, Pos_100V, Neg_100V.

NOTE: For systems running R2.x and R3.x application software, the log entry headings include Time Stamp, Error Level, Package, and Error Message.

NOTE: In R4.x application software, the Power log present in R2.x and R3.x application software was renamed UPS Power as described below.

NOTE: All readings in the Power log are in mV. Readings for analog voltages will vary depending on whether the system has an FEPS2.x or FEPS3.x. It is normal for the Pos_HV, Pos_100V, and Neg_100V to read 0. Readings for these voltages are not captured in this log. To check these voltages, run the Power Supply diagnostic.

• InfomaticsLog entry headings include TimeStamp, Revision, PtID, PtDOB, PtSex, PtWeight, PtHeight, ExamID, ExamCategory, ExamCurDate, ExamStartTime, ExamEndTime, ActiveScanTime, FreezeTime, TimeOfImageArchived, AccessionNumber, RefPhyName, ReadingPhyName, Operator, RoomNo, BodyPatternSelected, InstitutionName, ActiveModeTime, CalculationMade, CalculationTime, HelpUsage, ProductName, SystemSWRev, NoOfSWModules, SystemPowerOnTime, SystemIdleTime, NoOfBoards, ProbeChangedDate, ProbeChangedTime, ProbeChangedStatus, NoOfProbeSlots, NoOfProbes, ProbeID, ProbeSerialNumber, and ActiveExamProbes.

• TemperatureLog entry headings include Time Stamp, Error Level, Package, Upper FEC Sensor, and Lower FEC Sensor.

NOTE: In R4.x application software, the log entry headings include Time Stamp, Error Level, Package, Average, TD0, TD1, TD2, TD3, TD4, TD5, TD6, TD7, EQOut, EQIn, and RFI.

• ProbeLog entry headings include Time Stamp, Error Level, Package, Error Message, Severity, Revision, and three (3) new labels that have not yet been named.

• BoardLog entry headings include Time Stamp, Error Level, Package, Board, Severity, and two (2) new labels that have yet been named.

• DICOMLog entry headings include Time Stamp, Error Level, Package, and Error Message.

• UPS PowerLog entry headings include Time Stamp, Error Level, Package, and Error Message.

NOTE: This log was called Power in R2.x and R3.x application software.



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-21-4-2 UtilitiesThe two sub-menus of the Utilities category are Plot Log, and Plot Page.

• Plot LogAllows for the color coded plot of all Log contents with the package on the ‘x’ axis and incident count on the ‘y’ axis.

• Plot PageAllows for the color coded plot of all Page contents with the package on the ‘x’ axis and incident count on the ‘y’ axis.

5-21-4-3 SearchOn the Text Search sub-menu of the Search category, users enter case-sensitive text they wish to find. This filter field works well for filtering the Sys log file for the word “fail”.

Figure 5-54 Utilities Sub-Menus

Figure 5-55 Search Sub-Menu

Plot Log Plot Page



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-21-4-4 ExitThe sub-menu, Exit Log Viewer, returns the user to the Service Desktop home page.

Figure 5-56 Exit Log Sub-Menu



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-21-5 DiagnosticsDetailed Diagnostic information is found in Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting.

NOTE: After performing any diagnostics, detach probes and reboot the system.

5-21-5-1 Diagnostics ExecutionDiagnostic tests are executable by both local and remote users. The Service Platform provides top-level diagnostic selection based on the user’s level and login access permissions. Remote access will require disruptive diagnostic permissions to run Acquisition diagnostics.

5-21-5-2 Diagnostic ReportsDiagnostic tests return a report to the Service Platform. The platform retains the report and allows for future viewing of the diagnostic logs.

Figure 5-57 User Diagnostic Page



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-21-6 Image QualityThe Image Quality page is intended to contain tools for troubleshooting image quality issues.

5-21-7 CalibrationThe Calibration page is intended to contain the tools used to calibrate the system.

Figure 5-58 Image Quality Page

Figure 5-59 Calibration Page

FIELD IS NOT YET POPULATED




1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-21-8 ConfigurationThe Configuration page is intended to be used to setup various configuration files on the system.

The Service Platform is the access and authorization control for remote access to the configuration subsystem.

The enable/disable of software options can be done from this Configuration page.

Starting with BT07 and later, this page contains the remote connectivity setup for InSite ExC.

Figure 5-60 Configuration Page



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-21-9 UtilitiesThe Utilities page contains several miscellaneous tools such as System Shutdown, the Image Viewer Utility, and the iLinq Configuration Utility.

5-21-10 ReplacementThe Replacement page is intended to contain tools used to track replacement parts used in the system.

Figure 5-61 Customer Utilities Page

Figure 5-62 Part Replacement Page




1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-21-11 Planned Maintenance (PM)The PM page is intended to contain the tools used in periodic maintenance of the system.

Figure 5-63 Planned Maintenance Page




1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

Section 5-224D Option

Beginning with BT04 (Application Software R4.X.X), the LOGIQ™ 9 can be configured to perform 4D scans.

5-22-1 Principle of Volume AcquisitionThe underlying principle for 3D volume acquisition and reconstruction is the formation of an image composed of multiple 2D scans at known elevation positions.

The acquisition of volume data sets is performed by 2D scans with special transducers designed for 2D scans, 3D sweeps, and real time 4D scans. These transducers have imbedded motors that control the movement and positioning of the acoustic “stack”. The motor control box generates signals that determine the direction and speed that the stack is driven. The motor controller also generates signals sent to the Scan Control Board (routed through the internal IO) that are used for 3D image reconstruction.

NOTE: The fan on the motor control box is thermostatically controlled. Hence, the fan will only run when necessary. You should note that the fan activates after a fairly short period of use of a 3D/4D probe.

NOTE: There are no LED indicators on the motor controller to aid in determining the presence/absence of AC power to the box.

Figure 5-64 Volume Acquisition

Central 2D-Scan

Start 2D_Scann

Range of VOL-Sweep


5-92 Section 5-22 - 4D Option

1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-22-2 4D Block Diagram

5-22-2-1 Motor Controller to Front Bracket Cable and 4D Probe CableThe connection between the motor control box and the front bulkhead is a 15 pin sub-D (at the motor controller) and a LEMO (at the bulkhead).

Table 5-58 maps the conversion from 15 pin sub-D to 7 pin Lemo.

Figure 5-65 4D BLock Diagram

Table 5-58 Motor Controller to Bracket Cable (2375551) and 4D Probe Cable (2384183) Pin Conversions

Signal Sub D 15 Pin on MC Lemo on L9 (12 pin)Lemo on Probe Cable, 12 Pin

Lemo on Probe Cable, 7 Pin

GND 7 4 4 1

SIN_DRV 1 8 8 2

SIN_RTN 2 7 7 3

ACTIVE 14 2 2 4

COS_RTN 4 5 5 5

COS_DRV 3 6 6 6

HALL1 5 3 3 7



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-22-2 4D Block Diagram (cont’d)

.

Figure 5-66 Pin Diagrams

6 1

57

2

4 3

18

7

129

2

6 11 10

3

5 4

Pin Diagram of 7 pin Lemo connector on the small end of the 4D Probe Cable

Pin Diagram of 12 pin Lemo connector on the large end of the 4D Probe Cable.

81

2 9

12

3

10 11 7

45

6

Pin Diagram of 12 pin Lemo connector on the L9 for the Motor Controller to Front Bracket Cable.


5-94 Section 5-22 - 4D Option

1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM


The pinout of the motor controller to the front bracket requires a 15 pin SUB-D female Connector (MC4) with the following pinout:

5-22-2-2 USB to Motor Controller Cable and Power CableThe connection between the motor control box and the PC backend requires a standard USB compatible 5 pin USB female connector(MC2) with following pin out:

Table 5-59 15-pin SUB-D Pinout for Motor Controller to Front Bracket Cable

PIN Signal name In/Out Description Characteristics

1 SIN_DRV_1 Out Sin1 Motor Drive Line 12 – 28 V 1,5 A rms

9

2SIN_RTN_1/SIN_DRV_3

In/ Out Sin1 Motor Return Line /Sin3 Motor Drive Line

12 – 28 V 1,5 A rms

10

3 COS_DRV_1 Out Cos1 Motor Drive Line 12 – 28 V 1,5 A rms

11

4 COS_RTN_1 In Cos1 Motor Return Line 12 – 28 V 1,5 A rms

12

5 HALL1 In Null puls detector 5V TTL level

13 STRA1 In Strobo generator sign.1 5V TTL level

6 STRB1 In Strobo generator sign.2 5V TTL level

14

ACTIVE Out Indicates that the Mot-Ctrl-Box is connected to the selected probe.

Pull down resistor in Mot-Ctrl_Box with 100 Ohm to GNDSignal low = Mot-Ctrl-Box is connected to sel. probe

7 GND

15 Reserved_1 IN Reserved Input 5V TTL level

8 + 5V Out Output + 5V low power

M1 GND Screw of the housing


Table 5-60 USB to Motor Controller Cable and Power Cable Pin Out


1 VCC IN Power

2 DM Data minus USB 2.0 Compatible

3 DP Data plus USB 2.0 Compatible

4 GND

5 SHELL



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM


The LOGIQ 9 3D/4D motor control box also includes a power supply with connection to the L9 110 VAC power distribution (MC1).

5-22-2-3 Motor Controller to Internal I/O CableA 9 pin SUB-D connection to the L9 Internal IO(MC3) requires the pin out as shown below.

Table 5-61 Motor Controller to Internal I/O Cable Pin Out


1 VOL_TR Out Sig. f. volume start 3,3V TTL level

6 FRAME_TR Out Sig. f. frame start 3,3V TTL level

2 DIRECTION Out indicate probe direction 3,3V TTL level

5

CONN_2 Out Indicate cable connection to Mot-Ctrl-Box

Pull down resistor in mot-Ctrl_Box with 100 Ohm to GND Signal low = Mot_Ctrl_Box is connected to L9 system

7 GND

3 GND

8 NC Not connected

4 RESET IN RESET for Hardware3,3V TTL level signal is low active

9 NC Not connected




5-96 Section 5-23 - Continuous Wave Doppler Option

1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

Section 5-23Continuous Wave Doppler Option

Beginning with BT04 (Application Software R4.X.X), the LOGIQ™ 9 can be configured to perform Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler scans.

The parts needed to perform Continuous Wave Doppler scans include:

• PCI CW Doppler PWA card• Internal CW Doppler Cable• 5 mHz or 8 mHz probe• Mu Metal Shield

5-23-1 Continuous Wave Doppler Signal FlowThe signal path for the CW probes is somewhat different from other LOGIQ™ 9 probes. The signal-path from the probe does not pass through the card rack, it transitions directly from the probe to the back of the BEP. The following block diagram depicts the functional elements of the PCI CW Doppler Card in the BEP.

In very simplified terms, the PCI CW Doppler PWA card generates the CW signal and sends it out C34 on the back of the BEP. The internal CW Doppler Cable transfers the signal from the BEP to the CW Probe via a LEMO connector. The probe transmits the signal into the patient and receives the echo back. The CW Doppler Board amplifies the received signal then sends it via the PCI Interface to PCI Bus and on to the monitor.

Figure 5-67 PCI CW Doppler PWA Block Diagram

Transmitter

PCI I/FController

A/DReceiver

LIMOConnector

Probe I.D.

PC

I Bus

LocalOscillator

Rx Gain

Tx Gain

Sampling Rate

16

Prog.BlockBuffer

2

2

2



1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

Section 5-24PCI CW Doppler PWA card

The CW Doppler has a local controller that configures transmit and receive paths. The controller performs all required signal processing in order to produce 16 bit signed integer I/Q data path.

The CW Doppler transmitter output power is controlled in 1 Volt increments. The output power is adjustable continuously without stopping data collection.

The receiver gain is controlled between 0 and 100% max. gain and allows for 55 dB of gain and is programmable without stopping data collection.

The CW Doppler has a PCI interface that acts as a bus master. An interrupt is generated via the PCI Interface to the Host PC when the defined number of data samples has been acquired in the Block Buffer. The contents of the Block Buffer is DMA'd into Host PC memory.

5-24-1 Internal CW Doppler CableThe internal CW Doppler Cable connects between the PCI CW Doppler PWA to a LEMO brand connector on the LOGIQ9 chassis. The Probe cable has the following pin assignments:

5-24-2 Probe ConnectorThe two probes connect to the system via a LEMO connector: FFA.3S.310.CLAC11. with pin connections provided below. A Resistor, R1, must be installed as an identifier for the probe type:• 5 MHz - 75 K ohm• 8 MHz - 25 K ohm

P1 J1 Conductor Signal

1 2 Coax Center, red jacket DOPIN

2 3 Coax shield, Red jacket. DOPIN GND

4 5 W3 ID0

6 6 Coax center, wht jacket PCW

5 7 Coax shield, Wht jacket. PCW GND

3 8 W5 ID1

10 W1,W2 shield

Shell HW1 W1,W2 shield

Lemo Conductor Signal

2 Coax Center, red jacket DOPIN

3 Coax shield, Red jacket. DOPIN GND

5 R1-2 ID0

6 Coax center, wht jacket PCW

7 Coax shield, Wht jacket. PCW GND

8 R1-1 ID1

10 Outer shield

Shell Outer shield


5-98 Section 5-24 - PCI CW Doppler PWA card

1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM

5-24-3 Mu Metal ShieldMu metal shield is used to block flux field from the L9 isolation transformer mounted below the BEP.


Chapter 6 Service Adjustments 6-1

1/18/10CHAPTER6.FM

Chapter 6Service Adjustments

Section 6-1Overview

6-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 6This chapter describes how to test and adjust the mechanical capabilities of a scanner that may be out of specification. Although some tests may be optional they should only be performed by qualified personnel.

.

Section 6-2Regulatory

Verify, where applicable, that any regulatory information or tests required by national law are present and accounted for, and any regulatory tests required by national law are performed and documented.



6-1 Overview 6-1

6-2 Regulatory 6-1

6-3 Monitor 6-2

6-4 Panel Calibration 6-8

6-5 Z-Release Cable and Gas Spring Adjustment 6-8

6-6 Brake Arm Adjustment 6-13

6-7 Brake Adjustment 6-15

CAUTION SYSTEM REQUIRES ALL COVERSOperate this unit only when all board covers and frame panels are securely in place. The covers are required for safe operation, good system performance and cooling purposes.


Signed Date

TAG &

LOCKOUT



1/18/10CHAPTER6.FM

Section 6-3Monitor


Contrast, brightness and degauss are adjusted using the three (3) keys located on the front of the monitor just below the screen.

6-3-1 Monitor Adjustment (Standard only)

6-3-1-1 DegaussDegaussing refers to the process of removing magnetic-field effects from the monitor. Operation of the monitor within a magnetic field may adversely effect color purity. Degaussing can be used to correct this problem.

To activate the manual degauss:

1.) Press either the <<< or >>> monitor adjustment button while the brightness/contrast adjustment indicator is not displayed on the monitor. To cancel the manual degauss, press the <<< or >>> adjustment button again.

2.) Press the toggle button for brightness and contrast.3.) Press either the <<< or >>> monitor adjustment.

NOTE: The monitor automatically degausses at power on.

Figure 6-1 Monitor Adjustment Switches: CRT (left), 17” LCD option (center), and 19” LCD (right)

DECREASE INCREASEMENU

DECREASE MENU INCREASEDECREASE MENU INCREASE



1/18/10CHAPTER6.FM

6-3-1-2 Brightness and Contrast

To calibrate CRT brightness and contrast, go to Utility -> Test Patterns -> Brightness Calibration. The screen display will change as shown in Figure 6-2 on page 6-3 .

Record any changes to the final brightness and contrast settings and leave this information with the system. Generally speaking, do not change the controls once they have been set. Once set, the display then becomes the reference for the hard copy device(s).

Follow the instructions on the screen. Press the menu button (middle) to adjust the Contrast to 50. Press the menu button again and adjust the Brightness to 100. Decrease the Brightness setting until the inner gray is the same shade as the black box that surrounds it. This brightness setting should range between 35 to 55.

Final adjustment relies on customer approval. Cameras and printers may need to be adjusted to match any monitor changes.

Table 6-2 Brightness and Contrast - Standard

Room Condition Contrast Brightness

Dark Room for Radiology/Cardiology 85 35

Dim Room for Radiology/Cardiology 90 55

Bright Room 100 100

Figure 6-2 Monitor Brightness/Contrast Calibration Test Pattern - Standard



1/18/10CHAPTER6.FM

6-3-1-3 Visible Image Display AdjustmentIf you get a monitor where the image is smaller than the physical CRT displayed area, in other words the image does not fill the screen, you can adjust the size of the visible image display:

1.) Press and HOLD the center button "brightness/contrast (icons)" for about 10 seconds or so, you'll then see an expanded menu. This will allow you to adjust parameters like Color, Size/Center, Geometry, etc. and Utility.

NOTE: It is recommended that only the image size be adjusted as required and not anything else.

2.) Press the Left or Right Arrow buttons to highlight Size/Center then Press the Center button.3.) Use the Center button to select H-Position, H-Size, V-Position or V-Size.4.) Use the Left or Right Arrows to adjust H-Position, H-Size, V-Position or V-Size parameters.5.) When complete use the Center button to select Exit and press the Left or Right arrow buttons6.) Use the Left or Right Arrow buttons to select Exit and press the Center button to exit the main menu.

6-3-2 Monitor Tilt (Standard)The monitor is capable of a full 10° forward and backward tilt. Although the default setting of the tilt tension on the monitor should be adequate to tilt the monitor for your viewing preference, it can be easily adjusted.

The monitor chassis is attached to the monitor mount plate that has a shaft that inserts into the top plate of the scanner. This feature allows the monitor to swivel without need for adjustment.

The monitor mount plate has two points for adjustment.

6-3-2-1 Monitor Tilt Adjustment ProcedurePassing through the monitor mount plate on its underside is a large bolt, with a locking nut on its left side, that provides the tension for monitor tilt. Adjust the tilt tension by loosening or tightening the locking nut on this bolt.

NOTE: The right side of this bolt will receive an Allen wrench to provide resistance when loosening and tightening the locking nut.

6-3-2-2 Monitor Counter-balance Adjustment ProcedureAt the back of the monitor mount plate is a nut securing a bolt passing through the shaft. This bolt has a tapered end and several spring washers that when seated into the cylinder provides a proper counter-balance for the monitor.

6-3-2-3 ToolsPhillips screwdriver

Open-ended wrenches

6-3-2-4 Manpower1 person, 1 hour + travel or

2 people, 1 hour + travel if the monitor needs to be removed.



1/18/10CHAPTER6.FM

6-3-2-5 Procedure

1.) Raise the Control Panel to a height that allows you to work underneath the monitor.2.) Remove the eight (8) Phillips screws holding the Under Shelf Cover to the Shelf Cover Assembly.3.) Remove four (4) Phillips screws holding the monitor Rear Cover Assembly to the monitor chassis.4.) You now have access the monitor tilt and counter-balance adjustments. Adjust accordingly.5.) Install the monitor rear cover assembly to the monitor chassis.6.) Position the shelf cover assembly and secure it in place with the Under Shelf Cover and the eight

Phillips screws.

Figure 6-3 Monitor Tilt Tension Adjustment

Monitor Mount Plate

Tilt Adjustment Bolt Counter-balance Adjustment Bolt



1/18/10CHAPTER6.FM

6-3-3 Monitor Adjustment (17” LCD Option Only)


NOTE: On the 17” LCD monitor, the brightness adjustment comes before contrast.

6-3-3-2 Angularity Test PatternAn Angularity test pattern has been added for the LCD. This test pattern serves as a learning tool for you to become familiar with the effect moving the LCD has on the image.

Pixel test patterns have also been added: Blue/Yellow (B/Y and Y/B), Cyan/Red (C/R and R/C), Green/Magenta (G/M and M/G) and Black/White (K/W and W/K). Pixel patterns should appear to be a uniform color rectangle. If an area of the screen appears to have a dark or light grouping of pixels, first clean the screen to ensure that gel or dust is not causing an optical defect.

6-3-3-3 Color Settings

Table 6-3 Brightness and Contrast - 17” LCD


Dark Room for Radiology/Cardiology


Bright Room 100 100

Figure 6-4 Angularity Viewing Test Pattern - 17” LCD

Table 6-4 Color Settings - 17” LCD

Temperature Gamma Saturation Hue

15000K 2.6 0 0



1/18/10CHAPTER6.FM

6-3-4 Monitor Adjustment (19” LCD Only)


NOTE: On the 19” LCD monitor, the brightness adjustment comes before contrast.

6-3-4-2 Angularity Test PatternAn Angularity test pattern has been added for the LCD. This test pattern serves as a learning tool for you to become familiar with the effect moving the LCD has on the image.

Pixel test patterns have also been added: Blue/Yellow (B/Y and Y/B), Cyan/Red (C/R and R/C), Green/Magenta (G/M and M/G) and Black/White (K/W and W/K). Pixel patterns should appear to be a uniform color rectangle. If an area of the screen appears to have a dark or light grouping of pixels, first clean the screen to ensure that gel or dust is not causing an optical defect.

6-3-4-3 Color Settings

Table 6-5 Brightness and Contrast - 19” LCD


Dark Room for Radiology/Cardiology


Bright Room 100 100

Figure 6-5 Angularity Viewing Test Pattern - 19”LCD

Table 6-6 Color Settings - 19” LCD

Temperature Gamma Saturation Hue

13000K 2.2 0 0


6-8 Section 6-4 - Panel Calibration

1/18/10CHAPTER6.FM

Section 6-4Panel Calibration

The Touch Panel Adjustment/Calibration procedure can be found in Section 7-6-1-1 “Calibration Utilities” on page 7-23.

Section 6-5Z-Release Cable and Gas Spring Adjustment

The operator panel can move up and down (Z direction). A gas spring in the scanner provides a counter force to "balance" the weight of the operator panel and allows for positioning with minimal effort. A lever on the main handle has a cable (similar to a bicycle cable) that provides the release for the gas spring. This cable has one end attached to the release lever and the other end attached to the mechanism on the gas spring piston.

6-5-1 Time RequiredApproximately 1 person for 1 hour plus travel.

6-5-2 ToolsPhillips screwdriver

10mm open-end wrench

Two (2) small slotted screwdrivers

Needle-nose pliers

Small ruler

Large slotted screwdriver

3mm Allen wrench

6-5-3 Preparations

1.) Power Off / Shutdown the scanner.

DANGER DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT IN THIS EQUIPMENT. COMPLETELY POWER OFF AND SHUTDOWN THE SCANNER BEFORE SERVICING.



1/18/10CHAPTER6.FM

6-5-4 Z-Release Cable Adjustment

6-5-4-1 Checking the Release System

1.) Squeeze the Z-release lever and move the operator panel to its highest position. If this is not possible, perform the necessary steps in Emergency Release Procedure on page 6-12.

2.) Place a small ruler next to the Z-release lever as shown in the Figure 6-6 below.3.) Gently wiggle the Z-release lever and measure the amount of play in the lever.4.) If this amount is 3mm or more, there is too much play in the cable. Perform the steps in the section

Z-Release Cable Adjustment on page 6-9 to reduce the amount of play in the cable.5.) Attempt to lower the operator panel by pushing down on it. The operator panel should not move.

While continuing to push down, slowly squeeze the Z-release lever.6.) Note the position of the Z-release lever when the operator panel starts to move. It should be 1/4 to

2/3 of the lever’s range of motion.

CAUTION Before making any adjustments, check the Z-release system to determine what adjustments need to be made.

Figure 6-6 Z-Release Measurement

Z-Release Lever


6-10 Section 6-5 - Z-Release Cable and Gas Spring Adjustment

1/18/10CHAPTER6.FM

6-5-4-2 Cable Adjustment

1.) From underneath the handle use a 10mm open-end (small “ignition” style) wrench to screw in the cable adjustment screw to tighten the Z-release cable.

2.) If you cannot remove enough of the play in the cable using this adjustment, see Cable Adjustment at Gas Spring on page 6-10

6-5-5 Cable Adjustment at Gas Spring

6-5-5-1 Preparations

1.) If not already performed, Power Off / Shutdown the scanner.2.) Remove the right- and left-side covers of the scanner .3.) Remove the front cover of the scanner .4.) Remove the black-and-white printer.5.) Remove the VCR.

NOTE: The height of the printer and VCR make them difficult to remove without first removing the front cover.

Figure 6-7 Z-Release Cable Adjustment Screw

Underside of Z-Release LeverZ-Release CableCable Adjustment Screw

Underside of Screw HeadHalfway Between Castingand Un-squeezed Lever



1/18/10CHAPTER6.FM

6-5-5-2 Procedure

NOTE: The operator panel must be at or near its highest position.

1.) From underneath the handle use a 10mm open-end (small “ignition” style) wrench to screw out the cable adjustment screw so the underside of the screw head is about half way between the casting and the unsqueezed lever. See Figure 6-7 on page 6-10 .

2.) There is a Wire Clamp nestled in the Forked Retainer. Refer to Figure 6-8. Using 2 slotted screwdrivers (one on each side of the clamp) loosen the clamp.

3.) Using needle nose pliers, hold the cable end which is above the clamp and pull upward to take up any cable slack.

4.) Using one of the two slotted screwdrivers, push the Clamp down along the cable so that it is nestled back in the Forked Retainer.

5.) Tighten the clamp with one screwdriver to hold the cable. Let go of the pliers and then use the two screwdrivers to fully tighten the clamp.

6.) Without squeezing the release lever, check that the forked retainer is in its fully up position.7.) Squeeze the release lever and watch the forked retainer move down immediately as the lever is

squeezed, there should be very little play in the cable. Small amounts of play can be taken up (or slackened) with the cable adjustment screw per step 1.

Figure 6-8 Gas Spring Mechanism

WARNINGWARNING Do NOT attempt to pinch together or pry apart the forked retainer. If one of the tines should break off, the gas spring piston may have to be replaced at the factory.

Wire Clamp

Cable End

Forked Retainer


6-12 Section 6-5 - Z-Release Cable and Gas Spring Adjustment

1/18/10CHAPTER6.FM

6-5-6 Emergency Release Procedure

When the operator panel is at or near its highest position it is possible to see the gas spring mechanism with the Black and White Printer or the VCR removed. If the operator panel is stuck in the down position, it is not possible to see the gas spring mechanism as it is down behind the card rack. To avoid removing the Card Rack to make adjustments, try this procedure to raise the operator panel.

1.) Using 3mm Allen Wrench, remove the shoulder bolt holding the release lever on the handle.2.) Tilt the release lever down and pull on the cable as shown in the figure below. This will give

unlimited travel and hopefully release the gas spring. Push up on the operator panel while you are pulling on the cable.

3.) If you have no cable to pull (cable broken) or you are unable to release the gas spring in this manner, you must remove the Card Rack to gain access to the gas spring mechanism.

6-5-7 Procedure Completion1.) Install the VCR.2.) Install the Black-and-White printer.3.) Replace the front cover .4.) Replace the side covers.5.) If required, Power On / Bootup the scanner.

CAUTION Do NOT use excessive force!

Figure 6-9 Release Lever



1/18/10CHAPTER6.FM

Section 6-6Brake Arm Adjustment

Adjustments to the brake arm may be necessary if the pedals do not depress readily nor engage so the front wheels lock in place and do not swivel.

6-6-1 ToolsFlat-head screwdriver

6-6-2 ManpowerOne person, 1 hour + travel

6-6-3 Preparations1.) Remove the front bumper.

Figure 6-10 Brake Adjustment

TOP VIEW

Swivel Lock Pedal /Brake Pedal Release

Brake Pedal /Swivel Lock Release

Brake ArmAdjustment Rod

Front Brake ArmAdjustment Nuts


6-14 Section 6-6 - Brake Arm Adjustment

1/18/10CHAPTER6.FM

6-6-4 Brake Arm Adjustment ProcedureTo adjust the brake arm it is recommended to separate both front adjustment nuts from the brake assembly.

2.) Remove the brake clamps that are inserted through a small hole in the front adjustment nuts and slipped over the nut at its collar.

3.) Loosen the front retaining nuts to allow room for adjustments.4.) With a screwdriver you can pry the front adjustment nuts away from their connectors in the brake

assembly.5.) Set the main brake - the brake assembly should be pulled to the left.6.) Seat the right adjustment rod into the right adjustment nut under the right front wheel as far as it will

go.7.) Seat the right front adjustment nut onto the adjustment rod as far as it will go.8.) In order to insure that the same length of adjustment rod is seated into the two adjustment nuts you

will turn the adjustment rod one turn out of the rear adjustment nut under the front wheel and turn the front adjustment nut off the adjustment rod a similar turn.

9.) Repeat this alternating rotation until the front adjustment nut lines up easily with the connector in the brake assembly.

10.)Push the adjustment nut onto the brake assembly connector and secure the retaining nut tight against the adjustment nut.

NOTE: Repeat the same procedure to adjust the swivel lock. The only difference would be to set the swivel lock prior to the adjustments.

6-6-5 Procedure Completion1.) Install the front bumper.

Figure 6-11 Front Adjustment Hardware

Brake Clamp Screwdriver

Adjustment NutsRetaining Nuts

Brake Assembly



1/18/10CHAPTER6.FM

Section 6-7Brake Adjustment

6-7-1 Front Wheel BrakesService adjustment to the front brakes involve setting the brake so it will properly “bite” the rear tire. The default setting should provide proper braking. If not, follow the procedures below.

6-7-1-1 ToolsAllen Wrenches

6-7-1-2 ManpowerOne person, 1 hour + travel


1.) Set the rear brakes to prevent the scanner from rolling.2.) Remove the front bumper.

6-7-1-4 Front Brake Adjustment Procedure

1.) Refer to Figure 6-12. Use the Allen wrench to add more pressure in order to get more braking action.

2.) If the brakes are too tight, loosen the adjustment with the Allen wrench.3.) Check the brakes and readjust as necessary before replacing the front bumper.

Figure 6-12 Front Brake Adjustment

Adjustment Hole Allen Wrench to Adjust Brake

Wheel Brake


6-16 Section 6-7 - Brake Adjustment

1/18/10CHAPTER6.FM

6-7-2 Rear Wheel Brakes AdjustmentService adjustment to the rear brakes involves setting the brake so it will properly “bite” the rear tire. The default setting should provide proper braking. If not, follow the procedures below to remove the rear wheel and adjust the brake.

6-7-2-1 ToolsBottle JackAllen Wrenches

6-7-2-2 ManpowerOne person, 1 hour + travel


1.) Remove the left- and right-side covers.2.) Remove the upper rear cover.3.) Remove the lower rear cover.

WARNINGWARNING PRIOR TO ELEVATING SCANNER, VERIFY THAT THE FLOATING KEYBOARD IS LOCKED IN ITS LOWEST POSITION. VERIFY THAT THE FRONT BRAKE IS LOCKED AND THE SCANNER IS UNABLE TO SWIVEL. VERIFY THAT THE REAR BRAKES ARE IN THE LOCKED POSITION.

WARNINGWARNING USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN ELEVATING SCANNER. ELEVATING SCANNER WILL MAKE IT UNSTABLE WHICH COULD CAUSE THE SCANNER TO TIP OVER.



1/18/10CHAPTER6.FM

6-7-2 Rear Wheel Brakes Adjustment (cont’d)

6-7-2-4 Rear Wheel Removal Procedure4.) Elevate the scanner by placing the bottle jack on the back frame on the side of the bottom shield of

the wheel you will be removing. You can also use a block of wood as a lever to raise the scanner and place a second block of wood under the chassis to support the rear wheel off of the ground.

5.) Remove the four screws and remove the wheel from the scanner.6.) Use an allen wrench to adjust the brake so it will properly “bite” and release the rear tire.

6-7-2-5 Rear Wheel Installation Procedure

1.) After adjusting the rear brake, install the rear wheel on the scanner. Hand tighten the four screws.2.) Carefully lower the scanner and remove the bottle jack.3.) Tighten the four screws using the weight of the scanner to provide resistance.4.) Verify brake and scanner operation then replace all covers previously removed.

Figure 6-13 Rear Brake Adjustment

Figure 6-14 Rear Brake Adjustment

2 screws removed2 screws removed

from undersidefrom top

BrakeRear BrakeSet / Release

Handle

Area on either sideof bottom shield usedto elevate scanner and

remove rear wheel.


6-18 Section 6-7 - Brake Adjustment

1/18/10CHAPTER6.FM



Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-1

1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM

Chapter 7Diagnostics/Troubleshooting

Section 7-1Overview

7-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 7This section describes how to setup and run the tools and software that help maintain image quality and system operation. Basic host, system, and board level diagnostics are run whenever power is applied. Some Service Tools may be run at the application level.



7-1 Overview 7-1

7-2 Service Safety Considerations 7-2

7-3 Gathering Trouble Data 7-3

7-4 Screen Captures 7-13

7-5 Diagnostics 7-18

7-6 Acquisition Diagnostics 7-19

7-7 I/O Devices 7-24

7-8 Common Diagnostics 7-30

7-9 Utilities 7-33


7-2 Section 7-2 - Service Safety Considerations

1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM

Section 7-2Service Safety Considerations







1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM

Section 7-3Gathering Trouble Data

7-3-1 OverviewThere may be a time when it would be advantageous to capture trouble images and system data (logs) for acquisition through remote diagnostics (InSite) or to be sent back to the manufacturer for analysis. There are different options to acquire this data that would give different results.

7-3-2 Collecting Vital System InformationThe following information is necessary in order to properly analyze data or images being reported as a malfunction or being returned to the manufacturer:

- Product Name = LOGIQ™ 9

From the Utility>System>About screen:

Applications Software

- Software Version- Software Part Number

System Base Image Software

- Base Image Revision- Image Part Number


7-4 Section 7-3 - Gathering Trouble Data

1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM

7-3-3 Collecting a Trouble Image with LogsIf the system malfunctions, press the Alt-D keys simultaneously. This Alt-D function is available at all times, and collects a screen capture of the image monitor, user-defined presets, and the following logs:

• Keyboard Shadow Log• Error Logs• Crash Log• Vital Product Data• DICOM Logs (Beginning with R3.x.x S/W)• Windows Event Logs (Beginning with R4.x.x S/W)• Windows Modem Log (Beginning with R4.x.x S/W)• Diagnostic Logs (Beginning with R4.x.x S/W)• Service Logs (Beginning with R4.x.x S/W)

NOTE: Power Supply and Temperature logs are not currently being updated by the LOGIQ™ 9.

When Alt+D is pressed, a menu box opens. Enter the following information:

• System ID serial number.• Software version.• Date and time of occurrence.• Sequence of events leading to issue.• Is the issue repeatable?• Imaging mode, probe, preset/application.• Media brand, speed, capacity, type.• Save secondary image capture, cine loop, 4D multi-volume loop.

- A choice to store to a pre-formatted MOD (H: drive), CD-RW, USB memory stick, or to the Export directory D: drive (for remote viewing through InSite).

Figure 7-1 ALT+D Dialog Box

Example of R2.x.x screen Example of R3.x.x and after screen



1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM

7-3-3 Collecting a Trouble Image with Logs (cont’d)

NOTE: Restart the application before resuming clinical scanning.

NOTE: The USB memory stick option is only available in R4.0.x and after. To save to a USB memory stick you must insert the stick in the lower front of the console , prior to starting Alt-D, then the memory stick will appear as a destination. Do not attach the memory stick in the Wired Microphone port on the control panel.

NOTE: You MUST select H: or CD-RW as the destination device, otherwise the data is written to the default Export directory on the hard drive. The EXPORT directory is only used for InSite. It is not intended for FEs or Customer use; therefore, choose the H: drive which is the MOD or choose the CD-RW.

NOTE: NOTE: If writing to a CD be sure that it is preformatted.

The subsequent file is compressed and time stamped. The screen capture is a bitmap which eliminates the possibility of artifacts from compression.

Double check the CD or MOD that you made to ensure it contains at least two files. An example is shown in Figure 7-2.

Figure 7-2 Example of Zipped Trouble Image & Logs File



1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM

7-3-4 Capturing Network Logs with Network SnifferA sniffer monitors network traffic and allows you to capture network data without redirecting or altering it.

1.) Access the Windows Desktop using the service dongleFrom the Start menu, select Programs > Distinct > Network Monitor.The Distinct Network Monitor screen opens (Figure 7-3).

2.) On the Distinct Network Monitor Screen (Figure 7-3), select CONFIGURE. The Configuration screen opens.

Figure 7-3 Distinct Network Monitor screen

Figure 7-4 Configuration screen



1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM

7-3-4 Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer (cont’d)

NOTE: Steps 3 - 9 describe how to filter the data so that you only record this system’s network activity.

If you prefer, you may skip the filter section and start the data capture now. If you do, you will capture all network activity, not just this system’s.

3.) On the Configuration screen (Figure 7-5), select the Filters tab > New Filter.Confirm “built-in templates” is selected, and select CREATE.The Select Filter Task screen opens (Figure 7-6).

.

Figure 7-5 Configuration - Filters tab

Figure 7-6 Select Filter Task screen



1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM


4.) On the Select Filter Task screen (Figure 7-6), select “Show only IP packets FROM/TO one or more IP addresses”, then select NEXT.The Enter Filter Settings screen opens (Figure 7-7).

5.) On the Enter Filter Settings screen, enter the IP address you wish to monitor, and click the ADD button (Figure 7-7). Repeat this step for all IP addresses you wish to add, then select FINISH.The Enter Filter Settings screen closes.

6.) On the Configuration Screen, select the Capture Tab (Figure 7-8).

Figure 7-7 Enter Filter Settings



1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM


7.) In the Filter to Apply field, select “My Computer”.

8.) Select CLOSE. The Configuration screen closes.

9.) On the Distinct Network Monitor Screen, select Capture > Packets and Statistics (Play).

NOTE: The Network Sniffer will now collect data until you select Capture > Stop.

10.)Double-click on the Go Mushashi icon to start the system application.11.)Perform the DICOM transaction you want to troubleshoot (such as Worklist Query, Send to PACS,

etc.).Perform the function several times to ensure the data is captured in the sniff.

Figure 7-8 Capture Tab on Configuration Screen



1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM


12.)When the transaction finishes (or fails), select Ctrl+Alt+Del to open Task Manager.On BT07 systems and later, select Exit to close the application and return to Windows. Then open Windows Task Manager to open the Distinct Network Monitor screen.

13.)From the Task Manager Applications tab, select Distinct, and then select the Switch To button.The Distinct Network Monitor screen opens.

Figure 7-9 Capture Tab on Configuration Screen



1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM


14.)On the Distinct Network Monitor screen (Figure 7-3), select Capture > Stop.After stopping the data collection, a screen similar to Figure 7-10 opens.

15.)Select File > Save As. Enter the file name “D:\log\Sniffer\MyLog “. 16.)Select SAVE.

Figure 7-10 Capture Data sample



1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM


17.)On the Save As Capture File Dialog (Figure 7-11), select SAVE.

18.)Check the D:\log\Sniffer directory. At a minimum, there should be the following two files: MyLog.cap, MyLog.num.

19.)Copy the files to media, or ask the OLC to upload the files if the system has remote connectivity.

Figure 7-11 Save As Capture File



1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM

Section 7-4Screen Captures

There may be times when the customer or field engineer will want to capture a presentation on the screen so it may be recovered by the OnLine Center through InSite. This is accomplished by first saving the image(s) to the clipboard using a Print Key.

The P4 key is the factory default print key to accomplish a secondary screen capture. However, the default is for the video area only or the customer may have customized the P4 Key function. Therefore, screen capture should involve the following steps:

1.) Check and record any custom settings for the Print4 button.2.) Set the Print4 button to Whole Screen, Secondary Capture.3.) Capture the required screens to the Hard Drive, MOD, CD-R, DVD-R or USB Memory Stick.4.) Restore the Print4 button to it’s original settings.

7-4-1 Check and Record the P4 Key FunctionCheck the function of the Print 4 Key in the event that the customer may have made some custom settings.

1.) Select Utility from the Touch Panel.2.) Select Connectivity from the Utilities Menu.3.) Select the Buttons tab on the Connectivity screen.4.) In the Button field, select Print4.

The Connectivity/Buttons Screen will be displayed like the one shown in Figure 7-12 on page 7-13 .

Figure 7-12 Buttons Set Up Screen


7-14 Section 7-4 - Screen Captures

1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM

7-4-1 Check and Record the P4 Key Function (cont’d)

P4 is the factory default Screen Capture Key. If it is not set to Whole Screen or Screen Capture, as shown in Figure 7-12, proceed to step 5 to record the customer’s custom settings.

5.) In the Destinations section, record the service that is displayed. The destinations list displays the following information:* Name: user defined during service configuration* Type: the type of service* Server: the device for which the service was configured* Dir: direction: output, input, or both (I+O)

6.) In the Image generated section, record the parameters related to the service.

7-4-2 Setting the P4 Key to Screen CaptureIf the P4 Key is not set to screen capture:

1.) While on the Connectivity screen, with the Buttons tab displayed, go to the drop down selection menu in the Destinations section.

2.) From the drop down menu select CopyToWflow_01>Image to Buffer>MyComputer>Out.3.) Ensure that the Image generated section for capture Area is set to Whole Screen, secondary

Capture and No Image Compression.4.) The P4 Key should now be set up for whole screen capture, sending the screens to the image

buffer (clipboard).



1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM

7-4-3 Capturing a ScreenThe following is a generic process to capture any screen from the scanner:

1.) Navigate to and display the image/screen to be captured.2.) Press P4. This will place a snapshot of the screen on the “clipboard” displayed at the bottom

of the scan image display.

3.) Select SCAN from the touch panel to view the image screen and the snapshots displayed on the bottom.

4.) Highlight the snapshot to be stored to the system hard drive, MOD or CD-R.5.) Select Menu on the right side of the image screen, then highlight and select SAVE AS.

Figure 7-13 Select Image to Capture

Figure 7-14 Menu > Save As

Clipboard Thumbnails

Menu

Save As


7-16 Section 7-4 - Screen Captures

1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM

7-4-3 Capturing a Screen (cont’d)

6.) A Save dialog box will be opened. Choose d:\export folder as the archive location to save the image on the hard disk, MOD or CD-R.

7-4-4 Reset the P4 Key to Customer’s FunctionalityIf the customer had programmed the P4 Key to a function other than screen capture, restore that functionality recorded in 7-4-1 on page 7-13. Refer to Figure 7-12.

1.) Select Utility from the Touch Panel.2.) Select Connectivity from the Utilities Menu.3.) Select the Buttons tab on the Connectivity screen.4.) In the Button field, select Print4.5.) In the Destinations section, select the service(s) recorded in step 5, Section 7-4-1. The

destinations list displays the following information:* Name: user defined during service configuration* Type: the type of service* Server: the device for which the service was configured* Dir: direction: output, input, or both (I+O)

NOTE: Only output services can be associated to the print keys.

6.) In the Image generated section, select the parameters related to the service recorded in step 6, Section 7-4-1.

Figure 7-15 Save Dialog Box



1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM

7-4-5 Ctrl-PrintScreen ShortcutStarting with R4.x.x software, a Ctrl-PrintScreen shortcut is available for quickly capturing the image displayed on the system. Images captured using this shortcut are saved in the D:\export directory using both the JPEG (.jpg) and raw DICOM (.dcm) formats.

7-4-5-1 To Capture a Screen Image Using the Shortcut

1.) With the desired image displayed on the screen, press Ctrl and PrtSc keys simultaneously.2.) From the touchpanel, select Utilities -> Service -> Scanner Utilities -> Image, Compress, and Delete

Utilities.3.) Enter a checkmark in the checkbox next to the image(s) to save in the D:\export directory.4.) Select Compress File.

A compressed file of the images is stored in d:\export. You may rely on the date and time of the Ctrl+PrtSc procedure to identify the most recent image recorded. The uncompressed files are stored in d:\export\service\image.


7-18 Section 7-5 - Diagnostics

1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM

Section 7-5Diagnostics

NOTE: Detach probes and reboot system after performing any diagnostics.

As described in Chapter 5 - Components and Functions (Theory), the service platform uses a web-based user interface (UI) to provide access to common service components.

The Diagnostic home page displays a listing of test categories consisting of Acquisition Diagnostics, I/O Devices and Common Diagnostics. Expand the desired main category to select groups or individual tests.

Figure 7-16 Global Service User Interface Diagnostic Screen



1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM

Section 7-6Acquisition Diagnostics


Acquisition Diagnostics is one of three main headings under the GSUI Diagnostics Tab.

Individual selections run diagnostics and return status information identifying any problems.

When you select a test to run, the display changes as shown.

1.) Instructions Frame- Displays either a test-specific text or the default instructions.

2.) Status Frame- Initially displays the last known status for a selected diagnostic. Once the diagnostic starts,

the frame displays the “current” status of all test results.- The Status Frame also contains the user interface elements used for Diagnostic Control and

Operator Feedback.3.) Execute Button

- This switch has two modes - each with appropriate text:- Execute - to start the diagnostic- Abort - to stop a diagnostic

Figure 7-17 Customer Acquisition Diagnostics


7-20 Section 7-6 - Acquisition Diagnostics

1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM

Section 7-6 Acquisition Diagnostics (cont’d)

4.) Loop Count- This is an editable text field that will only accept numeric values of 4 digits or less. When the

switch is configured as an “execute” switch and pressed, the loop count field will be queried to determine the number of times to execute the diagnostic.

5.) Progress Indicator- Displays a graphical progress indicator for the user.

6.) Short Text Message- Displays brief messages about the test’s progress during execution.

7.) Status Frame Background Color- Initially gray, the Status Frame background color changes upon completion of a diagnostic to

indicate completion status.- Code Status Fail = Red- Code Status Pass = Green- Code Status neither Pass nor Fail (Example: Aborted) = Gray (default color).



1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM

7-6-1 Diagnostic Listings

Table 7-2 Acquisition Diagnostics and Utility Listing

Diagnostic/Utility Function

SCB PCI Interface Diag Tests the host’s ability to communicate with the SCB via the secondary PCI bus

SCB Memory Diag Tests all of the on-board memory, including registers.

SCB DSP Diag Tests the Scan Sequencer’s DSP and associated components.

SCB Scan Bus Diag Tests the local Scan Bus and the associated system timing.

SCB Image Port Diag Tests the Image Port’s functionality.

BMP PCI Interface Diag Tests the host’s ability to communicate with the BMP via the PCI bus.

BMP Memory Diag Tests all of the on-board memory, including registers.

BMP Signal Path Diag Tests the entire BMP signal path.

EQ PCI Interface Diag Tests the host’s ability to communicate with the registers and memory on the EQ via the PCI bus.

EQ Memory Diag Tests all of the on-board memory, including registers.

EQ Signal Path Diag Tests the entire EQ signal path.

TD Memory Diag Tests all of the on-board memory, for all installed TD boards, including registers.

TD Analog Reference Diag Tests the AD_REF and VREF voltages on the TD.

Comprehensive Signal Path Diag Tests the signal path of every channel from the TD Rigel Transmitter Memories to the SCB, via both the EQ and the BMP.

TD Access Diag Tests all of the Access Modes utilized for Host/TD communication as well as Channel RAM to Rigel transfers.

Analog TGC Diag Tests the generation of the analog TGC voltage.

XDIF Interface Diag Tests all of the XDIF functionality that is testable without a probe or probe simulator attached to the system, including the IIC communication.

Power Supply Diag Tests the system voltages available on the EQ.

Temperature Diag Tests the temperature of the system, wherever available.

Noise Floor Diag Measures the noise floor of the system. The noise floor will be calculated form IQ data received without a signal source.

Loopback Diag Tests the analog front-end of the system.

Acquisition Hardware Information Utility Writes a file for each Acquisition Hardware FRU containing all Vital Product Data.

Transmit Utility - Start

Transmit Utility - Change Channel

Transmit Utility - Stop

Receive Utility - Single Frame Receives signal on one channel at a time.

Receive Utility - 8 Frames

Visual Channel Utility

High Voltage Reset Utility Tests whether all TD boards can detect a high voltage fault.

Set VRF Utility Set the analog VREF to a specified value.


7-22 Section 7-6 - Acquisition Diagnostics

1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM

NOTE: In R4.x software and after: Front End Calibration Utility has been removed.

.

Set TGC Utility Set the analog TGC to a specified value.

Probe Select Utility Select a probe connector to be active.

Probe ID Read Utility Read the Probe ID of all installed probes.

Touchscreen Calibration Utility. Calibrates the Touch Screen.

Start Touchscreen Verification Utility. Helps verify the touchscreen calibration.

Front-End Calibration Utility Measures the Front End DC Offset, Gain, and Phase.

System Restart Test system restart

System Shutdown. Tests system shutdown.

OP Panel Interface Tests the OP Panel interface.

System Power Button Test Tests the system Power Button.

IIC PCI-DGVIC Diag Tests the IIC slave devices on the PCI-DGVIC board

IIC IIO Diag Tests the IIC slave devices on the Internal IO board.

IIC EIO Diag Tests the IIC slave devices on the External IO lower board.

IIC EIO Upper Diag Tests the IIC slave devices on the External IO lower board.

PC2IP IIC Troubleshooting ProcedureStep1 through 5

Procedure featured with tests that guides and helps you to troubleshoot PC2IP IIC failures.

Footswitch Test Utility Tests the system Power Button.

PC Diagnostics Interactive tests Tests std PC components (CPU, Hard Drive, Memory, CD/DVD drives) automatically.

PC Diagnostics Non-Interactive tests Tests standard PC components (keyboard, audio, monitor) non- interactively.





Table 7-2 Acquisition Diagnostics and Utility Listing (Continued)

Diagnostic/Utility Function



1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM

7-6-1-1 Calibration Utilities

Touchscreen Calibration: Follow the directions on the Touchscreen. As each of the cross-hairs appear, touch them with your finger or a pencil eraser. You MUST hold your finger on the cross-hair until it moves to the next location. If you just tap the calibration cross-hair, there is a better than average chance your calibration will be corrupt.

NOTE: Do NOT use sharp, pointed objects to press on the Touchscreen. You should also be careful if you have long, sharp finger nails. The Touchscreen can be damaged by sharp objects.

After all the cross-hairs are touched the screen is calibrated.

Start/Stop Touchscreen Verification: Select START TOUCHSCREEN VERIFICATION and EXECUTE. The Start Touchscreen Verification brings up a grid. Each time you touch the screen a small red dots appears.

To terminate the verification, select STOP TOUCHSCREEN VERIFICATION and EXECUTE.

Front-End Calibration Utility - DC Offset: All probes must be disconnected. Measures the DC offset of each channel and writes a calibration file for use in zeroing the offset. Application code may utilize these values to zero each channel's DC offset, by programming the Rigel beam forming ASIC's on TD's.

NOTE: In R4.x and after: Front End Calibration Utility has been removed. Do not run this diagnostic test in previous versions of software.


7-24 Section 7-7 - I/O Devices

1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM

Section 7-7I/O Devices

lThe Operator Panel functionality can be tested using a program (GE Test App) available through the Service Platform.

7-7-0-1 Launching the Op Panel Test

1.) Log onto the Service Platform, and select the Diagnostics tab.2.) Locate the Op Panel Test under I/O Devices > Op Panel Utilities > Op Panel Interface.3.) Select Start to launch the GE Test App.

An hour glass displays on the Service Platform window. The GE Test App window is hidden behind the Service Platform window.

4.) When the hour glass displays, minimize the Service Platform window to reveal the GE Test App window. See Figure 7-18.a.) To minimize, move the cursor to the “-” minus icon at upper right hand corner of the window.b.) Press the Set key.

5.) On the Startup tab, select the Attach button to connect the Op Panel to the test interface. The other buttons on the Startup tab will now be active. See Figure 7-19.

Figure 7-18 Select System Type



1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM

7-6-1 Diagnostic Listings (cont’d)

6.) Select the tabs to test the various features of the Op Panel.

7-7-1 Trackball TabTest the trackball functionality by moving the pointer over the blue box. See Figure 7-20. Verify that the X and Y position are updated as the pointer is moved.

Test the Left and Right select buttons by pressing each button on the op panel. Verify that the corresponding button is highlighted when each button is pressed. See Figure 7-20.

Figure 7-19 Attach and GE Test App Startup Tab

Figure 7-20 Trackball Tab

Attach Button Active Detach and Other Buttons Active



1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM

7-7-2 Keyboard TabTest the keyboard functionality by typing on the keyboard. Verify that the corresponding key is highlighted when each key is pressed. See Figure 7-21.

NOTE: The keyboard test does not give an indication when the Print Screen button is pressed.

7-7-3 Slidepots TabTest the slidepot (TGC) functionality by moving each slidepot through its range. See Figure 7-22. Verify that the visual and numeric position of the slide pot are updated as the slide pot is moved.

Test the LED for each slide pot by pressing on the LED buttons. See Figure 7-22. Visually verify the LED functionality on the upper operator panel.

Figure 7-21 Keyboard Tab

Figure 7-22 Slidepots Tab



1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM

7-7-4 Encoders TabTest the encoder functionality by rotating each encoder knob. See Figure 7-23. Verify that the position is updated as the encoder is moved.

Test the encoder button selection function by pressing each knob on the op panel. Verify that the corresponding knob is highlighted when each knob is pressed. See Figure 7-23.

7-7-5 Pushbuttons TabTest the pushbutton functionality by pressing each button on the operator panel. Verify that the corresponding pushbutton is highlighted when each button is pressed. See Figure 7-24.

Figure 7-23 Encoders Tab

Figure 7-24 Pushbuttons Tab



1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM

7-7-6 LEDs TabTest the LED functionality by selecting each button or knob on the GE Test App. See Figure 7-25. Verify that the corresponding LED is illuminated when each button or knob is selected.

7-7-7 Touchscreen TabTest the touchscreen functionality by pressing on the touch screen of the upper operator panel. Verify that the press is indicated in the black window by a highlighted circle. See Figure 7-26.

Figure 7-25 LEDs Tab

Figure 7-26 Touchscreen Tab



1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM

7-7-8 Ending the Program1.) When you have finished testing the Op Panel, close the GE Test App.2.) In the Service Platform window, click on the Stop button.3.) Close the Service Platform window.4.) Shutdown the system and reboot.


7-30 Section 7-8 - Common Diagnostics

1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM

Section 7-8Common Diagnostics

Common Diagnostics is the second main heading under the GSUI heading of Diagnostics.

Figure 7-27 shows the top level menu choices under Common Diagnostics. The subheadings and their respective diagnostic/troubleshooting menu choices are called out and described in the sections below.

7-8-1 UtilitiesProvides two selections:

7-8-1-1 Disruptive ModeAllows you to enable or disable disruptive mode troubleshooting.

7-8-1-2 System ShutdownAllows for system shutdown from the diagnostic menu. Select to Restart System or Shutdown System. Also, select to retain Disruptive Mode or Not.

After submitting to restart or shutdown a confirmation screen gives one last chance to confirm or cancel the request.

Figure 7-27 Common Diagnostics



1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM

7-8-2 PC Diagnostics

7-8-2-1 Non-Interactive Tests - BT04 and earlier• CPU Test• Hard Drive Tests• Memory Tests• CD/DVD Drive Tests (BEP3.x only)• Video Test• USB Test• PCI Board Configuration Test• SCSI Device Test (This test normally fails since the Logiq 9 does not have any SCSI device)• AGP Video Card Test (This test is aborted, n/a for L9 BT04 or earlier)• Network Test

7-8-2-2 Non-Interactive Tests - BT06, BT07, BT09• Essential Tests (PCI bus, CMOS memory, CPU, RAM, Hard drive status and Random seek,

Network interface loopback only). It runs some of the tests below. • System board (it tests PCI Bus communication, CMOS memory, CPU, RAM, Parallel Port and

Network Interface loopback only)• Hard disk surface (over an hour, tests Drive status, Random seek, Surface scan test)• Hard disk quick test (takes about 6 min)• PCI Bus• Video card (it takes about 6 min)• Network interface (system needs to be connected to the network)• CMOS• DRAM memory• Parallel port


7-32 Section 7-8 - Common Diagnostics

1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM

7-8-3 PC Diagnostics (Interactive Tests)• Audio Test (not available in BT06, BT07, or BT09)• Keyboard Test• Midi - LOGIQ™ 9 does not support MIDI channels. If you try and run the MIDI test, the test may fail

(Not available in BT04, BT06, BT07, or BT09)• Monitor Test (not available in BT06, BT07, or BT09)



1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM

Section 7-9Utilities

7-9-1 Dicom Verify UtilityThis utility provides an easy way to verify DICOM connectivity between the scanner and DICOM devices on the network. See Figure 7-28.

NOTE: To monitor possible network issues for BT06 and later systems, the Dicom Verify Utility can be placed in a loop to run continuously until turned off. The BT06 Dicom Verify Utility screen has a checkbox at the bottom to enable the continuous loop.

1.) Enter the AE Title, IP Address, and Port Number for the DICOM device.2.) Click on the Verify button.

Figure 7-28 Dicom Verify Utility - BT04

Figure 7-29 Dicom Verify Utility - BT06 or Later


7-34 Section 7-9 - Utilities

1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM

7-9-1 Dicom Verify Utility (cont’d)

3.) Examine the utility error output. See Figure 7-30 for an example.

• In the event of a hard drive failure, see 7-9-1-1 "Hard Drive Failure" on page 7-34.

• In the event of a hard drive failure, see 7-9-1-1 "Hard Drive Failure" on page 7-34.• In the event of a hard drive failure, see 7-9-1-1 "Hard Drive Failure" on page 7-34.

7-9-1-1 Hard Drive FailureThe symptoms of hard drive failures are as follows:

• The results of hard drive diagnostics may indicate bad sectors on the hard drive.• The system may not boot because of bad sectors on the hard drive.• Attempts to re-image the C: partition may fail because of bad sectors on the C: partition.• The system may not boot and displays blue screen stop errors (dark blue screen with white text -

“blue screen of death”).In the event of a hard drive failure, determine whether or not the customer requires recovery of data. If the customer requires data recovery, collect the following information from the customer:

• Customer contact name• Customer contact phone• Customer contact address• What data they require (e.g. studies for a date range or everything)• Whether the customer wants their data on CD or DVD mediaTell the customer GE will attempt to recover as much data as possible. Write a complaint and include the above information, and do not discard or return the failed hard drive. A member of the Complaint Handling Unit or the Installed Base team will contact the author of the complaint and provide instructions for delivery of the failed hard drive to engineering. Engineering will then recover as much data as possible and send the recovered data directly to the customer.

Figure 7-30 Example Error Messages


Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-1

1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

Chapter 8Replacement Procedures

Section 8-1Overview

8-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 8This chapter contains replacement procedures for different modules and their subsystems. Follow all safety precautions while servicing and repairing this equipment.



8-1 Overview 8-1

8-2 Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 1 8-4

8-3 Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 2 8-7

8-4 Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 3 / BEP 3.5 8-10

8-5 Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 4.x 8-13

8-6 Before Starting a Software Load 8-17

8-7 Image Management Guide 8-18

8-8 Loading Base Image Software - R4.x.x and prior 8-26

8-9 Loading Base Image Software - R6.x.x 8-33

8-10 Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later 8-38

8-11 Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior 8-44

8-12 Loading Application Software - R6.x.x 8-49

8-13 Loading Application Software - R7.x.x or Later 8-56

8-14 Generic Application Software - Upgrade Only 8-61

8-15 System Setup 8-65

8-16 Console Lock Assembly Replacement Procedure 8-70

8-17 Release Lock Assembly Replacement Procedure 8-72

8-18 Gas Shock Replacement Procedure 8-74

8-19 Gas Spring Wirecable Replacement Procedure 8-86

8-20 Frog Leg Angle Adjustment 8-92


8-2 Section 8-1 - Overview

1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

8-1-2 Definitions of Left, Right, Front and Back

Left Front Rear RightFigure 8-1 Console Views



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

8-1-3 Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair PartsEquipment being returned must be clean and free of blood and other infectious substances.

GEHC policy states that body fluids must be properly removed from any part or equipment prior to shipment. GEHC employees, as well as customers, are responsible for ensuring that parts/equipment have been properly decontaminated prior to shipment. Under no circumstance should a part or equipment with visible body fluids be taken or shipped from a clinic or site (for example, body coils or an ultrasound probe). The purpose of the regulation is to protect employees in the transportation industry, as well as the people who will receive or open this package.

NOTE: The US Department of Transportation (DOT) has ruled that “items that were saturated and/or dripping with human blood that are now caked with dried blood; or which were used or intended for use in patient care” are “regulated medical waste” for transportation purposes and must be transported as a hazardous material.

WARNINGWARNING When you return the used BEP to your local parts organization, make sure you remove ALL PATIENT DATA from the hard drive, given that the hard drive is still functional.In some countries, you may be required to delete all software from the disk before returning the BEP to the parts warehouse. Follow your local policies.

WARNINGWARNING Before you dispose of the hard drive, make sure you remove ALL PATIENT DATA from the hard drive, given that the hard drive is still functional.In some countries, you may be required to delete all software from the disk before returning the hard drive to the parts warehouse. Follow your local policies.

WARNINGWARNING When you return the used BEP to your local parts organization, make sure you remove ALL PATIENT DATA from the hard drive, given that the hard drive is still functional.In some countries, you may be required to delete all software from the disk before returning the BEP to the parts warehouse. Follow your local policies.

WARNINGWARNING Before you dispose of the hard drive, make sure you remove ALL PATIENT DATA from the hard drive, given that the hard drive is still functional.In some countries, you may be required to delete all software from the disk before returning the hard drive to the parts warehouse. Follow your local policies.


8-4 Section 8-2 - Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 1

1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

Section 8-2Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 1

8-2-1 ManpowerOne person, .5 hour + travel


8-2-3 PreparationsWe anticipate, with the exception of a failure, batteries will only need to be replaced once every three years.

1.) Power Off / Shutdown the system.2.) Remove the left-side cover.

8-2-4 Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure 1.) Remove the cover of the Back End Processor.2.) Remove the four screws from the power supply battery pack cover plate.3.) Disconnect the battery pack connection wire.4.) Remove the power supply battery pack from the Back End Processor.

Figure 8-2 Removing / Installing the Power Supply Battery Pack

1 2

3 4



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

8-2-5 Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure - BEP 1

1.) Slide the new power supply battery pack into its position in the Back End Processor.2.) Attach the power supply battery pack cover plate and secure it with the four screws removed .3.) Apply Power .... turn the system on.4.) Connect the new battery pack to the power supply connector while power is applied to the Back End

Processor. This will avoid a possible spark while connecting the battery.

5.) Attach the cover for the Back End Processor removed.6.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below.

Figure 8-3 Power Supply Battery Pack



Table 8-2 Functional Tests

Service Manual Section Functional Test / Diagnostic Test Debrief Script


“Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-2. Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for

use. “

4-2-3 Standby Mode



4-2-8 System B/M-Mode Checks


Section 4-4 Peripheral Checks

In Line20A Fuse

Battery 1

Battery 2

Compression tape used tominimize battery pack movement

while installed in chassis

Heat-shrink holds batteries togetherand insulates terminals.

Spacerseperatesbatteries

+ -- +

Label to beattached tothis surface



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

8-2-5 Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure - BEP 1 (cont’d)

The UPS batteries will drain slightly when the system is in the OFF condition. The OFF condition is:




8-2-6 Battery DisposalPlease make sure replaced batteries are included in the recycling loop.



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

Section 8-3Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 2

8-3-1 ManpowerOne person, 15 minutes + travel


8-3-3 Preparations1.) Power Off / Shutdown the system.2.) Remove the left-side covers.

8-3-4 Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure 1.) Remove the cover of the Back End Processor.2.) Remove the screw from the power supply battery pack cover plate. See Figure 8-4.

3.) Tip the power supply battery pack cover plate forward and lift up to remove, refer to Figure 8-5.

Figure 8-4 BEP 2 Power Supply Battery Pack Cover Plate



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

8-3-4 Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure (cont’d)

4.) Disconnect the battery pack connection wire.5.) Remove the power supply battery pack from the Back End Processor.

8-3-5 Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure - BEP 21.) Slide the new power supply battery pack into its position in the Back End Processor.2.) Attach the power supply battery pack cover plate and secure it with the screw removed .3.) Apply Power .... turn the system on.4.) Connect the new battery pack to the power supply connector while power is applied to the Back End


5.) Attach the cover for the Back End Processor removed.6.) Replace the left-side cover .7.) If required, Power On/Boot-up the system .

Figure 8-5 BEP 2 Power Supply Battery Pack Cover Plate Tipped Forward





1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

8-3-5 Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure - BEP 2 (cont’d)

8.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below.





“Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-3. Equipment passed all required tests and is ready

for use. “

4-2-3 Standby Mode







8-10 Section 8-4 - Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 3 / BEP 3.5

1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

Section 8-4Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 3 / BEP 3.5



8-4-3 Preparations1.) Power Off / Shutdown the system.2.) Remove the left-side cover.

8-4-4 Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure 1.) Remove the cover of the Back End Processor.2.) Unplug the sidefan connection. Be careful not to pinch the wires when replacing cover.

Figure 8-6 BEP 3 with cover removed



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

8-4-4 Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure (cont’d)

3.) Disconnect the battery pack connection wires. See Figure 8-7.

4.) Remove the first power supply battery pack from the Back End Processor 3.x. See Figure 8-8.

5.) Remove the other power supply battery pack from the Back End Processor 3.x. See Figure 8-9.

Figure 8-7 Disconnect Battery Pack Connection Wires

Figure 8-8 BEP 3.x One Power Supply Battery Pack Removed

Figure 8-9 BEP 3.x Both Power Supply Battery Packs Removed


8-12 Section 8-4 - Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 3 / BEP 3.5

1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

8-4-5 Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure - BEP 3 / BEP 3.51.) Slide the new power supply battery packs into position in the Back End Processor.2.) Apply Power .... turn the system on.3.) Connect the new battery pack to the power supply connector while power is applied to the Back End


4.) Attach the cover for the Back End Processor removed.5.) Replace the left-side cover6.) If required, Power On/Boot-up the system7.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below.








use. “

4-2-3 Standby Mode








1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

Section 8-5Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 4.x



8-5-3 Preparations1.) Power Off / Shutdown the system.2.) Remove the left-side cover.

8-5-4 Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure - BEP 4.x1.) Remove the cover from the Back End Processor (BEP) by loosening the thumb screw on the back.2.) Unplug the side fan.

NOTICE Whenever accessing internal BEP components, ensure the wires are clear. Avoid pinching or damaging the wires or cables.

Figure 8-10 BEP 4.x


8-14 Section 8-5 - Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 4.x

1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

8-5-4 Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure - BEP 4.x (cont’d)

3.) Disconnect the battery pack connection wires.

4.) Remove the 8 screws holding the battery pack bracket.

Figure 8-11 Battery Pack Connection Wires

Figure 8-12 BEP 4.x



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

8-5-4 Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure - BEP 4.x (cont’d)

5.) Take bracket off.

6.) Remove the first power supply battery pack from the Back End Processor.7.) Remove the other power supply battery pack from the Back End Processor.

Figure 8-13 Remove Bracket

Figure 8-14 Remove Battery Pack


8-16 Section 8-5 - Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 4.x

1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

8-5-5 Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure - BEP 4.x1.) Slide the new power supply battery packs into position in the Back End Processor.2.) Replace the bracket.3.) Apply Power .... turn the system on.4.) Connect the new battery pack to the power supply connector while power is applied to the Back End


5.) Reattach the side fan wires.6.) Attach the cover for the Back End Processor. Be careful not to pinch the fan wires when replacing

the cover.7.) Replace the left-side cover.8.) If required, Power On/Boot-up the system.9.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below.








use. “

4-2-3 Standby Mode








1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

Section 8-6Before Starting a Software Load

8-6-1 PrintersAny customized print settings will be lost when the new base image is loaded prior to R6.x.x. If the customer has any on board, peripheral, or network printers, any settings they have made in the device driver, such as Gray Scale Images, will be lost. These printer settings will need to be recorded. Go to Utilities>System>Peripherals>Printers in order to record the printer settings.

8-6-2 Save Connectivity Settings

8-6-2-1 DICOM TCPIP Settings

NOTE: DICOM Workflows and DICOM Device Configurations are saved when you preform the User-Defined backup procedure in Section 8-7-3 "User-Defined Backup Protocols" on page 8-22.

If you want to Import exams back on to your system after the software load, you should record any vital DICOM data before proceeding.

1.) Select Utilities>Connectivity>TCPIP tab and record all information on that tab with particular attention to:- The “Enable DHCP” box should NOT be checked- Computer Name: ______________________________- IP-Address: ______/________/_________/_________- Subnet Mask: ______/________/________/________- Default Gateway: ______/________/________/________- Remote Archive IP-Address: ______/________/_________/_________- Remote Archive Name: ______________________________________

For BT07 and later, service settings can be saved along with the user-defined configuration.


8-18 Section 8-7 - Image Management Guide

1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

Section 8-7Image Management Guide

8-7-1 Managing Patient Data and PresetsSave to MOD, CD-R or DVD-R any patient data, images, and system presets that have been stored or configured. Installing the base operating software may delete some patient data, images and system setups saved on the system.

NOTE: Be sure there are no images in the clipboard or opened exams before reloading base operating software.

8-7-1-1 Patient Images and DataEZBackup/Move

Use this to copy both patient data and images for specified patient(s) from LOGIQ™ 9 to DVD-R, CD-R or MOD.

Refer to Section 8-7-2 "EZBackup/Move" on page 8-19.

8-7-1-2 Preset DataUser-Defined Backup Protocols

Use this to copy User-Defined presets before doing a base image software load.

Refer to Section 8-7-3 "User-Defined Backup Protocols" on page 8-22.

8-7-1-3 Backup MediaDVD Media Requirements

Only DVD-R. DO NOT use DVD-RW or DVD+R.

CD-ROM Media Requirements

Only use CD-R CD-ROMs, DO NOT use CD-RW CD-ROMs. Also, the CD-R CD-ROM MUST support 16x writing speed or greater.

CD-ROM Handling Tips

To eject the CD, always press F3. DO NOT press the eject button on the CD-ROM/DVD Drive.

Always finalize the CD-ROM. This allows you to read the CD-ROM on any other PC.

DO NOT finalize the CD if you want to add more images to the CD.



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

8-7-2 EZBackup/MoveEZBackup/Move allows you to manage hard disk space (move images off the hard drive) while maintaining the patient database on the scanner, as well as to back up the patient database and images.

1.) Specify the EZBackup/Move setup on the Utility --> System --> Backup/Restore page.

2.) To start the EZBackup/Move procedure, go to the Patient menu and select the EZBackup/Move button at the lower right-hand position of the Patient list. The EZBackup/Move Wizard starts.

Figure 8-15 Utility > System > Backup/Restore Preset Menu

Table 8-6 EZBackup/Move Preset Parameters

Preset Parameter Description

Reminder Dialog Interval days Specify the number of days after the last backup that you want the system to prompt you to perform an EZBackup/Move procedure (only for moving images).

Enable Reminder Dialog Select to activate the EZBackup/Move reminder pop-up dialog.

Backup files older than in days The system will backup images older than the number of days specified here. If you enter a zero (0), then all of the images from today on will be backed up.

Move files after backup Check this box to delete images from the hard drive after the backup.

Media Select media type.

Media capacity for estimate (MB) Specify the capacity of the backup media.



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

8-7-2 EZBackup/Move (cont’d)

NOTE: EZBackup/Move can take up to 20 minutes (or longer, depending on the size of the backup). Make sure to schedule this at the same time daily, when no patients are scheduled.

3.) Verify the information on the first page of the EZBackup/Move Wizard, then press Next.

Figure 8-16 New Patient EZBackup/Move Example

Figure 8-17 EZBackup/Move Wizard, Page 1



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

8-7-2 EZBackup/Move (cont’d)

NOTE: You do not need to format the media prior to performing an EZBackup/Move.

NOTE: EZBackup/Move cannot span a single image across two (2) or more media. Therefore, if EZBackup/Move encounters an image that is greater than the capacity of the media, it skips the oversized image.

NOTE: EZBackup/Move does not store images to media in sequential order. Instead it maximizes the most amount of images per media.

4.) Verify the information on the EZBackup/Move Wizard, Page 2. The backup may span multiple media. This page tells you how many media you need to do this backup. After you have gathered the media (allow for one extra media, just in case), you are ready to begin the backup. Press Next.

5.) A pop-up message appears that provides you with the media label. Label the media, then insert the media. Press OK.

6.) The status menu appears. When the backup/move has been completed, press Next.

NOTE: When/if you need to insert the next media, a message appears providing you with the media label. Label the media, then insert the next media and press OK.

7.) When the backup is complete, the Backup completed page appears.



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

8-7-3 User-Defined Backup Protocols1.) Insert the backup media. Format the CD-R or MOD. (DVD-R do not need to be formatted.) Select

the Utility tab on the Measurement Selection Menu. Select Connectivity->Tools. Label the media.A pop-up menu displays when the formatting is complete, see Figure 8-20.

2.) Press Ok to continue. Verify that the format was successful.

Figure 8-18 Format MOD/CD-ROM Screen

Figure 8-19 Format MOD/CD-ROM Screen - BT04 and after



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

8-7-3 User-Defined Backup Protocols (cont’d)

3.) On the Touch Panel, press Utility.4.) On the Utility Touch Panel, press System.5.) On the monitor display, select Backup/Restore.

The Backup/Restore screen opens.

NOTE: If you are not logged in with administrator privileges, the Operator Login window opens. Log on with administrator privileges.

Figure 8-20 Format Successful Pop-up Menu



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM


Figure 8-21 Backup Menu- Prior to R4.x.x

Figure 8-22 Backup / Restore Screen - R4.x.x and R6.x.x



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM


NOTE: The detailed section of this menu decouples the user defined configuration above. This allows you to selectively restore what you want to restore across multiple machines. Refer to Chapter 16 “Customizing Your System” in the Basic User Manual for more information.

6.) In the Backup list, select the items you wish to backup.7.) In the Media field, select MOD, CD or DVD.8.) Select Backup.9.) Answer ‘Ok’ to the following pop-up message as many times as the number of items you are

backing up.The system performs the backup. As it proceeds, status information is displayed on the Backup/Restore screen.

10.)After the backup is complete, press F3 to eject the media.

Figure 8-23 Back-up Confirmation Message


8-26 Section 8-8 - Loading Base Image Software - R4.x.x and prior

1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

Section 8-8Loading Base Image Software - R4.x.x and prior

8-8-1 PreparationsSave Connectivity Settings as described in 8-6-2 on page 8-17.

NOTE: Be sure there are no images in the clipboard or opened exams before reloading base image software.

NOTE: After a full or partial base image load, be sure to confirm the Windows automatic Daylight Saving Time feature is turned off (Utility ->System -> General -> Date/Time -> Time Zone tab -> Automatically Adjust Clock checkbox) and the date and time are set correctly.

NOTE: While it is believed to be unnecessary, it would not hurt to disconnect the system from the network and remove all transducers.

NOTE: Be sure all printers are connected and turned on. If a printer is plugged in at this time it will automatically install and you won't have to go back to Windows to install it.

NOTE: If the system has any digital peripherals, be sure that they are turned on.

If the system you are loading software on has a BEP 2, please complete steps 1 - step 5 below. If the system you are loading software on has a BEP1 or BEP3, proceed to step 2 of 8-8-2 "Base Image Load Procedure - R4.x.x and prior" on page 8-28.

NOTE: How to differentiate BEPs easily- If the MOD is 640M it should be BEP1. - If the MOD is 1.3G it should be BEP2.X.- There is no MOD on BEP3 and it has two USB ports.

8-8-1-1 To Prepare to Load Base Image

1.) Power Off / Shutdown the system.WARNINGWARNING Risk of electrical shock, system must be turned off and disconnected from power

source. Cord must be controlled at all times. Wait at least 20 seconds for the charge on the FEPS capacitors to bleed off before handling the power supply board.



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

8-8-1-1 To Prepare to Load Base Image (cont’d)

2.) Remove the left side cover.3.) Unplug the microphone input (C11) from the BEP, see Figure 8-24 on page 8-27 .4.) Wrap the cable end of the plug using electrical tape to isolate it from the BEP.

By disconnecting the microphone input, you eliminate feedback during the software load. This input may have been unplugged previously, if so, be sure it is wrapped and leave it disconnected.

5.) Replace the left side cover.

Figure 8-24 BEP2 Cable Identification

C11 Audio In



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

8-8-2 Base Image Load Procedure - R4.x.x and prior

1.) Turn on the scanner.2.) Insert the disk labeled “Base System Software Load Image, Disk 1 of 2” into the CD-ROM/DVD

drive.

NOTE: There is only one disk for the BEP 1 Base Image.

NOTE: See Section 9-15 "Software" on page 9-41 to identify the correct Base Image Load CD version for BEP 2.x or BEP3.

3.) Properly turn off the scanner by momentarily pressing the On / Off switch. Select Shutdown from the System Exit menu. Wait for the On / Off switch to turn amber.

NOTE: If the system exit menu does not appear, press Alt F10.

4.) If the system will not shutdown normally, hold down the Standby Switch until the light turns from green to amber.

WARNINGWARNING The next steps will destroy ALL data on the Scanner.

Figure 8-25 Shutdown Dialog Box



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

8-8-2 Base Image Load Procedure - R4.x.x and prior (cont’d)

5.) Turn on the scanner. You will see a message displayed on the Touch Panel screen as shown in Figure 8-26 on page 8-29 .

Now is your chance to abort the Base Image load or continue.

6.) Press any key to continue. To abort, remove the CD-ROM from the drive and press CTRL-C.

Figure 8-26 Base Load Warning Message



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM


The first choice is to load the complete hard drive.

[1] Load the complete disk - All existing data will be lost.

NOTE: APPLICATION SOFTWARE WILL NEED TO BE INSTALLED WHEN THIS PROCEDURE HAS COMPLETED. ALL PATIENT DATA (IF ANY) WILL BE DESTROYED!

Figure 8-28 is the last warning message before the complete base load process begins. Press any key to continue or abort by pressing CTRL-C.

Figure 8-27 Base Load Option Screen

Figure 8-28 Base Load Option 1 Message



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM


The second choice is to load only the bootable portion of the hard drive partition, the “C” partition. This is not an option for a new hard drive that has not been previously partitioned for proper LOGIQ™ 9 operation.

[2] Load the bootable C: partition only - Patient data is NOT lost.

NOTE: DO NOT USE THIS OPTION ON A BRAND NEW SYSTEM. IT IS INTENDED FOR RECOVERY OF A SYSTEM THAT WILL NOT BOOT UP. APPLICATION SOFTWARE WILL NEED TO BE INSTALLED WHEN THIS PROCEDURE HAS COMPLETED. ALL PATIENT DATA IS PRESERVED.

This selection will leave the remaining drive partitions intact.

Figure 8-29 is the last warning message before the base load process begins. Press any key to continue or abort by pressing CTRL-C.

The third choice,

[3] Exit to the A:\ prompt. Is intended for manufacturing use only.

This is NOT an option as it is intended for manufacturing use only.

If you select Option 3 by mistake, power off the system. Hold down the On / Off switch until the light turns amber then turn the system back on.

Table 8-7 LOGIQ™ 9 Drive Partition and Usage

Drive Partition Usage

C System Files and Applications

D User Define and Presets

E Patient Archive Data

F File Swap Area




1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM


Once you have chosen to continue with Option 1 or Option 2, you will see a screen showing Norton Ghost. This automatically loads a base set of software onto the hard disk. Let it run to completion (Approximately 8-10 mins).

7.) When prompted, remove Disk 1 from the CDROM/DVD drive. Insert Disk 2 and press Enter to continue.

NOTE: There is only one disk for the BEP 1 Base Image.

A message, as shown in Figure 8-30, will be displayed when the process is complete.

8.) Remove the disk from the CD-ROM/DVD drive.

NOTE: Remove the CD-ROM from the drive; otherwise you will be repeating the Base System Software Load process when the system boots up.

9.) After removing the CDROM from the drive, press Ctrl+Alt+Delete to reboot the system.10.)When the system reboots it will automatically log on to start checking hardware. This is a normal

process and should be allowed to run to completion.

NOTE: While the script is running, several windows or dialog boxes will appear on the screen. At times it may look like the system is unresponsive. Wait for the “System Settings Change” dialog box “Do You Want to Restart computer now” to appear, approximately 3-4 minutes after the desktop is displayed.

NOTE: Prior to the System Settings Change dialog box, Do NOT touch the system during this process. Activating the keyboard, mouse or front panel could corrupt the installation.

11.)When you get a message to restart Windows, select Yes.The system will come up and map the drives, then the system will reboot again automatically. After the second reboot, the system will come up into the Windows mode.

12.)If the customer has a USB (Digital Printer) to be installed, plug it in now. The system is still in Windows mode and should recognize the printer and install the necessary driver.

NOTE: If the printer is installed while in application mode, excessive CPU time will be consumed and the system will become very slow to unusable. Shutting down and rebooting will clear the condition. The printer will function correctly.

13.)Proceed to Section 8-11 "Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior" on page 8-44.

Figure 8-30 Base Load Complete



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

Section 8-9Loading Base Image Software - R6.x.x

Contact the customer prior to this upgrade to allow them enough lead time to backup the system. This software upgrade applies to all LOGIQ™ 9 BT04 systems (as well as systems upgraded to BT04), software version R4.x.x.

NOTE: Be sure no images are in the clipboard or opened exams before loading base image software.


NOTE: Disconnect the system from the network and remove all transducers from the system.

NOTE: Be sure all USB devices are connected and turned on (except for USB Flash devices). If a printer is plugged in at this time it is automatically installed and you won't have to go back to Windows to install it.


1.) Turn on the scanner.2.) Record the system’s TCPIP settings (IP Address, Computer Name, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway,

Network Speed) from the Utility --> Connectivity --> TCPIP page. You will add these settings back to the system in the System Checkout section after the Upgrade has been completed.

3.) Perform a Backup from the Utility --> System --> Backup/Restore page. You need to backup the Patient Archive, Report Archive, User Defined Configuration, Voice Training, and Service settings. You will perform a Restore after the Upgrade has been completed.

4.) Confirm that all patient data has been archived. If not, perform the archive.

5.) Insert the disk labeled “Base System Software Load Image, into the CDROM/DVD drive.

NOTE: See Section 9-15 "Software" on page 9-41 to identify the correct Base Image Load version.

WARNINGWARNING The next steps will destroy ALL data on the Scanner


8-34 Section 8-9 - Loading Base Image Software - R6.x.x

1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

Section 8-9 Loading Base Image Software - R6.x.x (cont’d)

6.) Properly turn off the scanner by momentarily pressing the Standby (ON/OFF) Switch. Select Shutdown from the System Exit menu. Wait for the Standby Switch to turn amber.

NOTE: If the system exit menu does not appear, press Alt F10.7.) If the system does not shutdown normally, hold down Standby Switch until green light turns amber.8.) Turn on the scanner. A message is displayed on the Touch Panel screen as shown in Figure

8-32 on page 8-34 .


9.) Press any key to continue. To abort, remove the CD-ROM from the drive and press CTRL-C.





1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM


10.)Select [1] Load the complete disk - All existing data will be lost.

NOTE: YOU NEED TO INSTALL APPLICATION SOFTWARE WHEN THIS PROCEDURE HAS COMPLETED.

11.)Figure 8-28 is the last warning message before the base load process begins. Press any key to continue or abort by pressing CTRL-C.


WARNINGWARNING ALL PATIENT DATA (IF ANY) WILL BE DESTROYED!



8-36 Section 8-9 - Loading Base Image Software - R6.x.x

1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM


Once you have chosen to continue with Option 1, you see a screen showing Norton Ghost (see Figure 8-35. This automatically loads a base set of software onto the hard disk. Let it run to completion (Approximately 8-10 minutes).

Figure 8-35 Norton Ghost screen.

A message similar to the one shown in Figure 8-30, is displayed when the process has completed.

12.)Remove DVD from the CD-ROM/DVD drive.

NOTE: If you do not remove the DVD, the Base System Software Load process repeats when the system boots up.

13.)After removing the CDROM from the drive, press Ctrl+Alt+Delete to reboot the system.


If there are no error messages listed above, the “Base System Software Load Image” process has successfully com-pleted. You will now need to load the “Application Software” onto your system.

Please remove the CDROM from the drive, power cycle the system and then continue with the “Application Software” load procedure.



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM


NOTE: If the system does not reboot, press and hold down the Power On/Off button.

14.)When the system reboots it automatically logs on to start checking hardware. This is a normal process and should be allowed to run to completion.


NOTE: While the script is running, several windows or dialog boxes appear on the screen. At times it may look like the system is unresponsive. Wait for the “System Settings Change”dialog box “Do You Want to Restart computer now” to appear, approximately 1-2 minutes after the desktop is displayed.

15.)When you get a message to restart Windows, select YES (see Figure 8-37).

Figure 8-37 Restart Windows Message

16.)You now need to run the Firmware executable to update the DVD/CD-ROM drives.

a.) Determine the type of drive this LOGIQ 9 supports by right clicking on My Computer (left Set key) --> Manage (right Set key) --> Device Manager --> DVD/CD-ROM drives. Note the type of device.

NOTE: If the device on the LOGIQ 9 does not match any of the Firmware directories in the next step, then you do not need to run this update.

b.) Go to the c:\Hardware_Drivers\Firmware\ directory (you can use Windows Explorer for this). Select the directory that matches the device supported by this LOGIQ 9 system from the previous step.

c.) Run the executable for the DVD drive. Follow the directions in this executable (the instructions vary by device).

17.)If necessary, remap the DVD drive. The DVD drive should be drive G. Remap the drives by running remap.bat in c:\remap.

18.)Check your Service Dongle. Plug in your Service Dongle to ensure that it is recognized and lights up. You can then remove the Service Dongle.

19.)Proceed to Section 8-12 "Loading Application Software - R6.x.x" on page 8-49.


8-38 Section 8-10 - Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later

1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

Section 8-10Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later

Save all Service Presets if you are connected to InSite to restore remote connectivity after completed.

Contact the customer prior to this upgrade to allow them enough lead time to backup the system.

This software upgrade applies to all LOGIQ™ 9 BT07 and later systems with software version of R7.x.x and later.

NOTE: Be sure no images are in the clipboard or opened exams before loading base image software.


NOTE: R7.x and later Base Image and Application software disables the following: the Run window normally accessed from Start->Run, and the mouse right-click (left set key) feature.

NOTE: Disconnect the system from the network and remove all transducers from the system.

NOTE: Be sure all USB devices (printers only) are connected and turned on (except for USB Flash devices). If a printer is plugged in at this time it is automatically installed and you won't have to go back to Windows to install it.


1.) Turn on the scanner.2.) Turn on all digital peripherals, including the DVR.3.) Record the system’s TCPIP settings (IP Address, Computer Name, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway,

Network Speed) from the Utility --> Connectivity --> TCPIP page. You will add these settings back to the system in the System Checkout section after the Upgrade has been completed.

4.) Record the system’s installed Option strings from the Utility --> Admin --> System Admin page.5.) Perform a Backup from the Utility-->System-->Backup/Restore page. You should back up the

Patient Archive, Report Archive, User-Defined Configuration, Voice training, and Service settings. You will perform a Restore after the Upgrade has been completed.

6.) Confirm that all patient data has been archived. If not, perform the archive. 7.) Insert the disk labeled “Base System Software Load Image”, into the CDROM/DVD drive.

NOTE: See Section 9-15 "Software" on page 9-41 to identify the correct Base Image Load version.

WARNINGWARNING WHILE THE SOFTWARE INSTALL PROCEDURE IS DESIGNED TO PRESERVE DATA, YOU SHOULD SAVE ANY PATIENT DATA, IMAGES, SYSTEM SETUPS TO CD, DVD OR HARDCOPY BEFORE DOING A SOFTWARE UPGRADE



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

Section 8-10 Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later (cont’d)

8.) Properly turn off the scanner by momentarily pressing the Standby (ON/OFF) Switch. Select Shutdown from the System Exit menu. Wait for the Standby Switch to turn amber.

NOTE: If the system exit menu does not appear, press Alt F10.

9.) If the system does not shutdown normally, hold down Standby Switch until green light turns amber.10.)Turn on the scanner.

A message is displayed on the Touch Panel screen as shown in Figure 8-39 on page 8-39 .


11.)Press any key to continue. To abort, remove the CD-ROM from the drive and press CTRL-C.





1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM


12.)Select either option:

a.) [1] Load the complete disk -- All existing data will be lost. Or, b.) [2] Load the bootable C: partition only - Patient data is not lost.

NOTE: YOU NEED TO INSTALL APPLICATION SOFTWARE WHEN THIS PROCEDURE HAS COMPLETED.

13.)Figure 8-28 is the last warning message before the base load process begins. Press any key to continue or abort by pressing CTRL-C.



You are about to reload only the C: partition. If you DO NOT want to do this, remove the CDROM from the CDROM drive and Press “CTRL-C” now to exit and power cycle your system to restart without overwriting your disk drive's current contents.

Press any key to continue...



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM


Once you have chosen to continue with the selected option, you see a screen showing Norton Ghost (see Figure 8-35. This automatically loads a base set of software onto the hard disk. Let it run to completion (Approximately 8-10 minutes).

Figure 8-42 Norton Ghost screen.

A message similar to the one shown in Figure 8-30 is displayed when the process has completed.


NOTICE Do NOT proceed with the Application Software load yet. Do NOT insert the application disc into the CD-ROM/DVD drive until you have completed all the remaining directions in this section. If you insert any media in the drive beforehand, the drives will not remap correctly.

If there are no error messages listed above, the “Base System Software Load Image” process has successfully completed. You will now need to load the “Application Software” onto your system.

Please remove the CDROM from the drive, power cycle the system and then continue with the “Application Software” load procedure.

Thank you!



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM


14.)Remove DVD from the CD-ROM/DVD drive.

NOTE: If you do not remove the DVD, the Base System Software Load process repeats when the system boots up.

15.)After removing the CDROM from the drive, press Ctrl+Alt+Delete to reboot the system.When the system reboots, it automatically logs on to start checking hardware. This is a normal process.

16.)Allow the hardware checking process to run to completion.

NOTE: If the system does not reboot, press and hold down the Power On/Off button (button turns amber).


NOTE: While the script is running, several windows or dialog boxes appear on the screen. At times it may look like the system is unresponsive.

Wait for the “System Settings Change” dialog box “Do You Want to Restart computer now?” to appear, approximately 1-2 minutes after the desktop is displayed.

17.)When you get a message to restart Windows, select YES (see Figure 8-37).

Figure 8-44 System Settings Change dialog box - Restart Windows Message

After restart, the DriveUpdater dialog box and an Instructions dialog box open.

Figure 8-45 DriveUpdater (left) and Instructions Dialog Boxes



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM


Figure 8-46 DriveUpdater Dialog Box

18.)If the Current Version matches the New Version, proceed to step 20.

NOTE: If completing step 19, you must complete all substeps associated with the DriveUpdater dialog box BEFORE you select OK on the Instructions dialog box. If you select the OK button on the Instructions dialog box prematurely, the system may not remap the drives correctly.

19.)If the Current Version does not match the New Version on the DriveUpdater dialog box:

a.) Select the Update button.After firmware update is complete, the Update button changes to a Reboot button.

b.) Select the Reboot button.c.) Wait for Windows to finish installing the new Driver for the upgraded firmware and to find new

hardware.After reboot, the DriveUpdater dialog box opens again. Do NOT exit the DriveUpdater dialog box and do NOT click OK on the Instructions Dialog box at this time.

d.) Wait for the System Settings Change dialog box to open asking “Do you want to restart you computer now?” (Figure 8-44).Do NOT exit the DriveUpdater dialog box and do NOT click OK on the Instructions Dialog box.

NOTE: If the 'Do you want to restart your computer now?' dialog box does not open after several minutes, select Start -> Restart to reboot and continue with step f.

e.) Select Yes to restart.f.) Wait for the system to reboot.

After reboot, the DriveUpdater dialog box opens again.

20.)If the Current Version matches the New Version on the DriveUpdater dialog box:

a.) Select the Exit button on DriveUpdater dialog box first. b.) Select OK in the Instructions dialog box.

At this point, the CD drive re-mapping occurs. Do not reboot the system until the re-mapping is complete. After re-mapping, the CD/DVD drive should be drive G:\. When the re-mapping process is complete, the re-mapping window closes.

c.) Confirm the CD\DVD drive is mapped to G:\.21.)Proceed to 8-12-2 "Wired VoiceScan Speaker Assignment - R6.x.x, R7.x.x, and R9.x.x" on page

8-54 before loading application software R7.x.x and later.


8-44 Section 8-11 - Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior

1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

Section 8-11Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior

8-11-1 Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior

NOTE: If you have not done so previously, double-click on the My Computer icon. Check for the drive letters assignments of the Removable Drive (MOD) and the CD-ROM/DVD Drive. If the CD-ROM/DVD Drive is not drive “g” and the MOD drive “h” , manually remap the drives.

NOTE: When installing R2.1.1 software you may see error messages about not being able to replace the following *.dll files: ginastub.dll and msvcr70.dll. These are known, non-critical issues that are being tracked and will be fixed in the next revision of software.

NOTE: Starting with the Application S/W R3.0.0C and above, you may get a notification that the service platform is out of date. One of the last steps in the software load is to check the service platform version. If the version is not correct, the screen will turn yellow and you will get a pop-up notifying you that you must reghost the C drive and reinstall software to get the latest service software. If you do not do this service may not work.

1.) Place the “Application Software” CD into the CD-ROM/DVD drive.

NOTE: See Section 9-15 "Software" on page 9-41 to identify the correct Application Software version.

2.) Wait about 15 seconds. A window will pop-up showing you the contents of the drive.

3.) Double click on LoadSoftware.bat to load the software. 4.) If this pop-up window does not open in a minute, perform steps a. and b. below.

a.) Select the Start button on the tool bar at the bottom of the monitor screen and select “Run…”.b.) Enter “g:\LoadSoftware” into the dialog box as shown in Figure 8-47.

5.) After the screen opens to warn you that you are about to load software, press the Enter key or select OK to start the process.A Command (CMD) window opens, similar to the one shown in Figure 8-48.

Figure 8-47 Run Load Software



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

8-11-1 Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior (cont’d)

6.) As indicated, press any key to continue. The process is completely automated and provides you with messages as to its status. Software provides the message in Figure 8-49.

At this point you just have to wait while the software loads (Approximately 7-8 minutes).

NOTE: When the Information Window appears asking you to select OK, do nothing. This window will disappear automatically.

7.) In BEP 3.x systems only, the system will reboot before installing the Service Platform. You will see the Figure 8-50 dialog briefly just before the system reboots.

Figure 8-48 Command Window

Figure 8-49 R2.1.1 Software Message



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM


After the system reboots, a DOS box displays showing you the installation of the Service Platform. When the process is complete, another dialog box displays telling you that the system is rebooting. It is similar to Figure 8-50, but the message will be: “Computer is being rebooted to complete installation”

NOTE: After the Service Platform installs, and during the second reboot you may get some error messages about processes not starting because the workstation is shutting down. If present, these messages are normal and should be ignored.

8.) In BEP 2.x systems only, when the process is complete, the window will turn dark red and display the following message in Figure 8-51, and the system will reboot.

9.) If possible while the system is rebooting, remove the CD from the drive. If you remove the CD, the system will automatically reboot into the applications software. If you didn’t remove the CD, a dialog box like the one shown in Figure 8-52 opens. The ME2.0 will change to reflect the currently installed software.

Figure 8-50 BEP 3 Only - System Shutdown Warning Message

NOTICE Do not try to prevent these actions from occurring. If you do, you may end up with hyper threading turned off. If hyper threading is turned off the system will respond slower than expected.

Figure 8-51 Software Load Complete



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM


10.)Remove the Applications CD.11.)From the Start Applications dialog box, select Start.12.)Select Cancel.

13.)During the reboot process, the system may ask for the option string (valid license) to be entered. When this happens, enter the option string provided in the installation paperwork.

NOTE: Starting with R3.x Software, all systems must have at least the basic option string in order for the software to run. Any single option string may enable multiple options (i.e. Basic & B-Flow).Demo option strings turn on all options for a limited period of time. Do Not leave a demo option string in a unit when it is sold to a customer.

Figure 8-52 Start Software

Figure 8-53 Enter Option String



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM


14.)Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below.





use. “








1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

Section 8-12Loading Application Software - R6.x.x

8-12-1 Loading Applications Software - R6.x.x1.) Place the “Application Software” CD/DVD into the CDROM/DVD drive.

NOTE: See Section 9-15 "Software" on page 9-41 to identify the correct Application Software version.

2.) Wait about 30 seconds. A window pops up (see Figure 8-54) showing you the contents of the drive. Double click on LoadSoftware.bat to load the software.

Figure 8-54 LoadSoftware.bat File

3.) If this pop-up window does not open in a minute then perform steps A and B below.

A.) Select the START button on the tool bar at the bottom of the monitor screen and select “Run…”.

B.) Enter “g:\LoadSoftware” into the dialog box as shown in Figure 8-47.

4.) You see a screen that warns you that you are about to load software. Press the Enter key or select OK to start the process.

Figure 8-55 Run Load Software


8-50 Section 8-12 - Loading Application Software - R6.x.x

1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

8-12-1 Loading Applications Software - R6.x.x (cont’d)

5.) You see a window open similar to the example shown in Figure 8-48.

6.) As indicated, press any key to continue. The process is completely automated and provides you with messages as to its status. R6.0.4 Software provides the message in Figure 8-56.

Please wait while the software loads (Approximately 7-8 minutes).

NOTE: When the Information Window appears asking you to select OK, do nothing. This window disappears automatically.

Figure 8-56 Command Window

Figure 8-57 R6.X.X Software Message



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM


7.) The system reboots before installing the Service Platform. You will see Figure 8-50 dialog briefly just before the system reboots.

After the system reboots, a DOS box is displayed showing you the installation of the Service Platform. When the process has completed, you get another dialog box telling you that the system is rebooting. It is similar to Figure 8-58 but the message will be: Computer is being rebooted to complete installation”


Figure 8-58 BEP 3 Only System Shutdown Warning Message

NOTICE Do not try to prevent these actions from occurring. If you do, you may end up with hyper threading turned off. If hyper threading is turned off, the system responds slower than expected.



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM


8.) When the software has completed loading, the system reboots.You get a dialog box like the one shown in Figure 8-59. (Version “R6.0.3B” in the illustration below is an example. The actual application software version will be reflected.)

9.) REMOVE the Applications CD. 10.)From the Start Applications dialog box, select START (if the CD is still in the tray; otherwise,

the system starts up automatically).

NOTE: If the service dongle is still plugged in, you will see the Service Login instead (see Figure 8-60).

Figure 8-60 Service Login




1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM


If the Basic Option is not saved in the Option Dongle, then the SW License dialog window opens.

11.)During the reboot process, the system asks for the option string (valid license) to be entered. When this happens, enter the option string provided in the Upgrade Kit.

NOTE: Starting with R3.x Software, all systems must have at least the basic option string in order for the software to run. Any single option string may enable multiple options (i.e. Basic & B-Flow).

Demo option strings turn on all options for a limited period of time. Do Not leave a demo option string in a unit when it is sold to a customer.

NOTE: If the system does not display an image or a good image when you boot up, Do Not troubleshoot it as a problem yet. Continue with this upgrade. Proper Vital Product Data coding is essential to proper system function and optimization.

12.)Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below.






use. “








1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

8-12-2 Wired VoiceScan Speaker Assignment - R6.x.x, R7.x.x, and R9.x.xIf the customer had the Wired VoiceScan option on their system, the following procedure needs to be done to change the audio output from the wired headset to the PC Speakers. This procedure only needs to be performed after a reghost of the system.

NOTE: This procedure is not required for Wireless VoiceScan.

1.) Plug the wired headset into the USB ports on the left side of the upper control panel.

NOTE: After the system is turned on, the operating system assigns the headset as the new preferred playback/recording device. The following steps reassign the preferred playback device.

2.) Select Start->Settings->Control Panel->Sounds and Audio Devices to bring up the Sounds and Audio Devices properties box.

Figure 8-62 Path to Sounds and Audio Devices<$elemtextonly



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

8-12-2 Wired VoiceScan Speaker Assignment - R6.x.x, R7.x.x, and R9.x.x (cont’d)

3.) Select the Audio tab.

4.) In the Sound Playback area, select “SoundMAX Digital Audio” as the Default device, press Apply then OK.

NOTE: The recording device should remain “Plantronics Headset”.

The system sounds should now be directed to the PC Speaker.

Complete the appropriate application load.

Figure 8-63 Sounds and Audio Devices Properties Box


8-56 Section 8-13 - Loading Application Software - R7.x.x or Later

1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

Section 8-13Loading Application Software - R7.x.x or Later

If you have previously performed a Base Image Software Load, proceed to section 8-23-1, Step 1.

If you are only loading the Application Software, insert the application CD into the CD/DVD drive and power cycle the system. At boot-up, the system shows the “Start Application” dialog box. Click on [Install SW] and proceed with section 8-23-1, Step 6.

8-13-1 Loading Applications Software1.) Confirm drive letter for CD\DVD is mapped to G:\. If the CD\DVD drive is not mapped to the

G:\ drive:

A.) From the Desktop, select “My Computer”.B.) Open C:\remap. C.) Double-click on newmap.bat to remap the drive.

2.) Place the “Application Software” CDROM into the CDROM/DVD drive. See Section 9-15 "Software" on page 9-41 to confirm the correct Application Software version.

3.) Wait about 30 seconds. A window pops up (see Figure 8-64) showing you the contents of the drive.

4.) Double-click on LoadSoftware.bat to load the software.

Figure 8-64 LoadSoftware.bat File

5.) If the pop-up window in Figure 8-64 does not open in a minute, perform steps A - C below.

A.) From the Desktop, select “My Computer”.B.) Double-click the G:\ drive to open the pop-up window in Figure 8-64. C.) Double-click on LoadSoftware.bat to load the software.

NOTE: If the base image does not match the part number and revision of the approved base image, then the system notifies you of the required base image needed and does not run the software.



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

Section 8-13 Loading Application Software - R7.x.x or Later (cont’d)

6.) A window similar to the example shown in Figure 8-65 opens.

7.) As indicated, press any key to continue. The process is completely automated and provides you with messages as to its status. R9.X Software provides the message in Figure 8-66.

8.) Wait while the software loads (Approximately 7-8 minutes).

NOTE: When the Information Window appears asking you to select OK, do nothing. This window disappears automatically.

Figure 8-65 Command Window (Note: Application software for release R9.X L9)

Figure 8-66 R9.X.X and later Software Message



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM


9.) The system reboots before installing the Service Platform. You will see Figure 8-67 dialog briefly just before the system reboots.

After the system reboots, a DOS box is displayed showing you the installation of the Service Platform. When the process has completed, you get another dialog box telling you that the system is rebooting. It is similar to Figure 8-50 but the message will be: “Computer is being rebooted to complete installation”


Figure 8-67 BEP 3.x and later System Shutdown Warning Message

NOTICE Do not try to prevent these actions from occurring. If you do, you may end up with hyper threading turned off. If hyper threading is turned off, the system responds slower than expected.

If hyper threading turns off, you must perform the c: partition reghost and application s/w load again.



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM


10.)When the software has completed loading, the system reboots.A dialog box like the one shown in Figure 8-68 opens. (Version “R6.0.3B” in the illustration below is an example. The actual application software version will be reflected as R9.X.)

11.)REMOVE the Applications CD. If the Basic Option is not saved in the Option Dongle, then the SW License dialog window opens.

12.)During the reboot process, the system asks for the option string (valid license) to be entered. When this happens, enter the option string provided in the Upgrade Kit.





1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM


NOTE: Starting with R3.x Software, all systems must have at least the basic option string in order for the software to run. Any single option string may enable multiple options (i.e. Basic & B-Flow).Demo option strings turn on all options for a limited period of time. Do Not leave a demo option string in a unit when it is sold to a customer.

NOTE: If the system does not display an image or a good image when you boot up, Do Not troubleshoot it as a problem yet. Continue with this upgrade. Proper Vital Product Data coding is essential to proper system function and optimization. For information on updating VPD, see Proprietary Service Manual (2294854-100), Chapter 8, Verify and Update Vital Product Data.

8-13-2 Functional CheckoutRun functional checkout to ensure system operation.

1.) Connect each probe to ensure that it is recognized by the system.2.) Check every probe in every mode.3.) Reconnect to the network.4.) Verify Software level on the Utility --> System --> About menu; also confirm the Base Image Load

and Patch CD information on this screen.5.) Check Date, Time, and Timezone.6.) Restore (type in) the TCPIP settings (IP Address, Computer Name, Subnet Mask, and Default

Gateway, Network Speed) on the Utility --> Connectivity --> TCPIP menu. Save these settings and reboot the system.

7.) Verify the Presets loaded properly. The patient data should have transferred since the upgrade only entails a C: Partition load.If the transfer failed, perform a Restore via Utility --> System --> Backup/Restore. Select to restore Patient Archive, Report Archive, User Defined Configuration, and Service settings. The system automatically reboots.

8.) Perform audio test. 9.) Format a DVD, and backup Customer Presets to confirm proper CD/DVD write functionality.10.)Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below.

11.)Perform basic system measurements.12.)Replace old Base Load and Application Software CDs and Documentation.





use. “








1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

Section 8-14Generic Application Software - Upgrade Only

8-14-1 Application Software Upgrade Procedure

NOTE: When installing software you may see error messages about not being able to replace the following *.dll files: ginastub.dll and msvcr70.dll. These are known, non-critical issues that are being tracked and will be fixed in the next revision of software.

1.) Place the “Application Software” CD/DVD into the CD-ROM/DVD drive.See Section 9-15 "Software" on page 9-41 to confirm the correct Application Software version.

2.) Power Down the scanner.3.) Power up the scanner. Wait for a dialog box like the one in Figure 8-70.

WARNINGWARNING WHILE THE SOFTWARE INSTALL PROCEDURE IS DESIGNED TO PRESERVE DATA, YOU SHOULD SAVE ANY PATIENT DATA, IMAGES, SYSTEM SETUPS TO A MOD, CD, DVD OR HARDCOPY BEFORE DOING A SOFTWARE UPGRADE

CAUTION Remember to remove the MOD before continuing with the software install.

Figure 8-70 Start Application Window


8-62 Section 8-14 - Generic Application Software - Upgrade Only

1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

8-14-1 Application Software Upgrade Procedure (cont’d)

4.) Select Install SW ... .5.) Two separate dialog boxes open warning you that you are about to install new software as shown

in Figure 8-71. In both cases, click OK.

6.) Another window will be displayed asking you to “Press any key to continue…”.

Figure 8-71 StartLoader Dialog Boxes

Figure 8-72 Command Window (R2.x shown)



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM


7.) As indicated, press any key to continue. The process is completely automated and provides you with messages as to its status. R2.1.0 Software provides the message in Figure 8-73.

At this point you just have to wait while the software loads (Approximately 10 minutes).

When the process is complete, the window will turn dark red, display the message in Figure 8-74, and the system will reboot.

8.) If possible while the system is rebooting, remove the CD from the drive.If you remove the CD, the system will automatically reboot into the applications software. If you didn’t remove the CD, a dialog box like the one shown in Figure 8-75 opens.

9.) Remove the Applications CD.10.)From the Start Applications dialog box, select Start.11.)Select Cancel.

Figure 8-73 R2.1.0 Software Message

Figure 8-74 Software Load Complete



8-64 Section 8-14 - Generic Application Software - Upgrade Only

1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM


12.)During the reboot process, the system may ask for the option string (valid license) to be entered. When this happens, enter the option string provided in the installation paperwork.

NOTE: Starting with R3.x Software, all systems must have at least the basic option string in order for the software to run. Any single option string may enable multiple options (i.e. Basic & B-Flow).

Demo option strings turn on all options for a limited period of time. Do Not leave a demo option string in a unit when it is sold to a customer.

8-14-2 Functional Checkout1.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below.






use. “








1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

Section 8-15System Setup

8-15-1 To Complete the System Setup1.) From the Touch Screen on the scanner, select Utility -> Connectivity -> TCPIP Tab. 2.) Ensure that DHCP is deselected so you can enter information manually.3.) Input the DICOM information.

- This should be the appropriate DICOM information for the system if it is on the hospital network. If it is not correct, input the correct data.

4.) After all information is entered, select Save Settings.5.) Complete the InSite Checkout again. Refer to the InSite/iLinq and InSite ExC Installation Manual,

2354611-100, Rev 4 or later.

8-15-2 VCR Setup 1.) Reset the VCR and choose a Default Line Printer by going to Utilities>System>Peripherals. 2.) Under VCR, select Sony SVO-9500 VCR or Mitsubishi MD 3000, as appropriate, and SAVE.3.) Under SETUP, select the desired default line printer and Save.4.) Select Exit in the lower left-hand corner of the Touch Screen.

8-15-3 DVR Setup 1.) Reset the DVR and choose a Default Line Printer by going to Utilities>System>Peripherals. 2.) Under VCR, select Panasonic DVR and Save.3.) Under SETUP, select the desired default line printer and Save.4.) Select Exit in the lower left-hand corner of the Touch Screen.

8-15-4 Printer Setup1.) If the customer has a USB (Digital) Printer and it was plugged in at the time the Base Image

Software was installed, it should have been recognized and automatically installed. 2.) If you did not install the printer until after the Applications software was loaded, you will need a

service key (dongle) to open Windows. Follow the manual setup procedures in the LOGIQ™ 9 Peripheral Installation Manual 2341053-100.

3.) For the UP-D895 Printer, you must manually set the resolution to 1920 x 1280 whenever software is reloaded see 3-14-1 "Printer Set Up (R4.x and later)" on page 3-24.


8-66 Section 8-15 - System Setup

1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

8-15-5 Print Key Assignment and CheckoutBecause of the addition of more printer choices, digital and analog, the factory default print key configuration has been removed for the color and b/w printers.

1.) Determine which printers are configured on the system. The former factory defaults were Color = P3 and B/W = P2.

2.) Consult the customer to ensure which “Print” keys (P1-4) should be assigned to printers. 3.) Select Utility -> Admin -> Connectivity -> Buttons. Choose the desired print button. Under

“Destinations”, select necessary printer choice from the drop-down list.4.) Press the print key just configured.

The screenshot prints to the destination printer.

8-15-6 Restore Patient, Report, and User-Defined Presets1.) Place the Backup/Restore media (MOD or CD-R) in the drive.2.) Select the Utility tab on the Touch Panel. Select System, then Backup/Restore.

The Backup/Restore screen opens.

NOTE: If you are not logged in with administrator privileges, the Operator Login window opens. Log on with administrator privileges.

Figure 8-77 Backup / Restore Screen



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

8-15-6 Restore Patient, Report, and User-Defined Presets (cont’d)

3.) In the Restore list, select from the following, depending on which configurations you want to restore: - Patient Archive- Report Archive- User Defined Configuration- Service (Only available with R4.x.x SW and higher)

OR, in the Detailed Restore section select one of the following: - Imaging Presets - Connectivity Configuration - Measurement Configuration - Comment/Body Pattern Configuration - Voice Scan Training Profiles - Report Templates- 3D/4D (Only available with R4.x.x SW and higher)- Fast Key (R7.x.x or Later)- Custom Programs (R9.x.x)- All Others

NOTE: Only restore the Service presets onto the system from which they were backed up. Do not carry Service presets from one system to another.

4.) In the Media field, select the media that the backup is on. 5.) Select Restore.

The system performs the restore. As it proceeds, status information is displayed on the System/Backup/Restore screen.

NOTE: If you restore Service there is another progress bar that comes up during restore. When you do a restore, the system will automatically reboot. This only occurs after the boot where you restore Service. After this progress bar goes away the system will load normally. The progress bar will complete several full passes. This is normal.

8-15-7 Cycle System Power1.) Press the ON/OFF switch on the Control Panel once to display the SYSTEM - EXIT menu.

2.) Power up the system for functional check-out.

Figure 8-78 System Exit Menu for Back-end Processor Power Down


8-68 Section 8-15 - System Setup

1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

8-15-8 Standby Operation Checkout

8-15-8-1 To Place the System in the Standby Mode

1.) Press the ON/OFF switch at the front of the system once. The System-Exit window displays.2.) Use the Trackball to select Standby.

The Monitor Display and Touch Panel turn black. The On/Off switch indicator is green.

3.) After the monitor blacks out, wait at least 20 additional seconds before unplugging the power cable or switching off the breaker. The system does not fully enter Standby Mode until after the following occurs:

- If you have a CD/DVD drive, the Power ON/OFF button blinks.- If you have a CD drive only, the green lights beneath the CD drive show no activity for 15

seconds.

NOTE: Starting with BT04, the ON/OFF Switch blinks while the system is in Standby Mode. Because of a hardware dependency, this feature is not supported on systems that upgrade to BT04.

4.) Once in Standby Mode, unplug the system from the wall. The system beeps.

NOTE: DO NOT press the ON/OFF switch while the system is unplugged. This will turn the system off.

5.) Plug the system back in within 15 minutes. If the system is unplugged for longer than 15 minutes, the battery is discharged and the system shuts down. This assumes a fully-charged battery.

NOTE: It takes ten hours to recharge the battery. Expected battery lifetime for frequent standby use is six months. To maintain battery life, keep the system plugged in with the circuit breaker in the ON position.


See Moving the System in the Basic User Manual for more information.

8-15-8-2 To Wake the System from Standby Mode

1.) Press ON/OFF switch QUICKLY! Less than .25 seconds. The system becomes functional after about 45 seconds.

NOTE: If the ON/OFF switch is pressed too long, the system shuts down instead of coming out of Standby Mode.

NOTE: Waking the system from Standby without AC connected will turn off the system.

NOTE: Charge time for batteries is approximately 10 hours. Expected battery lifetime for frequent standby use is six months. To maintain battery life, keep the system plugged in with the circuit breaker in the ON position.



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

8-15-9 Functional Checkout1.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below.

2.) Reboot the system.3.) If the system does not recognize the video card, perform a C: partition base load

(see Section 8-8 "Loading Base Image Software - R4.x.x and prior" on page 8-26, Section 8-9 "Loading Base Image Software - R6.x.x" on page 8-33, or Section 8-10 "Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later" on page 8-38).





use. “







8-70 Section 8-16 - Console Lock Assembly Replacement Procedure

1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

Section 8-16Console Lock Assembly Replacement Procedure

8-16-1 ManpowerOne person, 1 hour

8-16-2 ToolsHexagon key 2,5 and 3 mm

Phillips screwdriver size 2

Socket 8 mm

8-16-3 Preparations1.) Shut down the system .2.) Remove Operator Panel.3.) Remove XY- Handle .



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

8-16-4 Console Lock Assembly Removal Procedure1.) Unscrew 8 (5 mm) and 2 (3 mm) hexagon screws .2.) Take care of the spring.3.) Remove the Console Lock Assembly.

8-16-5 Console Lock Assembly Installation Procedure1.) Install the Lock Assembly.2.) Install the spring.3.) Fasten the 10 hexagon screws.4.) Install Operator Panel.5.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below.





use. “




4-5-1 or4-5-2 or

4-5-3

Operator I/O Movement - Standard Monitor orOperator I/O Movement - 17” LCD (Option) orOperator I/O Movement - 19” LCD (Option)


8-72 Section 8-17 - Release Lock Assembly Replacement Procedure

1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

Section 8-17Release Lock Assembly Replacement Procedure

8-17-1 ManpowerOne person, 1 hour

8-17-2 Tools• Hexagon key 2,5 and 3 mm• Phillips screwdriver size 2• Socket 8 mm

8-17-3 Preparations1.) Shut down the system .2.) Remove Operator Panel .3.) Remove XY- Handle .

8-17-4 Release Lock Removal Procedure1.) Unscrew 8 mm nut behind XY-Handle.2.) Unscrew 2 hexagon screws (3 mm).3.) Unscrew 4 hexagon screws (2,5 mm).4.) Remove Release Lock Assembly.

Figure 8-79 Release Lock Assembly

Strap

Screws

Screws

Screws



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

8-17-5 Release Lock Installation Procedure1.) Install Release Lock Assembly.2.) Fasten 6 hexagon screws.3.) Fasten nut behind XY- Handle.4.) Install XY-Handle .5.) Install Operator Panel.

6.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below.

Figure 8-80 Release Lock Assembly





use. “




4-5-1 or4-5-2 or

4-5-3

Operator I/O Movement - Standard Monitor orOperator I/O Movement - 17” LCD (Option)orOperator I/O Movement - 19” LCD (Option)

Strap

Screws

Screws

Screws


8-74 Section 8-18 - Gas Shock Replacement Procedure

1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

Section 8-18Gas Shock Replacement Procedure

8-18-1 Manpower2 persons, 4 hours

8-18-2 ToolsLarge coin and a large flat screwdriver

Phillips screwdriver

Long Phillips driver

#2 Phillips screwdriver

5 mm Hexagon key

8-18-3 OverviewReplacement of the gas shock in a LOGIQ™ 9 is not a difficult task but one that should be approached with safety in mind.

The Gas Shock is used to balance the weight from the Top Console. It is located inside the frame, between the Front End Card Cage and the Back End Processor (BEP).


WARNINGWARNING Beware of possible sharp edges on all metal chassis parts. if sharp edges are encountered, the appropriate PPE should be used to reduce the risk of injury.

Figure 8-81 Typical Gas Shock Assembly

1

2

2

3

4

4



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

8-18-3 Overview (cont’d)

You get access to the Gas Shock via openings in the frame behind the BEP, so the BEP must be removed. To reduce the weight of the Top Console, the monitor should be removed.

To release the tension in the Gas Shock, the Top Console must be secured in its upper position during replacement.

Components must be removed to remove weight from the console and to gain access to the gas shock attachment points. Items removed are:

- Covers- Handle- Air Filter- Peripherals- VCR/Top Tray Frame- Monitor- Back End Processor (BEP)

Pay particular attention to all cautions and warnings in this procedure because injury could result from improper handling of components and sharp edges on metal chassis parts.

8-18-4 Preparations1.) Power Off / Shutdown the system.2.) Remove the left- and/or right-side covers.3.) Remove the upper rear cover.4.) Remove the top cover.5.) Remove the front cover.6.) Remove the lower rear cover.7.) Remove the rear handle.8.) Remove the back-end processor9.) Remove the monitor assembly.10.)Remove the color video printer.11.)Remove the black and white video printer.12.)Remove the VCR.

WARNINGWARNING When the top console is in its locked position, the gas shock is compressed and stores mechanical energy. During normal operation the top console, the weight of the monitor and the mechanical force of the gas shock are in balance. Take care if/when you activate this gas shock. Personal injury can occur after the panel is removed and the shock pressure is released. Take care when you repair the elevation assembly.



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

8-18-5 Top Tray FrameThe Color Printer/Top Tray Frame should be remove to avoid damage to this part.

8-18-5-1 Removal Procedure

1.) Remove the four screws securing the frame to the chassis.

2.) Remove the frame and set it aside.

Figure 8-82 Color Printer/Top Tray Frame

Figure 8-83 Remove Four Screws

Top Tray Frame



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

8-18-5-1 Removal Procedure (cont’d)You should now have a chassis with all the necessary parts removed as shown in Figure 8-84 on page 8-77 .

Figure 8-84 Chassis with Necessary Parts Removed



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

8-18-6 Gas Shock RemovalThe stripped down system console will be tilted on its side in order to remove and replace the gas shock.

1.) Set the back brake on the Right Side of the console. The right side is the side with the Front End Processor.

2.) Ensure that the keyboard X/Y motion (“Frogleg”) is locked.3.) Carefully raise the console to its fully extended position.

4.) Place some padded material on the floor next to the right side of the chassis.5.) Refer to Figure 8-85, with one person at the back of the chassis and one at the keyboard handles

in the front, carefully tilt the console and lay it on its right side.

6.) You should now have access to the top and bottom shock mounts as shown in Figure 8-86.


Figure 8-85 Tilting the Console



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

8-18-6 Gas Shock Removal (cont’d)

7.) At the top of the shock mount there is a Wire Clamp nestled in the Forked Retainer. Using 2 slotted screwdrivers (one on each side of the clamp) loosen the clamp. Refer to Figure 8-87.

8.) At the top shock mount remove the:- Top “C” (Circlip) Clip- Pin- Bushings

Slide out the top shock end.

Figure 8-86 Console on its Side

WARNINGWARNING Beware of possible sharp edges on all metal chassis parts. if sharp edges are encountered, the appropriate PPE should be used to reduce the risk of injury.

Bottom Shock Mount

Top Shock Mount



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

8-18-6 Gas Shock Removal (cont’d)

9.) At the shock bottom mounting point, remove the Circlip. Refer to Figure 8-88.10.)Remove the mounting axel and the washers. Refer to Figure 8-88.

NOTE: Take care, not to loose clips or washers.

11.)Lift up the bottom of the shock and pull it out and away from the pin.

Figure 8-87 Upper Gas Shock Axle and Release Mechanism

Figure 8-88 Bottom Shock Mount

SpringRelease arm

CirclipGas Spring Axle

Wire end lock

Plastic strap

Mounting Axel, Circlip and washers



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

8-18-7 Install the New Gas ShockReverse the removal procedure to install the new gas shock.

The shock comes pre-loaded with a “stop block” tywrapped to the top of the shock to prevent accidental complete extension of the shock. Refer to Figure 8-90. The Position of the release arm is also preadjusted.

1.) Slide the bottom of the shock into the bottom mount position as shown in Figure 8-91.

Figure 8-89 New Gas Shock as delivered

Figure 8-90 New Shock with Stop Block



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

8-18-7 Install the New Gas Shock (cont’d)

2.) Place a washer on each side of the bottom of the shock mount and align the holes as shown in Figure 8-91.

NOTE: You can use the top mounting pin to help align the bottom of the shock mount with the washers.

3.) Reach behind the bottom of the shock mount and lift the bottom mounting pin so that it slides through the washer, shock, washer and bottom mounting bracket as shown in Figure 8-91.

4.) Install the “C” clip to secure the bottom of the shock mount as shown in Figure 8-91.5.) Move the top of the shock mount into position as shown in Figure 8-92.6.) Assemble the top of the shock to the chassis using the pin, two washers and “C” clips as shown in

Figure 8-92.

Figure 8-91 Shock Bottom Mounted

Figure 8-92 Top of Shock mounted

Mounting Pin “C” Clip

Mounting Pin“C” Clip

Stop BlockTywrap



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

8-18-7 Install the New Gas Shock (cont’d)

7.) Using two people, return the console to its upright position (sitting on all four wheels).8.) Release the shock by cutting the tywrap and removing the stop block as shown in Figure 8-92.

8-18-8 Reassemble Z-Release1.) Place the Release Cable Socket in the slot on the Shock top’s lower flange as shown in Figure 8-93.

2.) Tywrap the Release Cable Socket to the Shock head as shown in Figure 8-94.


Figure 8-93 Mounting the Release Cable

Figure 8-94 Tywrapped Release Cable

Release Cable Socket

Slot in Shock top’s Lower Flange

Tywrap



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

8-18-8 Reassemble Z-Release (cont’d)

3.) Thread the spring and barrel clamp(s) onto the Release Cable wire. Place the Barrel Clamp(s) in the Clamp cradle on the Shock’s Valve Release arm as shown in Figure 8-95.

4.) Using needle nose pliers, hold the wire end shown in Figure 8-95 above the clamp(s) and pull it upward to take up any cable slack.

5.) Using one of the two slotted screwdrivers, push the Clamp(s) downwards until it rests in the Shock Valve Release Arm Clamp Cradle as shown in Figure 8-95.

6.) Tighten the clamp with one screwdriver to hold the cable. Let go of the pliers and then use the two screwdrivers to fully tighten the clamp.

7.) Without squeezing the Top Console Release Lever, check that the Shock Valve Release Arm is in its uppermost position as shown in Figure 8-95.

8.) Squeeze the Top Console Release Lever and watch the clamp cradle move down immediately as the lever is squeezed, there should be very little play in the cable. Small amounts of play can be taken up (or slackened) with the Top Console cable adjustment screw.

NOTE: Before installing the Back End Processor, check all connections to the AC Transformer box to ensure they were not disturbed while replacing the gas shock.

9.) Replace the BEP. Refer to Chapter 8 of the Proprietary Manual if necessary.10.)Replace the Monitor. Refer to Chapter 8 of the Proprietary Manual if necessary.11.)You should now be able to power up the system and check basic operation prior to installing the

peripherals and covers. If the system functions normally, continue reassembling the system.12.)After completing a basic check out, power down the system.13.)Replace the Color Printer/Top Tray frame.14.)Replace the VCR.15.)Replace the B/W.16.)Replace the Color Printer.

Figure 8-95 Cradled Barrel Clamps

WARNINGWARNING Do NOT attempt to pinch together or pry apart the Cradle. If one of the tines should break off, the gas spring piston may have to be replaced AGAIN.

Barrel Clamps

Spring

Cable wire End

Release Arm in Upper Position



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

8-18-8 Reassemble Z-Release (cont’d)

17.)Replace all covers. - Air Filter- Handle- Top Cover- Back Covers (Top & Bottom)- Front Cover- Filter Cover- Side Covers

18.)Power up the system and do a complete functional check of all peripherals.19.)Perform the following functional test. If successful, include the debrief script provided below

20.)Check the Z-Release operation (Operator Console up/down operation). Readjust if necessary. Refer to Section 6-5 "Z-Release Cable and Gas Spring Adjustment" on page 6-8.




“Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-18. Leakage Current measured at (record the value) and meets allowable limits. Equipment passed all required

tests and is ready for use. “

4-2-3 Standby Mode







4-5-1 or4-5-2 or

4-5-3

Operator I/O Movement - Standard Monitor orOperator I/O Movement - 17” LCD (Option) or

Operator I/O Movement - 19” LCD (Option)

4-5-4 Brakes and Direction Locks Checks

Section 6-3 Monitor

10-7-4 Grounding Continuity

10-7-5 Chassis Leakage Current Test


8-86 Section 8-19 - Gas Spring Wirecable Replacement Procedure

1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

Section 8-19Gas Spring Wirecable Replacement Procedure

The Gas Spring Wirecable (FB307375) is a field replaceable unit. The wirecable is used when operating the Z-Release Handle to move the Top Console up/down.

8-19-1 Manpower1 person, 1-2 hours

8-19-2 Tools• Narrow standard screwdriver• Needle nose pliers• 4mm allen wrench• Hexagon key 3mm (covers)• Phillips screwdriver (covers)• Coin and large screwdriver (covers)

8-19-3 Wirecable Removal Preparations1.) Power Off / Shutdown the system as shown in .

2.) Remove the Side Covers .3.) Remove the Front Cover .

Removing the Front Cover allows you easier access to raise the column cover as necessary.

4.) Remove B/W Video Printer .

NOTICE

Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ™ 9When servicing parts of the system where there is exposure to voltage greater than 30 Volts: 1. Turn off the breaker. 2. Unplug the system. 3. Maintain control of the system power plug. 4. Wait at least 20 seconds for capacitors to discharge as there are no test points to verify isolation.Beware that the AC Control Box, Front End Processor and Back End Processor may be energized even if the power is turned off when the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet.

Signed Date

TAG &

LOCKOUT



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

8-19-3 Wirecable Removal Preparations (cont’d)

5.) Remove VCR or DVR.Removing B/W Video Printer and VCR/DVR gives access to the lower end of wirecable and the release mechanism located behind and between the rear parts of these two units.

6.) Remove upper op panel and lower op panels.7.) Lift console to top position.

Figure 8-96 Disconnect and Remove the Printer and VCR or DVR

Disconnect Cables

VCR

B/W Printer



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

8-19-4 Wirecable Removal Procedure1.) Remove Z-handle shown in Figure 8-97.

c.) Unscrew 1 hexagon screw.d.) Release the wire-end lock from the handle.e.) Remove the handle.

2.) Cut plastic strap shown in Figure 8-98.3.) Unscrew both upper and lower wire-end locks shown in Figure 8-98. Take care of spring.

Figure 8-97 Z-Release handle, view from below

Figure 8-98 Upper Gas Shock Axle and Release Mechanism

Hexagon ScrewWire-end lock

Z-Handle

Spring

Release arm

Circlip

Gas Spring Axle

Upper wire-end lock

Plastic strap

Mantle end - lower

Console Cable Assembly

Arm fork

WirecableLower wire-end lock



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

8-19-4 Wirecable Removal Procedure (cont’d)

4.) Pull the wirecable out of mantle (black rubber tube housing) from the upper end of the mantle shown in Figure 8-99.

Figure 8-99 Z-Release handle, view from above

Mantle end - upper



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

8-19-5 Wirecable Installation Procedure1.) Thread the new wirecable with prefixed wire-end lock through Z-Handle.2.) Thread wirecable from Z-Handle down through the upper mantle (Figure 8-99) until the wirecable

is visible through the lower mantle end (Figure 8-98).3.) Reinstall Z-handle.4.) Thread the cone-shaped spring on the lower end of the wirecable.5.) Put two wire-end locks on wirecable and hook wire-end into the release arm fork. See Figure 8-87.6.) Secure wirecable with a new plastic strap. See Figure 8-87.7.) Loosen the lower wire-end lock. See Figure 8-87.8.) Use the needle nose pliers to pull the lower end of the wirecable upwards and to push the loose

wire-end lock against the release arm fork. While maintaining tension on the wirecable using the needle nose pliers in one hand (so that the Z-handle is tight and in proper position, Figure 8-100), use a flathead screwdriver in the other hand to fasten the loose lower wire-end lock.

9.) Loosen the upper lock, push it against the lower, and fasten the upper wire-end lock. 10.)Confirm the Z-handle is in proper position (Figure 8-100).

NOTE: When the wirecable is tight, the Z-handle will be in proper position. Improper Z-handle position will affect the performance of the gas shock.

11.)Perform a functional test of the Z-Release operation (Operator Console up/down operation) before cutting off overshooting lower wire-end. Readjust if necessary (see “Z-Release Cable and Gas Spring Adjustment” in Chapter 6 of the Service Manual).

12.)Reinstall the upper and lower operator panels.13.)Reinstall VCR or DVR.14.)Reinstall B/W-Video Printer.15.)Reinstall Front Cover.16.)Reinstall Side Covers.

Figure 8-100 Z-Release handle in proper position, view from above

Z-Handle



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

8-19-5 Wirecable Installation Procedure (cont’d)

17.)Perform the following functional tests. If successful, include the debrief script provided below.




“Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-19. Leakage Current measured at (record the value) and meets allowable limits. Equipment passed all required

tests and is ready for use. “







4-5-1 or4-5-2 or

4-5-3



4-5-4 Brakes and Direction Locks Checks


Section 7-7 I/O Devices




8-92 Section 8-20 - Frog Leg Angle Adjustment

1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

Section 8-20Frog Leg Angle Adjustment

8-20-1 ManpowerTwo persons, .5 hour + travel

8-20-2 ToolsHexagon keys, 5mm and 6 mm

8-20-3 Kit Contents

8-20-4 Preparations1.) Power Off / Shutdown the system.2.) Remove the monitor.

8-20-5 Frog Leg Adjustment Procedure1.) Return the console to the locked position and engage the X-Y Lock.2.) Carefully raise the console to its fully extended position.

Table 8-1 Shim Kit - LOGIQ™ 9 or Vivid 7 Op Panel (5116529)

Qty Description

2 Shim Washer .635 mm thick

1 Shim Washer 1mm thick



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

8-20-5 Frog Leg Adjustment Procedure (cont’d)

3.) Have one person hold on to the rear of the operator panel. See Figure 8-101 on page 8-93 .

4.) Unscrew and remove socket head cap screw from Top Console. See Figure 8-102 on page 8-93 and Figure 8-103 on page 8-94 .

5.) Unscrew and remove four button head screws from Top Console. See Figure 8-102 on page 8-93 and Figure 8-103 on page 8-94 .

Figure 8-101 Hold on to Rear of Operator Console

NOTICE Lock Tight is applied to the hex screws that attach the Operator Console to the Frogleg during assembly. Be sure to seat the Hexagon Key firmly in the screw before attempting to unscrew so that you don’t strip the screw head.

Figure 8-102 Screws through Frogleg to Top Console

Socket Head Cap Screw requiring 6 mm hexagon key

Button Head Screws requiring 5 mm hexagon key

Button Head Screws requiring 5 mm hexagon key



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM


6.) Have person holding the Operator Console gently tip it back. See Figure 8-104 on page 8-94 .

7.) Place 1 mm thick washer between Frogleg and Top Console so the socket head cap screw can be inserted through it. See Figure 8-104 on page 8-94 .

8.) Place the two .635 mm thick washers between the Frogleg and Top Console assembly so the middle button head screws can be inserted through them. See Figure 8-104 on page 8-94 .

Figure 8-103 Remove Screws

Figure 8-104 Place Washers (shims) on Frogleg

1 mm thick washer goes on rear hole (Socket head cap screw)

.635 mm thick washers go on middle holes

.635 mm thick washers go on middle holes

no shims on front holes



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM


9.) Have person holding the Operator Console gently tip console back into place.10.)Install socket head cap screw using care not to cross thread the casting. 11.)Install all button head screws, using care not to cross thread the casting.12.)Tighten all five screws.13.)Replace the monitor.

8-20-6 Functional Check1.) Close Frog Leg.2.) Verify “Crash Arms” extend at least 1/2 way down “Crash Pads”. See Figure 8-105 on page 8-95

and Figure 8-106 on page 8-96 .

Figure 8-105 Crash Arm

Crash Arms



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

8-20-6 Functional Check (cont’d)

3.) Lock and Unlock Frogleg to verify correct operation.

NOTE: If frogleg continues to rub on operator panel after the shims have been put in place, or if crash arms do not extend at least 1/2 way down the crash pads, you will need to order a new frogleg.

4.) Perform the following functional test. If successful, include the debrief script provided below.

Figure 8-106 Crash Pad

Thumbnail indicates 1/2 way down Crash Pad



1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM

8-20-6 Functional Check (cont’d)




“Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-20. Leakage Current measured at (record the value) and meets allowable limits. Equipment passed all

required tests and is ready for use. “






4-5-1 or4-5-2 or

4-5-3



Section 6-3 Monitor


Section 7-7 I/O Devices





1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM


P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Chapter 9 9-1

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

Chapter 9Renewal PartsSection 9-1Overview

9-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 9This chapter gives you an overview of Spare Parts available for the LOGIQ™ 9.



9-1 Overview 9-1

9-2 List of Abbreviations 9-3

9-3 Console View 9-4

9-4 External Covers 9-5

9-5 Additional Console Hardware 9-7

9-6 Operator I/O Mechanical Parts 9-9

9-7 Operator Control Panel Brackets 9-13

9-8 Gas Spring 9-14

9-9 Monitor Assembly 9-16

9-10 Operator Control Panel Assembly 9-20

9-11 Front End Processor Assembly 9-26

9-12 I/O Interfaces 9-32

9-13 3-D Externals 9-34

9-14 Back End Processor Assemblies 9-35

9-15 Software 9-41

9-16 Interconnect Cables 9-44

9-17 Power Distribution Modules 9-61

9-18 Air Distribution 9-62

9-19 Voice Scan 9-63

9-20 4D Components 9-66

9-21 Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler Components 9-67

9-22 Peripherals 9-68

9-23 Customer Documentation 9-69

9-24 Probes 9-70


9-2 Section 9-1 - Overview

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

9-1-2 LOGIQ™ 9 Models Numbers

Special Service Tool: service key/dongle (p/n 066E0703) required for some GE proprietary operations.

Table 9-2 LOGIQ™ 9 Model Designations

Part Number Description

2188900 LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP1.0












2404587 LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP3 BT’04

2404587-2 LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP3 BT’04

2404587-3 LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP3 BT’04




5177000 LOGIQ™ 9 120-60V Console & Peripherals - BEP4.1 BT’07 + BT09*

5177000-2 LOGIQ™ 9 220-50V PAL Console & Peripherals - BEP4.1 BT’07 + BT09*

5177000-3 LOGIQ™ 9 220-50V NTSC Console & Peripherals - BEP4.1 BT’07 + BT09*

*BT09 is a software-only upgrade


Chapter 9 9-3

1/22/10CHAPTER9.FM

Section 9-2List of Abbreviations

• Assy - Assembly• BEP - Back End Processor• CRU - Customer Replacement Unit• Ctrl - Control• FEP - Front End Processor• F.O.B - Flock of Birds or 3-D Option• FRU 1 - Replacement part available in parts hub• FRU 2 - Replacement part available from the manufacturer (lead time involved)• LCD - Liquid Crystal Display• Int - Internal• I/O - Input/Output• PWA - Printed Wire Assembly• Recv - Receive• XFRMR - Transformer


9-4 Section 9-3 - Console View

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

Section 9-3Console View

Left Front Rear RightFigure 9-1 Console Views

Table 9-3 Parts by Table Numbers

Part Table Name Table Number Part Table Name Table Number

External Covers Table 9-4 Back End Processor AssembliesTable 9-20Table 9-21Table 9-22

Additional Console Hardware Table 9-5BEP Base Image Load Matrix - BEP 1 and 2.xBEP Base Image Load Matrix - BEP 3.x/4.xSoftware Tools

Table 9-23Table 9-24Table 9-25

Operator I/O Mechanical Parts Table 9-6 Peripheral Cables

Table 9-26Table 9-27Table 9-28Table 9-29Table 9-30

Bumper Kit, Frogleg FC200086 Table 9-7 Power Distribution Table 9-31

Operator Panel Brackets Table 9-8 Air Distribution Parts Table 9-32

Gas Spring Table 9-9 Voice Scan Table 9-33

Monitor Assembly - Standard Table 9-10 Wireless Interconnect Table 9-34

Monitor Assembly - 17” LCDMonitor Assembly - 19” LCD

Table 9-11Table 9-12 4 D Parts Table 9-35

Operator Control Panel Assembly - Upper Table 9-14 Continuous Wave Doppler Components Table 9-36

Operator Control Panel Assembly - LowerTable 9-15Table 9-16 Approved Peripherals Table 9-37

Front End Processor Assembly Table 9-17 User Documentation Table 9-38

I/O Interfaces Table 9-18 Available Probes Table 9-39

3-D Externals Table 9-19 Software/Probe Compatibility Matrix Table 9-40


Chapter 9 9-5

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

Section 9-4External Covers

Figure 9-2 External Covers

101

101A

102A102

103A

103

103B

104A

104

104B

105

105A

106

107

108

108A

109A

110109

110A

111


9-6 Section 9-4 - External Covers

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

Section 9-4 External Covers (cont’d)

Table 9-4 External Covers

Item Part Name Part Number Description Qty CRU FRU

101 Top Cover FB307383 Replaced with FC307772 1 - N

101A Top Cover FC307772 Replaces FB307383 1 - 1

102 Front Cover FC307771 Cover only 1 - 1

102A Front Cover Assembly FC200076 with Two Labels, Apply the Appropriate Label 1 - 1

103 Right Side Cover FC307422 Cover only 1 - 1

103A Right Side Cover Assembly FC200074 with bumper - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 - 1

103B Right Side Cover Assembly FC200422with bumper and GE Logo. If ordering to replace

non-logo cover, also order FC200421 and replace set

1 - 1

104 Left Side Cover FC307773 Cover only 1 - 1

104A Left Side Cover Assembly FC200073 with bumper - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 - 1

104B Left Side Cover Assembly FC200421with bumper and GE Logo. If ordered to replace

non-logo cover, also order FC200422 and replace set

1 - 1

105 Rear Cover FC307776 Cover only 1 - 1

105A Rear Cover Assembly FC200077 with bumper - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 - 1

106 Rear Filter Cover FB200385 with brackets - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 - 1

107 Footrest Bumper FB307387 1 - 1

108 Color Printer Cavity Filler Insert FB307990 Replaced with FC307785 1 - N

108A Color Printer Cavity Filler Insert FC307785 Replaces FB307990 1 - 1

109 B/W Printer Cavity Filler Insert FB307989 Replaced with FC307784 1 - N

109A B/W Printer Cavity Filler Insert FC307784 Replaces FB307989 1 - 1

110 VCR Cavity Filler Insert FB307988 Replaced with FC307783 1 - N

110A VCR Cavity Filler Insert FC307783 Replaces FB307988 1 - 1

111 Filter Media FB307903 Dust Filter - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 Y 1


Chapter 9 9-7

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

Section 9-5Additional Console Hardware

Figure 9-3 Additional Console Hardware

142143144

145

146

147

148

149 150

151

145A

150A

141

151A 152

148A

149A147A150B

142A


9-8 Section 9-5 - Additional Console Hardware

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

Section 9-5 Additional Console Hardware (cont’d)

Table 9-5 Additional Console Hardware


141 Caster Hub Caps 2293008-5 Need to order 2 per caster, adhesive mounting 1 - 1

142 Rear Casters (wheels) 2293008-3

Does Not Have Pedal Activated Swivel Lock Assembly. Manual Swivel Lock

- Same as Vivid 7 -Also order FC200829

2 - 1

142A Rear Caster Replacement Tool FC200829Wooden wedge and bevel edge board

rear caster replacement tools 2 - 1

143 Front Casters (wheels) 2293008-2Includes Swivel Lock Assembly

- Same as Vivid 7 -2 - 1

144 Shelf Cover 2291452 1 - 1

145 TV/TR Probe Holder Front 2291455 1 - 1

145A TV/TR Probe Holder Rear 2299040 1 - 1

146 Pocket Shelf Mat 2291453 1 - 1

147 Under Shelf Cover 2291454 1 - 2

147A Under Shelf Cover 2291454-2 BT06 and later 1 - 2

148 Right Probe Holder Assembly 2299038 1 - 1

148A Right Probe Holder Assembly - DSB 5212181 BT07 and later with 19” LCD only - Dark Steel Blue 1 - 1

149 Left Probe Holder Assembly 2299039 1 - 1

149A Left Probe Holder Assembly - DSB 5212272 BT07 and later with 19” LCD only - Dark Steel Blue 1 - 1

150 Gel Warmer Assembly * see note 2291461 *Need to order GE Logo Decal 2269030-15 orL9 Logo Decal 5255441 1 - 1

150A GE Logo Decal for Gel Warmer 2269030-15 Must order when replacing Gel Warmer 1 - 1

150B L9 Logo Decal for Gel Warmer 5255441 Must order when replacing Gel Warmer 1 - 1

151 Gel Warmer Power Source 2329637 12VDC Power Source - Obsolete (See FMI 70183) 1 - N

151A Gel Warmer Power Source 2329637-3 6VDC Power Source (BT’06 and earlier) 1 - 1

152 Gel Warmer and Subwoofer Power Supply

5133204-6 Dual Out Power Supply & Gel Warmer (BT’06 and later) 1 - 1


Chapter 9 9-9

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

Section 9-6Operator I/O Mechanical Parts

Figure 9-4 OP I/O Mechanical Parts

170

171172

173

175

176177

179

180

181

182

183

184

185

175A

182A

183A

178


9-10 Section 9-6 - Operator I/O Mechanical Parts

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

Section 9-6 Operator I/O Mechanical Parts (cont’d)

Table 9-6 Operator I/O Mechanical Parts


170 Top Console Upper Casting Assembly

2331665 Assembly for Service 1 - 2

171 Top Console Lower Casting Assembly

2331858 Assembly for Service 1 - 2

172 Frogleg (complete) FB200340 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 - 2

173 Frogleg Bumper Kit FC200086goes on back/top half of Frogleg arms


175 Rear Handle Assembly FB200406 with cable wrap hooks - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 - 1

175A Rear Handle Assembly - DSB 5199876 BT07 and later with 19” LCD only - Dark Steel Blue 1 - 1

176 Brake Lock Pedal FB307407 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 - 1

177 Directional Lock Pedal FB307409 Swivel Lock Pedal 1 - 1

178 Upper Column Cover FC307787 Part of KitColumn Cover Kit FC200088

1 - 1

178 Lower Column Cover FC307779 1 - 1

179 Top Console Lock Assembly FB200350 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 - 2

180 Lock Release FB200920 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 - 2

181 X-Y Release Handle FB307297 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 - 2

182 Z-Release Handle FB307296 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 - 2

182A Z-Release Handle - DSB 5213108 BT07 and later with 19” LCD only - Dark Steel Blue 1 - 2

183 Main Handle with Label FC200131 Front Handle with Label in center 1 - 1

183A Main Handle - DSB 5213255 BT07 and later with 19” LCD only - Dark Steel Blue 1 - 1

184 Pedal Assembly FB200595 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 - 1

185 Wire Cable, Gas Spring FB307375 Wire used when operating vertical movement of Top Console - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 - 2

186 Frogleg Shim Kit 5116529

Needed on some models to keep the frogleg from rubbing on the operator console

Kit contains two .635 mm washers and one 1mm washer See Section 8-20 "Frog Leg Angle

Adjustment" on page 8-92

1 - 1

188 Subwoofer Speaker Assembly 5133204-2 1 - 1

189 Speaker Harness 5133204-3 1 - 1

190 Speaker Grill 5133204-4 1 - 1

191 Knob 5133204-5 1 - 1


Chapter 9 9-11

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

192 Brake mechanism - Left Connecting Rod

FB307471

- Same as Vivid 7 -threaded rod between front brake and caster.

Also order Parking Brake Pedal and Front Bumper screws as necessary

1 - 1

193 Brake mechanism - Right Connecting Rod

FB307472

- Same as Vivid 7 -threaded rod between front brake and caster

Also order Parking Brake Pedal and Front Bumper screws as necessary

1 - 1

194 Brake mechanism - Parking Brake Pedal screws

080X0612 - Same as Vivid 7 - Brake mechanism 1 - 1

195 Brake mechanism - Front Bumper screws

080X0612 - Same as Vivid 7 - Brake mechanism - 1 - 1

Table 9-6 Operator I/O Mechanical Parts (Continued)



9-12 Section 9-6 - Operator I/O Mechanical Parts

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

9-6-1 Bumper Kit, Frogleg

Figure 9-5 Bumper Kit, Frogleg, Base Seen From Above

Table 9-7 Bumper Kit, Frogleg FC200086


1 BUMPER CRASH PAD - Bumper Crash Rear 1 - N

2 BUMPER INNER BOSS - - 1 - N

3 BUMPER RIGHT FROGLEG - - 1 - N

4 BUMPER LEFT FROGLEG - - 1 - N

5 BUMPER INNER BOSS CRASH - - 2 - N

1

2

3

4

5


Chapter 9 9-13

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

Section 9-7Operator Control Panel Brackets

Figure 9-6 Operator Panel Brackets

Table 9-8 Operator Panel Brackets


190 Storage Tray Bracket 2306018 1 - 2

191 Upper Casting Bracket 2291449 1 - 2

192 “U” Bracket 2330476 ‘U’ Shaped Bracket, Nut is Attached to Casting 1 - 2

193 TV/TR Front Bracket 2306021 1 - 2

194 Bulkhead Bracket 2305886Does Not Include s

Through BT03 with SVGA Style1 - 2

194A Bulkhead Bracket 5119174 BT04 with DVI Style 1 - 1

190

191

192

193

194

Bracket on units built before Mid-2002. Replaced by Item # 192.

194A


9-14 Section 9-8 - Gas Spring

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

Section 9-8Gas Spring

WARNINGWARNING WHEN THE TOP CONSOLE IS IN ITS LOCKED POSITION, THE GAS SPRING IS COMPRESSED AND STORES MECHANICAL ENERGY. DURING NORMAL OPERATION THE TOP CONSOLE, THE WEIGHT OF THE MONITOR AND THE MECHANICAL FORCE OF THE GAS SPRING ARE IN BALANCE. TAKE CARE IF/WHEN YOU ACTIVATE THIS GAS SPRING. PERSONAL INJURY CAN OCCUR AFTER THE PANEL IS REMOVED AND THE SPRING PRESSURE IS RELEASED. TAKE CARE WHEN YOU REPAIR THE ELEVATION ASSEMBLY.

Figure 9-7 Gas Spring

Table 9-9 Gas Spring


1 Gas Spring 080X4500

- Same as Vivid 7- BT’04 and earlier

NOTE: BT01/02/03 consoles may have been factory-upgraded to LCD. In this case, use part

5160374.

1 - 1

1A Gas Spring (BT’06) 5160374

For CRT or LCD, BT’06 and laterNOTE: BT01/02/03 consoles may have been

factory-upgraded to LCD. In this case, use part 5160374.

1 - 1

1

2

3

4

1A


Chapter 9 9-15

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

2 Socket, Wire Cross Spring FB307376 Socket for Gas Spring release cable 1 - 1

3 Spring for Release Wire 080X4010 1 - 1

4 Nipple Screws 080X4530 1 - 1

Table 9-9 Gas Spring (Continued)



9-16 Section 9-9 - Monitor Assembly

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

Section 9-9Monitor Assembly

9-9-1 CRT Monitor Assembly

Figure 9-8 Monitor Assembly - Standard

Table 9-10 Monitor Assembly - Standard


251 Open Frame Monitor 2283334-4 - Same as Vivid 7 & LOGIQ 7- 1 - 1

252 Monitor Cable Assembly 2304171- Same as Vivid 7 & LOGIQ 7-see Callout 545 on page 9-44

1 - 2

253 Speaker and Mounting Bracket Kit 2297882 2 - 2

254 Monitor Tilt/Swivel/Male Post 2284225 Neck Assembly 1 - 2

255 Monitor Rear Cover Assembly 2303930 Assembly with Speaker Grills 1 - 2

256 Monitor Left Speaker Grill 2279675 Labeled as the LEFT Speaker Grill 1 - 2

257 Monitor Right Speaker Grill 2279676 Labeled as the RIGHT Speaker Grill 1 - 2

258 Monitor Screw Caps (covers) 2303932 Covers the screws on each side in the back of the cover - Same as Vivid 7 & LOGIQ 7- 2 - 2

259 Monitor Front Bezel Assembly 2303929-2 Includes three logos Vivid 7, LOGIQ 7 and LOGIQ 9 1 - 2

260 Monitor Switch Assembly 2297050 User Switch Assembly 1 - 2

251

253

254

255

256

257

258

259

260

252


Chapter 9 9-17

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

9-9-2 Monitor Assembly - 17” LCD

Figure 9-9 Monitor Assembly - LCD 17”

Table 9-11 Monitor Assembly - 17” LCD


261 17 inch LCD Flat Panel Display 5125393 Going obsolete. If unavailable, use 5169935-2 1 - 1

261A 17 inch LCD Flat Panel Display 5169935-2 1 - 1

262 17 inch Speaker Set 5132576 1 - 1

263 17 inch Panel Front LCD 5132572 1 - 1

264 17 inch Panel Rear LCD 5132573 1 - 1

265 17 inch Rear Cover VESA LCD 5166624 BT06 and later 1 - 1

266 17 inch Mic & Switch Assembly LCD 5137744 1 - 1

267 17 inch LCD ARM 5130651 17 “ LCD Arm Assembly with (4) cables 1 - 1

268 17 inch LCD Arm Gas Spring 5224462 1 - 1

269 LCD Video Card 5111298 Matrox card - If no longer available, order 5111298-2 1 - 1

269A LCD Video Card 5111298-2 Matrox card 1 - 1

270 17 inch LCD Cables (4) 5135957 1 - 1

271 17 inch Spiral Wrap - 1/2” 5152397 1/2” - Power and DVI HDMI cables 1 - 1

272 17 inch Spiral Wrap - 3/8” 5152399 3/8” - Speaker and Ground cables 1 - 1

273 17 inch LCD Adapter 5135957-6 HDMI to DVI-I adapter 1 - 1

263 264 265

266

267

262

272

261 261A

269

269A

270

271

268


9-18 Section 9-9 - Monitor Assembly

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

9-9-3 Monitor Assembly - 19” LCD

Figure 9-10 Monitor Assembly - 19” LCD

Table 9-12 Monitor Assembly - 19” LCD


276 19 inch LCD Monitor 521280819” LCD Monitor,

also order (1) 46-208758P1 ty wrap and (1) 46-208747P1 ty wrap mount

1 - 1

277 19 inch LCD Rear Cover 5199018 Rear Cover 1 - 1

277A 19 inch LCD Rear Cover Screw 46-312358P36 Screw for Rear Cover 1 - 1

278 Adaptor Power Supply Assy 5212977 Power Supply, Ty wraps 1 - 1

279 19 inch LCD Speaker Assy 5199460 19” LCD Speaker Assembly 1 - 1

280 19 inch LCD ARM 5212677 19” LCD Arm Assembly 1 - 1

281 19 inch LCD Mic Adaptor Cable 5198235-2 Microphone Cable crosses up to 5256603 1 - 1

281A 19 inch LCD Mic Adaptor Cable 5256603 Microphone Cable, alternate to 5198235-2 1 - 1

282 19 inch LCD Video Cable 5214911 Video Cable, also order (2) 46-208758P1 ty wraps,crosses up to 5256600 1 - 1

276 277

277A

278

279

280

281

281A

282

282

283

283A

283B

284

284A

285

286 286A287

288


Chapter 9 9-19

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

282A 19 inch LCD Video Cable 5256600 Video Cable, also order (2) 46-208758P1 ty wraps, alternate to 5214911 1 - 1

283 19 inch LCD DC Power 5212254 DC Power Cable, also order (1) 46-208758P1 ty wrap,crosses up to 5256601 and 5256601-1 1 - 1

283A 19 inch LCD DC Power 5256601 DC Power Cable, alternate to 5212254, obsolete, use 5256601-1 1 - 1

283B 19 inch LCD DC Power 5256601-1 DC Power Cable, alternate to 5212254 1 - 1

284 19 inch LCD Speaker Cable 5198216 Speaker Cable, crosses up to 5256602 1 - 1

284A 19 inch LCD Speaker Cable 5256602 Speaker Cable, alternate to 5198216 1 - 1

285 19 inch LCD Arm Adaptor Assy 5220151 Arm Adaptor Assy - Bushing and Screw 1 - 1

286 19 inch LCD AC Power Cable 5198490 Power Cable AC, crosses up to 5256605 1 - 1

286A 19 inch LCD AC Power Cable 5256605 Power Cable AC, alternate to 5198490 1 - 1

287 19 inch Subwoofer Ground Reference Cable

5234477 Adapter between subwoofer/gel warmer PS and gel warmer 1 - 1

288 19 inch LCD AC Power Cable 5256605-2 LCD power cable (longer) used on BT01, BT02, BT03 LCD factory upgrades 1 - 1

Table 9-12 Monitor Assembly - 19” LCD (Continued)



9-20 Section 9-10 - Operator Control Panel Assembly

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

Section 9-10Operator Control Panel Assembly

9-10-1 Upper Op Panel

Figure 9-11 Operator Control Panel Assembly (Op I/O) - Upper

Table 9-13 Console/Operator Panel Compatibility Matrix

ConsoleType

FRU

BT01/02/03- OR -

BT01/02/03 console upgraded toBT07 and Later BEP 4.1

BT04/06/07BEP 3.x

Forward ProductionBT07/BT09 CRU

Upper Operator Panel Assembly

2188902-3 (obsolete)2188902-13 (obsolete)

2188902-33

2404652-3 (obsolete)2404652-13

2404652 -103 -

Lower Operator Panel Assembly 2188902-xx 2404652-xx -

LCD Backlight Inverter2188902-6 (obsolete)

2188902-162404652-6 -

TGC (Slide Pot) PWA 2188902-7 2404652-7 -

Bezel - Upper Op Panel 2188902-15 -

Slide Pot Knobs 5115063 Y

Inside Touch Panel Assembly

201 201A 201B

202

203 203A

204

205

202A 202B

201D201C 201E


Chapter 9 9-21

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

Section 9-10 Operator Control Panel Assembly (cont’d)

Table 9-14 Operator Control Panel Assembly - Upper


201 Upper Operator Panel Assembly 2188902-3 Obsolete - use 2188902-13 1 - N

201A Upper Operator Panel Assembly 2188902-13has USB port A

Use 2188902-33 (when 2188902-13 no longer available)1 - 1

201B Upper Operator Panel Assembly 2188902-33has USB port - new style spacer between bezel &

touchpanelReplaces 2188902-13

1 - 1

201C Upper Operator Panel Assembly 2404652-3BT04 Only - with simplified cable interface.

If unavailable, use 2404652-13. Must be used with lower op panel 2404652-2

1 - 1

201D Upper Operator Panel Assembly 2404652-13BT04 and later consoles

Must be used with BEP4.1 (LVDS) or BEP 3.xMust be used with lower op panel 2404652-2

1 - 1

201E Upper Operator Panel Assembly 2404652-103 Must use with BEP4.0 (DVI)Must be used with lower op panel 2404652-xx 1 - 1

202 LCD Backlight Inverter 2188902-6Use with 2188902-3 or -13

When depleted, use 2188902-161 - 1

202A LCD Backlight Inverter 2404652-6 BT04 and later - Use with 2404652-3 or 2404652-13Cannot be used with 2188902 series op panels 1 - 1

202B LCD Backlight Inverter 2188902-16 Backward compatible with 2188902-6 1 - 1

203 TGC (Slide Pot) PWA 2188902-7 Circuit board slide pot - For use with Upper Op Panel 2188902-3 or 2188902-13 1 - 1

203A TGC (Slide Pot) PWA 2404652-7 Circuit board slide pot - Use w/Upper Op Panel 2404652-3 or -13 1 - 1

204 Bezel - Upper Operator Panel 2188902-15 1 - 1

205 Slide Pot Knobs 5115063 Group of ten knobs on TGC PWA 1 - 1



1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

9-10-2 Lower Operator Panel

Figure 9-12 Operator Control Panel Assembly (Op I/O) - Lower

Table 9-15 Operator Control Panel Assembly - Lower


211 Lower Operator Panel Assembly 2188902-2 - Obsolete - use 2188902-32 1 - N

211A Lower Operator Panel Assembly 2188902-12With Standby. Backward compatible.

R3.X.X Software and above MUST USE this part.When depleted, use 2188902-32.

1 - N

211B Lower Operator Panel Assembly 2188902-32 BT03 lower op panel with 4D markings on buttons 1 - 1

211C Lower Operator Panel Assembly 2404652-2

BT’04 with simplified cable interfaceCan only be used with upper op panel 2404652-xx

(May also need A/N Keyboard 2404652-4 if Upper Op Panel is Rev1)

When depleted, use 2404652-32.

1 - 1

211D Lower Operator Panel Assembly 2404652-12

Includes new BT07 and later F5 and F6 keytopsCan only be used with upper op panel

2404652-1xx(May also need A/N Keyboard 2404652-14

if Upper Op Panel is Rev1)When depleted, use 2404652-32

1 - 1

211E Lower Operator Panel Assembly 2404652-32

Lower OP Panel Assembly BT07 and later. Includes 2404652-15 trackball.

Backward compatible with 2404652-12, -2Must be used with upper op panel:

2404652-3, -13, or -103May be used with BEP 3.x, BEP 4.0 or BEP 4.1

1 - 1

212 A/N Keyboard - English 2188902-4Alpha Numeric Keyboard

R3.X.X Software MUST USE 2188902-14Obsolete - use 2188902-14

1 - N

212A A/N Analog Keyboard - English 2188902-14

With Standby. Backward compatible. R3.X.X Software MUST USE this part

When depleted, use 2404652-4 or 2404652-14.Do NOT use 2188902-14 in 2404652-x op panel.

1 - N

211A

211C

213A

214A

215

216

217

212C

213B

215A222A

214

213

222 223

214B

223A

212B212A212

211B

211

211D 211E

215B

224

225


Chapter 9 9-23

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

212B A/N Analog Keyboard - English 2404652-4BT04 and BT06 improved back lighting

When depleted, use 2404652-14. Backward compatible with 2188902-x op panel.

1 - 1

212C A/N Analog Keyboard - English 2404652-14 Includes new BT07 and later F5 and F6 keytop.Backward compatible with 2188902-x op panel. 1 - 1

213 A/N Keyboard - Russian 2188902-20 As required 1 - 1

213A A/N Keyboard - Russian 2404652-20BT04 and BT06 improved back lighting

When depleted, use 2404652-50.1 - 1

213B A/N Keyboard - Russian 2404652-50 Includes new BT07and later F5 and F6 keytops 1 - 1

214 A/N Keyboard - Greek 2188902-21 As required 1 - 1

214A A/N Keyboard - Greek 2404652-21BT’04 and BT06 improved back lighting

When depleted, use 2404652-51.1 - 1

214B A/N Keyboard - Greek 2404652-51 Includes new BT07and later F5 and F6 keytops 1 - 1

215 Trackball 2188902-5 When depleted, use 2404652-15. 1 - 1

215A Trackball Assembly 2404652-5 When depleted, use 2404652-15. 1 - 1

215B Trackball Assembly 2404652-15 Backward compatible with 2404652-5, 2188902-5 1 - 1

216 4D Probe Holder 5111708 1 Y 1

217 Bezel - Lower Operator Panel 2188902-11 1 - 1

222 A/N Keyboard - Swedish 2404652-22 Use 2404652-52 (when 2404652-22 stock is depleted) 1 - 1

222A A/N Keyboard - Swedish 2404652-52 Includes new BT07 and later F5 and F6 keytops 1 - 1

223 A/N Keyboard - Norwegian 2404652-26 Use 2404652-56 (when 2404652-26 stock is depleted) 1 - 1

223A A/N Keyboard - Norwegian 2404652-56 Includes new BT07 and later F5 and F6 keytops 1 - 1

224 Single Shaft Encoder 066E2306 Replacement part for all lower op panels: e.g. 2188902-32, 2404652-2, 2404652-12 1 - 1

225 Concentric Shaft Encoder 2404652-19 Replacement part for all lower op panels: e.g. 2188902-32, 2404652-2, 2404652-12 1 - 1

Table 9-15 Operator Control Panel Assembly - Lower (Continued)




1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

9-10-3 Lower Op Panel - Buttons and Knobs

Figure 9-13 Operator Control Panel Assembly (Op I/O) - Lower

218 218A

219

219A

221

220

222


Chapter 9 9-25

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

9-10-3 Lower Op Panel - Buttons and Knobs (cont’d)

Table 9-16 Operator Control Panel Assembly - Lower - Buttons and Knobs


218 Universal Knob Kit 2384216 Obsolete - order 5114700 1 - N

218A Universal Knob Kit 5114700

All blue gumdrop knobs - Replaces 2384216This Kit contained; 4 small domed knobs, 4 large

dished knobs, 6 large domed knobssame as Vivid 7

1 Y 1

219 Programmable Button Keytop Kit

2188902-9 Key caps for customer to customize the P1 - P4 key caps 1 Y 1

219A Button Cap Kit 2188902-10 Includes all buttons (except thumb buttons) 1 Y 1

220 Key Ring and Operator Panel Mode select Knob Kit

2188902-8 Includes: 4 Mode select knobs (Inner & Outer pieces) and Key Ring 1 - N

221 Mode Select Knob Kit with 3D/4D Button with XYZ markings

2404652-8 Four Mode Select Knobs (M, PW, CF, B) and 3D/4D Grey Bowl Button 1 Y 1

222 F5 and F6 A/N keytops 2404652-9 F5 and F6 A/N keytops, along with key puller 1 Y 1


9-26 Section 9-11 - Front End Processor Assembly

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

Section 9-11Front End Processor Assembly

Figure 9-14 Front End Processor Assembly

410

Empty Card Slot

BT’01 Card Rack

BT’02, BTCard Rack

401

402 402A

402B 402C 402D

411411411411411411 411F

403404

405 405A

405B

406

406A

406B

406C

407

408

408A

409

409A 409C

409D

409E

409G

through

402E

409B

414

409F

413412

405C

405D

409H

410A


Chapter 9 9-27

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

Section 9-11 Front End Processor Assembly (cont’d)

Table 9-17 Front End Processor Assembly

Applications Software R2.X.X R3.X.X R4.X.X R6.X.X R7.X.X/R9.X.X

LOGIQ 9Model Number

2188

900-

X (B

T’01

)

2351

100-

X (B

T’02

)

2375

600-

X (B

T’03

)

2188

900-

X (B

T01

- BT’

03 u

pgra

de)

2351

100-

X (B

T02

- BT’

03 u

pgra

de)

2404

587-

X (B

T04)

2188

900-

X (B

T01

- BT0

4 up

grad

e)

2351

100-

X (B

T02

- BT0

4 up

grad

e)

2375

600-

X (B

T03

- BT0

4 up

grad

e)

5150

000-

x (B

T06)

5143

928

(BT0

3 - B

T06

upgr

ade)

5143

923

(BT0

4 - B

T06

upgr

ade)

5177

000-

x (B

T07/

BT0

9)

H49

06H

W /

H49

06H

Y(F

OB

) (B

T02

- BT0

7/09

upg

rade

)

5176

631

(BT0

3 - B

T07/

09 u

pgra

de)

5177

411

(BT0

4 - B

T07/

09 u

pgra

de)

5177

466

(BT0

6 - B

T07/

09 u

pgra

de)

ItemPart

NamePart

Number Description

Qty

CRU

FRU

401 Back Plane 2260219 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Front End Back Plane 1 - 2

402 SCB1 2260214-2 XScan Control Board. Use 2260214-3 if stock is depleted

1 - 1

402A SCB1.1 2260214-3 X1 X Scan Control Board - Required if using EBM Board

1 - 1

402B SCB2 2365739 X X X Has BT03 Functionality - Obsolete

1 - N

402C SCB2 2365739-3 X X X X X X Included power up transmit overload fix - Obsolete

1 - N

402D SCB2-4 2365739-4 X X X X X X X Additional transmit overload fix during run time - Obsolete

1 - N

402E SCB2-5 2365739-5 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Supervisory Circuit and 4D Reset Updates.

1 - 1

403 BMP4 2260207 X B-Mode Processor 1 - 1

404 EQ4 2260210 X Equalization Board 1 - 1

405 TD4 2260194-2 X X X X X X XTransmit/Delay Board. When stock depleted order 2260194-3

1 - 1

405A TD4.1 2260194-3 X X X X X X XTransmit/Delay BoardYou can mix TD4s and TD4.1s

1 - 1

405B TD5 2362863 X X X X X X X

New power requirements different from TD4. Can not mix with TD4s. Requires FEPS3You can mix TD5s and TD5.1sWhen stock depleted order 2386031

1 - 1



1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

405C TD5.1 2386031 X X X X X X XSame Function as TD5 but larger and fewer ASICs. You can mix TD5s and TD5.1s

1 - 1

405D TD6 5142651 X X X Not Backward Compatible -- Used with R6.0.0 and later.

1 - 1

406 RF AMP 2260212 X X XRadio Frequency Amplifier BoardObsolete - Use 2341985-2

1 - N

406A RF AMP1.2 2341985-2 X X X X X X X Design Improvement 1 - 1

406B RF AMP2 2357621 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4

New power requirement different from RF AMP1.X Requires FEPS3Must only use 5115468 T Plane Use 2357621-2 if stock depleted

1 - 1

406C RF AMP2-2 2357621-2 X X X X X X X X X X

Same as RF Amp 2-2 except has schottky diodes Must use 2291656 Top Plane

1 - 1

407 XDIF 2260221 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Transducer Interface Board 1 - 1

408 Top Plane 2291656 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4Top Plane connects XDIF to RF Amp on front of cards. No schotky diodes

1 - 1

408A Top Plane 5115468 X X X X X X Has schottky diodes 1 - 1

409 FEPS 2260203 X3

Front End Power Supply - Obsolete -When replaced with 2273641-3 or 2273641-4, requires replacement of the Front End Card Rack Cover in Kit 2374426

1 - N

Table 9-17 Front End Processor Assembly (Continued)


LOGIQ 9Model Number

2188

900-

X (B

T’01

)

2351

100-

X (B

T’02

)

2375

600-

X (B

T’03

)

2188

900-

X (B

T01

- BT’

03 u

pgra

de)

2351

100-

X (B

T02

- BT’

03 u

pgra

de)

2404

587-

X (B

T04)

2188

900-

X (B

T01

- BT0

4 up

grad

e)

2351

100-

X (B

T02

- BT0

4 up

grad

e)

2375

600-

X (B

T03

- BT0

4 up

grad

e)

5150

000-

x (B

T06)

5143

928

(BT0

3 - B

T06

upgr

ade)

5143

923

(BT0

4 - B

T06

upgr

ade)

5177

000-

x (B

T07/

BT0

9)

H49

06H

W /

H49

06H

Y(F

OB

) (B

T02

- BT0

7/09

upg

rade

)

5176

631

(BT0

3 - B

T07/

09 u

pgra

de)

5177

411

(BT0

4 - B

T07/

09 u

pgra

de)

5177

466

(BT0

6 - B

T07/

09 u

pgra

de)

ItemPart

NamePart

Number Description

Qty

CRU

FRU


Chapter 9 9-29

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

409A FEPS2 2273641-3 X3 X X X X X X

Second Generation FEPSCross to a FEPS2.1 if stock is depletedMay require Front End Card Rack cover kit 2374426 if replacing a 2260203 FEPS

1 - 1

409B FEPS2.1 2273641-4 X3 X X X X X XSecond Generation with Standby Capabilities cross up to -6

1 - 1

409C FEPS2.5 2273641-5 X3 X X X X X X partial latch fix (all but -5 V analog)

1 - 1

409D FEPS2.6 2273641-6 X3 X X X X X X

Replaces FEPS2 (2273641-3) and FEPS2.1 (2273641-4)Only applies to TD4 systems

1 - 1

409E FEPS3 2376843 X X X X X X X

Analog Voltages are +/- 6V and 13V compared to +/-5v and 12V found in FEPS, FEPS2 and FEPS2.1Must use in systems w/ TD5.X and RF Amp2 (DO NOT use in R2.X.X systems or Systems upgraded to BT’03)Transmit overload fix (2376843-6): Replaces 237643 and 2376843-3, FMI 70188.2376843-92 replaces 2376843-2 (for BT03 systems with TD5.x boards)

1 - N

409F FEPS3.2 2376843-2 X X X X X X X X X Partial latch fix (all but -6 V analog)

1 - N

409G FEPS3.3 2376843-3 X X X X X X X X X X Replaces 2376843 and 2376843-2

1 - 1



LOGIQ 9Model Number

2188

900-

X (B

T’01

)

2351

100-

X (B

T’02

)

2375

600-

X (B

T’03

)

2188

900-

X (B

T01

- BT’

03 u

pgra

de)

2351

100-

X (B

T02

- BT’

03 u

pgra

de)

2404

587-

X (B

T04)

2188

900-

X (B

T01

- BT0

4 up

grad

e)

2351

100-

X (B

T02

- BT0

4 up

grad

e)

2375

600-

X (B

T03

- BT0

4 up

grad

e)

5150

000-

x (B

T06)

5143

928

(BT0

3 - B

T06

upgr

ade)

5143

923

(BT0

4 - B

T06

upgr

ade)

5177

000-

x (B

T07/

BT0

9)

H49

06H

W /

H49

06H

Y(F

OB

) (B

T02

- BT0

7/09

upg

rade

)

5176

631

(BT0

3 - B

T07/

09 u

pgra

de)

5177

411

(BT0

4 - B

T07/

09 u

pgra

de)

5177

466

(BT0

6 - B

T07/

09 u

pgra

de)

ItemPart

NamePart

Number Description

Qty

CRU

FRU



1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

409H FEPS3.6 2376843-6 X X X X X X X X X X Replaces FEPS3 to eliminate transmit overload.

1 - 1

410FEP AC Line Filter & Cable

2315960 X X X X X X

Attached to side of FEP Card Rack, Includes Line Filter and Power HarnessObsolete, use 2375555 except for BT01

1 - 1

410A FEP AC Line Filter

2375555 X X X X X X* X X XBackward compatible for BT07 and earlier,*except for BT01 systems.

1 - 1

411 EBM 2273639-3 X2 X

Combined functions of EQ4 & BMP4. Positioned in the old EQ4 Slot. Needs SCB 2260214-3Obsolete - replace with 2273639-6

1 - N

411A EBM 2273639-6 X X I2C Reliability Improvements 1 - 1

411B EBM1.8 2273639-5 X X XEBM Board Upgraded to EBM2 functionality - Replace with EBM2, 2273639-21

1 - N

411C EBM2 2273639-20 X X XHas BT03 Functionality -obsolete - Replace with 2273639-21

1 - N

411D EBM2 2273639-21 X X X Has BT’03 Functionality - I2C Reliability Improvements

1 - 1

411E EBM2.5 2273639-23 X X X X

Has BT’04 Functionality 4D Option requires 2273639-24Obsolete - replace with 2273639-24

1 - N

411F EBM2.6 2273639-24 X X X X X X X X X X X X Has BT’04 Functionality Required for 4D Option

1 - 1



LOGIQ 9Model Number

2188

900-

X (B

T’01

)

2351

100-

X (B

T’02

)

2375

600-

X (B

T’03

)

2188

900-

X (B

T01

- BT’

03 u

pgra

de)

2351

100-

X (B

T02

- BT’

03 u

pgra

de)

2404

587-

X (B

T04)

2188

900-

X (B

T01

- BT0

4 up

grad

e)

2351

100-

X (B

T02

- BT0

4 up

grad

e)

2375

600-

X (B

T03

- BT0

4 up

grad

e)

5150

000-

x (B

T06)

5143

928

(BT0

3 - B

T06

upgr

ade)

5143

923

(BT0

4 - B

T06

upgr

ade)

5177

000-

x (B

T07/

BT0

9)

H49

06H

W /

H49

06H

Y(F

OB

) (B

T02

- BT0

7/09

upg

rade

)

5176

631

(BT0

3 - B

T07/

09 u

pgra

de)

5177

411

(BT0

4 - B

T07/

09 u

pgra

de)

5177

466

(BT0

6 - B

T07/

09 u

pgra

de)

ItemPart

NamePart

Number Description

Qty

CRU

FRU


Chapter 9 9-31

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

1 SCB1 can be used on this model number also.2 EBM can be used on this model replacing the BMP4 and EQ4. However EBM requires SCB1.1 at a minimum.3 FEPS2 and FEPS2.1 can be used on this model number. However, must also use FEP Card Rack Cover Kit 2374426.4 Combination of Top Plane and RF AMP must have at least one schotky diode. Therefore, never use 2357621 and

2291656 together.

412FEP Card Cage Front Cover Kit

2374426 X X X X X X X X X Obsolete, use 5159491 1 - N

413FEP Card Cage Front Cover Kit

5159491 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

Required if upgrading from FEPS to FEPS2/FEP2.1Additional shielding around Top Plane and Power Supply areas. Labels included in kit to match FEP configuration.Corrects barber pole artifact.

1 - 1

414 Card Cage 2373269 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Cover with power supply shield

1 - 1



LOGIQ 9Model Number

2188

900-

X (B

T’01

)

2351

100-

X (B

T’02

)

2375

600-

X (B

T’03

)

2188

900-

X (B

T01

- BT’

03 u

pgra

de)

2351

100-

X (B

T02

- BT’

03 u

pgra

de)

2404

587-

X (B

T04)

2188

900-

X (B

T01

- BT0

4 up

grad

e)

2351

100-

X (B

T02

- BT0

4 up

grad

e)

2375

600-

X (B

T03

- BT0

4 up

grad

e)

5150

000-

x (B

T06)

5143

928

(BT0

3 - B

T06

upgr

ade)

5143

923

(BT0

4 - B

T06

upgr

ade)

5177

000-

x (B

T07/

BT0

9)

H49

06H

W /

H49

06H

Y(F

OB

) (B

T02

- BT0

7/09

upg

rade

)

5176

631

(BT0

3 - B

T07/

09 u

pgra

de)

5177

411

(BT0

4 - B

T07/

09 u

pgra

de)

5177

466

(BT0

6 - B

T07/

09 u

pgra

de)

ItemPart

NamePart

Number Description

Qty

CRU

FRU


9-32 Section 9-12 - I/O Interfaces

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

Section 9-12I/O Interfaces

Figure 9-15 I/O Interfaces

USB MODEM OPTION

w/ Modem

MODEM

INTERNAL

I/0

C18

BEP

w/ Modem

Connects to

Phone Line

301

302 302A

302B 302C

304303A

303

302D 302E


Chapter 9 9-33

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

Section 9-12 I/O Interfaces (cont’d)

Table 9-18 I/O Interfaces


301 External I/O Assembly FB200198 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 - 1

302 Internal I/O Assembly FB200197- Same as Vivid 7 -

Obsolete - Use FC2004231 - N

302A Internal I/O Assembly FC200423

- Same as Vivid 7 -Has gain increase for improved microphone performance

Used on BT03 and earlierObsolete - Use FC200695

1 - N

302B Internal I/O Assembly FC200695 Replaces FC200423 1 - 1

302C Internal IO W/Gender change FC200503

BT04 Only - Has male connector for II/O to BEP cable- Same as Vivid 7 -

Obsolete - Use FC200889

1 - N

302D Internal IO W/Gender change FC200651 Obsolete - Use FC200889 1 - N

302E Internal IO W/Gender change FC200889 BT04 systems and later - replaces FC200503 and FC200651 1 - 1

303 Global Modem Assembly 2245794 Multi-Tech - New installation requires cable kit #2368850 -Same as Vivid 7 - 1 - 1

303A USB Global Modem Kit 5112680Includes modem 5114058, and Telco Adapter Kit

2249450Used with BEP3 only

1 - 1

304 USB Modem 5114058 Includes USB Modem, USB Cable, and phone cablesUsed with BEP3 only 1 - 1


9-34 Section 9-13 - 3-D Externals

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

Section 9-133-D Externals

Figure 9-16 3-D Externals

Table 9-19 3-D Externals


470 3-D Externals - PCI Bird Transmitter 2301019-4 Option Kit 1 - 1

471 3-D Externals - PCI Bird Receiver 2301019-5 Option Kit 1 - 1

470 471


Chapter 9 9-35

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

Section 9-14Back End Processor Assemblies

9-14-1 BEP 1

Figure 9-17 BEP 1

Table 9-20 Back End Processor Assembly 1


450 Back End Processor (BEP1) 2266548-3 BEP1 - P3 Processor 1 - 1

451 Back End Processor (BEP1) w/ 3-D Option

2266548-4P3 Processor with 3-D “Flock of Birds” option

(PCI Bird Transmitter & Receiver NOT Included - See Table 9-19)

1 - 1

452 Back End Processor Power Supply

2348186-38 Version 2.3 For BEPs 1 & 2.X 1 - 1

453 BEP Battery Assembly 2266548-5Computer UPS Battery, located inside BEP Assy.

Expected battery life is 1 year-Same as Vivid 7 -

1 - 2

454 Hard Disk Drive (HDD) BEP 1 2366650 Will need to transfer mounting tray to new HDD 1 - 1

455 BIOS Blaster CD 2266548-27 BEP1 only 1 - 1

456 Battery, CMOS 2404028-7 Motherboard battery 1 - 1

BEP1 Repairable 2266548-13 BEP1 -

450 451

452

453454


9-36 Section 9-14 - Back End Processor Assemblies

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

9-14-2 BEP 2

Figure 9-18 BEP 2

Table 9-21 Back End Processor Assembly 2


460 Back End Processor (BEP2.0) 2348186-3 P4 Processor 1 - 1

460 Back End Processor (BEP 2.0) w/ 3-D Option

2348186-4, -74P4 Processor with 3-D “Flock of Birds” option installed

(PCI Bird Transmitter & Receiver NOT Included)1 - 1

460 Back End Processor (BEP2.1) 2348186-43, -73 BEP2.1 with 2.3 Power Supply 1 - 1

460 Back End Processor (BEP2.1) 2348186-44, -74 BEP2.1 “Flock of Birds” with 2.3 Power Supply 1 - 1

460 460A460A460A 460B 460C460C460C460C 460D460D460D460D460D460D

461

462

463

464

465

466 466A

467

469

460


Chapter 9 9-37

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

460A Back End Processor (BEP2.0.1) 2348186-67, -73 BEP2.0.1w/SB0220 Audio Card 1 - 1

460A Back End Processor (BEP2.0.1) 2348186-68, -74 BEB2.0.1 w/SB0220 Audio Card with FOB 1 - 1

460A Back End Processor (BEP2.0.1) 2348186-77, -73 BEB2.0.1 w/SB0107 Audio Card 1 - 1

460A Back End Processor (BEP2.0.1) 2348186-78, -74 BEB2.0.1 w/SB0107 Audio Card w/ FOB 1 - 1

460B Back End Processor (BEP2.1) 2348186-13 P4 Processor with Digital VIC Card 1 - 1

460C Back End Processor (BEP 2.1) w/ 3-D Option

2348186-14P4 Processor (Digital VIC Card)

with 3-D “Flock of Birds” option installed (PCI Bird Transmitter & Receiver NOT Included)

1 - 1

460C Back End Processor (BEP2.1) 2348186-53, -73 BEP2.1 with New Sound Card 1 - 1

460C Back End Processor (BEP2.1) 2348186-54 BEP2.1 “Flock of Birds” with New Sound Card 1 - 1

460C Back End Processor (BEP2.1) 2348186-57 BEP2.1 w/o Base Image 1 - 1

460C Back End Processor (BEP2.1) 2348186-58 BEP2.1 w/o Base Image w/ FOB 1 - 1

460D Back End Processor (BEP2.2) 2348186-63, -73With Version 2.3 Power Supply

Memory Upgrade to 768M1 - 1

460D Back End Processor (BEP 2.2) w/ 3-D Option

2348186-64With Version 2.3 Power Supply

Memory Upgrade to 768M1 - 1

460D Back End Processor (BEP2.2) 2348186-73 BEP2.2 Sound Card Change 1 - 1

460D Back End Processor (BEP 2.2) 2348186-74 BEP2.2 “Flock of Birds” Sound Card Change 1 - 1

460D Back End Processor (BEP2.2) 2348186-83 BEP2.2 PC2IP II Board 1 - 1

460D Back End Processor (BEP 2.2) 2348186-84 BEP2.2 “Flock of Birds” PC2IP II Board 1 - 1

461 Back End Processor Power Supply

2348186-38 Version 2.3 For BEPs 1 & 2.X 1 - 1

462 BEP Battery Assembly 2266548-5Computer UPS Battery, located inside BEP Assy.

Expected battery life is 1 year-Same as Vivid 7 -

1 - 2

463 Hard Disk Drive (HDD) BEP 2.x 2348186-31 Comes with bracket or mounting tray 1 - 1

464 Patient I/O Module 2348186-22 BEP 2.x Only -Same as Vivid 7 - 1 - 1

465 MOD Drive 2348186-23 BEP 2.0 Only - 1.3 Gigabyte IDE - 3.5 inch 1 - 1

466 CD-RW Drive 2348186-37BEP 2.x Only -Same as Vivid 7 -

Obsolete - Use 24040281 - N

466A CD-RW Drive 2348186-47 BEP 2.x Obsolete - Use 2404028 1 - N

467 Fan 2348186-35 Mounted on BEP Chassis Cover - BEP 2.x Only 1 - 1

468 BIOS Blaster CD 2348186-27 BEP2.x only 1 - 2

469 Battery, CMOS 2404028-7 Motherboard battery 1 - 1

Table 9-21 Back End Processor Assembly 2 (Continued)




1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

9-14-3 BEP 3.x / 4.x

Figure 9-19 BEP 3.x / 4.x

484

485

486

BEP4.x

BEP3.x

475

475A

475B

475C

475D

475E

475F

475G

476

477

477A

478 478A

478B

479

480

481 481A

482


Chapter 9 9-39

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

9-14-3BEP 3.x / 4.x (cont’d)

Table 9-22 Back End Processor Assembly 3.x / 4.x


475 BEP3.0, Non-”Flock of Birds”(new PC2IPIIB)

2404027-3(2404027-13)

Complete assembly 1 - 1

475A BEP3.0, with ”Flock of Birds”(new PC2IPIIB)

2404027-4(2404027-14)

Complete assembly 1 - 1

475B BEP 3.5 Non-”Flock of Birds” 2404027-53 Complete assembly 1 - 1

475C BEP 3.5 with ”Flock of Birds” 2404027-54 Complete assembly 1 - 1

475DBEP 4.0Non-”Flock of Birds”, (new PC2IP3)

5162777-3 Complete assembly 1 - 1

475EBEP 4.0 with ”Flock of Birds”, (new PC2IP3)


475FBEP 4.1Non-”Flock of Birds”, (new PC2IP3)


475GBEP 4.1 with ”Flock of Birds”, (new PC2IP3)


476 BEP 3.x/ 4.x Power Supply 2404028-4 Also compatible for BEP 4.x 1 - 1

477 PCI DGVIC Assembly 5112272 BEP 3.x only - with bulkhead board and ribbon cables 1 - 1

477A PCI DGVIC2 Assembly 5301220-2 BEP 4.x only - with bulkhead board and ribbon cables 1 - 1

478 PC2IPII card FC200312 If unavailable, use FC200656 1 - 1

478A PC2IPIIB card FC200656 BEP 3.x 1 - 1

478B PC2IP3 card 5197846 BEP 4.x only 1 - 1

479 Battery, BEP3.x / 4.x UPS 2404028-6 Set of 2 batteriesExpected battery life is 1 year 1 - 1

480 Hard Disk Drive (HDD) BEP 3.x / 4.x

2404028-2 Comes with bracket or mounting tray, and adaptor 1 - 1

481 CD/DVD Drive 2404028BEP 3 comes with bracket or mounting tray

(LG GSA-4167B replaces the Sony CD-RW Drive)Includes Patch disk for R2.x and R3.x

1 - 1

481A CD/DVD Drive 2404028-10 BT06 and later, BEP3.5 and later 1 - 1

482 Battery, CMOS 2404028-7 BEP3.x / BEP 4.x Motherboard battery 1 - 1

483 BEP3.x / 4.x Fan, Side Cover 2404028-5 Mounted on BEP Chassis Cover - BEP 3.x / BEP 4.x 1 - 1

484 MO Drive (External - stand alone)

2404028-3 For use with BEP 3 - BEP 3 does not have MO Drive 1 - 1

485 Intake Filter 2404028-8 BEP3.x / BEP 4.x 1 Y 1



1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

486 Cover, FIlter 2404028-9 BEP3.x / BEP 4.x 1 Y 1

487 BIOS Blaster CD 5111457 For BEP 3 motherboard reset(obsolete - replaced with 5111457-3) 1 - N

487A BIOS Blaster CD 5111457-3 For BEP 3.x motherboard reset 1 - 1

487B BIOS Blaster CD 5215511-1 For BEP 4.x motherboard reset 1 - 1

Table 9-22 Back End Processor Assembly 3.x / 4.x (Continued)



Chapter 9 9-41

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

Section 9-15Software

Tabl

e 9-

23

BEP

Bas

e Im

age

Load

Mat

rix -

BEP

1 a

nd 2

.x

App

licat

ion

Softw

are

L9

BEP

H

AR

DW

AR

E C

ON

FIG

UR

ATI

ON

BEP

122

6654

8 22

6654

8-2

2266

548-

322

6654

8-4

2266

548-

622

6654

8-10

2266

548-

1222

6654

8-13

2266

548-

1422

6654

8-16

BEP

2.0

2348

186-

323

4818

6-4

2348

186-

4323

4818

6-44

BEP

2.0.

1(P

rior t

o B

T03)

2348

186-

6723

4818

6-68

2348

186-

7723

4818

6-78

BEP

2.0.

1(F

or B

T03)

2348

186-

6723

4818

6-68

2348

186-

7723

4818

6-78

BEP

2.1

2348

186-

1323

4818

6-14

2348

186-

5323

4818

6-54

2348

186-

5723

4818

6-58

BEP

2.2

(Prio

r to

BT0

3)23

4818

6-63

2348

186-

6423

4818

6-73

2348

186-

74

BEP

2.2

(For

BT0

3)23

4818

6-63

2348

186-

6423

4818

6-73

2348

186-

7423

4818

6-83

2348

186-

84

BEP

2.2

(For

BT0

4)23

4818

6-63

2348

186-

6423

4818

6-73

2348

186-

7423

4818

6-83

2348

186-

84

R2.

4.0 (1

)23

5813

5-11

2371

612-

1323

7161

2-13

NA

2371

612-

1323

7161

2-13

NA

NA

R3.

0.12

(3)

NA

NA

NA

2371

612-

15N

AN

A23

7161

2-15

NA

R3.

1.1(3

)N

AN

AN

A23

7161

2-15

NA

NA

2371

612-

15N

A

R4.

1.3 (4

)N

AN

AN

AN

AN

AN

AN

A24

0402

4-7

Cur

rent

(2) B

ase

Imag

e Lo

ad

2358

135-

1123

7161

2-13

2371

612-

1323

7161

2-15

2371

612-

1323

7161

2-13

2371

612-

1524

0402

4-7


9-42 Section 9-15 - Software

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

Section 9-15 Software (cont’d)

(1) C

urre

nt R

2.X

App

licat

ion

Sof

twar

e =

R2.

4.0

(232

2686

-26)

.(2

) Bas

e Im

age

Load

s fo

r Res

pect

ive

BEP

are

Bac

kwar

ds c

ompa

tible

. (3

) Cur

rent

R3.

X A

pplic

atio

n S

oftw

are

= R

3.0.

11 (2

3226

86-6

4); R

3.0.

12 (2

3226

86-6

3); R

3.1.

0 O

bsol

ete.

See

FM

I 702

00. S

ee N

ote

(3);

R3.

1.1

Opt

iona

l FM

I 702

00.

(4) C

urre

nt R

4.X

App

licat

ion

Sof

twar

e =

R4.

1.3

(232

2686

-49)

.(5

) Cur

rent

R6.

X A

pplic

atio

n S

oftw

are

= R

6.0.

4 (2

3226

86-5

6), R

6.0.

5 (2

3226

86-5

7) R

6.0.

6 (2

3226

86-5

9) F

MI 7

0197

.(6

) Cur

rent

R7.

X A

pplic

atio

n S

oftw

are

= R

7.0.

2 (2

3226

86-6

2) ,

R7.

0.4

(232

2686

-66)

, an

d R

7.0.

5 (2

3226

86-6

7).

(7) C

urre

nt R

9.X

App

licat

ion

Sof

twar

e =

R9.

0.0

(232

2686

-70)

Not

e: S

ee F

MI C

losu

re S

ervi

ce N

ote

7044

3 fo

r inf

orm

atio

n on

late

requ

est p

lan.

To c

onfir

m y

ou h

ave

the

mos

t cur

rent

app

licat

ion

and

base

load

info

rmat

ion,

als

o se

e th

e la

test

revi

sion

of

SN

704

19 -

LOG

IQ 9

App

licat

ion/

Bas

eloa

d S

oftw

are

Mat

rix -

5245

411-

100.

Tabl

e 9-

24

BEP

Bas

e Im

age

Load

Mat

rix -

BEP

3.x

/4.x

App

licat

ion

Softw

are

L9

BEP

H

AR

DW

AR

E C

ON

FIG

UR

ATI

ON

BEP

324

0402

7-3

2404

027-

4

BEP

3.5

2404

027-

5324

0402

7-54

BEP

4.0

5162

777-

351

6277

7-4

BEP

4.1

5162

777-

751

6277

7-8

R2.

x.x(1

)N

AN

AN

AN

A

R3.

x.x(3

)N

AN

AN

AN

A

R4.

1.3(4

)24

0402

4-8

2404

024-

8N

AN

A

R6.

0.4(5

)N

A24

0402

4-50

NA

NA

R6.

0.5(5

)N

A24

0402

4-50

NA

NA

R6.

0.6(5

)N

A24

0402

4-50

NA

NA

R7.

0.2(6

)N

A51

3512

4-1

NA

NA

R7.

0.4(6

)N

A51

3512

4-1

NA

NA

R7.

0.5(6

)N

A51

3512

4-1

5135

124-

1051

3512

4-10

R9.

0.x(7

)N

A51

3512

4-3

5135

124-

1151

3512

4-11

Cur

rent

(2)

Bas

e Im

age

Load

R4.

1.3(4

)

R6.

0.6(5

)

R7.

0.5(6

)

R9.

x(7)

2404

024-

8N

AN

AN

A

NA

2404

024-

50 R

ev 7

5135

124-

151

3512

4-3

NA

NA

5135

124-

1051

3512

4-11

NA

NA

5135

124-

1051

3512

4-11


Chapter 9 9-43

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

Section 9-15 Software (cont’d)

Table 9-25 Software Tools


Database Defragmentation Toolkit

5184818 BT04 and later. Do not leave at customer site - Multi-site use. 1 - 1

HDD Partition Wipe Tool Kit 5329420See SN 70447

Do not leave at customer site - Multi-site use..

1 - 1


9-44 Section 9-16 - Interconnect Cables

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

Section 9-16Interconnect Cables

9-16-1 Peripheral Cables

Figure 9-20 Peripheral Cable Diagram

LeftRight

RightLeft

AUDIO OUT

AUDIO IN

RS-232C

VIDEO OUT

VIDEO IN

SONY VCR SVO-9500MD

A8A9

A6A7

A2

A11

A10

USB, +12PC, MIC IN, AUDIO OUT

Remote

Video Rcvr

Op Control

Audio AmpMic Pre Amp

Video / Mic

AC Power

Speaker

MONITOR

OP PANELA1

A3

A4

A5

B5

B6

B7

B9

B8

B2

B1

B3

B4

A15

A14

TO CARD RACK

TOINTERNAL I/O

BOARD

USER INTERFACE

RS-232C

Video Output

B/W Video In

SONY ANALOGB/W PRINTER

UP890MD

SONY ANALOGCOLOR PRINTER

UP-2900MD

INTERNAL I/O BOARD

RGB & Sync

COLOR PRNTVIDEO

TOUCH PANELVIDEO

MONITORVIDEO

Video Rcvr

Op Control

Audio AmpMic Pre Amp

Video / Mic

AC Power

C13 or D4

D5

C22

Speaker

MONITOR

BEP

BT04 SYSTEMS

OP PANEL

USER INTERFACE

TOUCH PANELVIDEO

MONITORVIDEO

C13 or D4

C22BEP

530

545

500

500A

501

502

503

504

505

516A

516B

517A

517B

530545

546547

548

BT06 and later onlySpeaker and AC Power interrupted by Subwoofer electronics


Chapter 9 9-45

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

9-16-1 Peripheral Cables (cont’d)

Table 9-26 Peripheral Cables


500 Console Flex Cable Assembly (complete)

FB200320*

Top Console and Monitor to IIO, AC Ctrl, BEP and Gas spring

*When replacing FB200320 in BT03 or earlier systems, also order 064G1768. Over-molded SVGA connector requires longer screws (064G1768) to attach to bulkhead.

1 - 1

Extended-length Jack/Lock Screws

064G1768 Longer screws required for modified connector (when replacing FB200320 in BT03 or earlier systems). 1 - 1

500A Cable, Main harness w/ DVI 5119218

BT04 or later

1 - 1

501 Color Printer Video Cable FB200789

RGB & Sync From PCVIC to Color Printer - #1 -BEP-D5 to RGB Color Printer - Same as Vivid 7 -

1 - 1

502 Color Printer Control Cable FB200790

#2 - Same as Vivid 7 -

1 - 1



1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

503 BW/CP Printer Cable FB200791

#3 - IIO-A1 to BW/Color Printer - Same as Vivid 7 -

1 - 1

504 VCR Cable Harness 2371911

Combines FB200792 & FC200041 & FC200042 & FC200043 & FC200044

Same as Vivid 7

1 - 1

505 VCR Remote Control Cable FB200792

#4 - IIO-A2 to VCR - Same as Vivid 7 -

1 - 1

516A SVHS Cable, Shielded FC200041

#16 - IIO-A10 to VCR IN - Same as Vivid 7 -

2 - 1

516B SVHS Cable, Shielded FC200042

#16 - IIO-A10 to VCR Out- Same as Vivid 7 -

2 - 1

517A Audio Cable, Shielded FC200043

#17 - IIO-A6/A7 to VCR IN CH1(L)/CH2(R)- Same as Vivid 7 -

2 - 1

Table 9-26 Peripheral Cables (Continued)



Chapter 9 9-47

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

517B Audio Cable, Shielded FC200044

#17 - IIO-A6/A7 to VCR OutCH1(L)/CH2(R)- Same as Vivid 7 -

2 - 1

530 Speaker Cable - Bulkhead 2319024 1 - 1

545 Monitor Cable Assembly 2304171

- Same as Vivid 7 & LOGIQ 7-

1 - 2

546 cable, internal microphone 5119245 1 - 1

547 adapter, DVI to SVGA w mic(CRT only)

5118498

Found Behind OPIO

1 - 1

548 adapter, SVGA to DVI (CRT only)

5119495

Found on Back of BEP

1 - 1

Table 9-26 Peripheral Cables (Continued)




1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

9-16-2 Peripheral Cable - Analog Color Printer with BEP3

Figure 9-21 Analog Color Printer W/BEP3

Table 9-27 Analog Color Printer W/BEP3


549 Cable, S-Video 5113288 1 - 1

LeftRight

Right

75 ohm Off

Left

AUDIO OUT

AUDIO IN

RS-232C

VIDEO OUT

VIDEO IN

SONY VCR SVO-9500MD

A8A9

A6A7

A2

A11

A10

Remote

If No VCRuse A10

A1

A3

A4

A5

A15

A14

TO CARD RACK

RS-232C

Video Output

B/W Video In

SONY ANALOGB/W PRINTER

UP890MD

SONY ANALOGCOLOR PRINTER

UP-2900MDUP-51MD

INTERNAL I/O BOARD

S-Video In

549549


Chapter 9 9-49

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

9-16-3 Peripheral Cable - USB Printer Cables

Figure 9-22 USB Printer Cables

Table 9-28 USB Printer Cables


560 CABLE, USB 2.0 COMPLIANT 1.0M 2353228 BEP C21 to BW Printer Sony UP-D895 1 - 1

561 USB TO SCSI ADAPTER 2354406 From C20 to SCSI for Sony UP-D50 input 1 - 1

562 CABLE, USB 2.0 COMPLIANT 1.0M 2353228 BEP C20 to Color Printer Sony UP-D21, UP-D23, UP-D55 1 - 1

COLOR PRINTER UP-D50

BW PRINTER UP-D895

BW

PRINTER

SONY

UP-D895C21

BEP

A5 COLOR

PRINTER

SONY

UP-D50C20

BEP

COLOR PRINTER UP-D21, 23, 55

COLOR

PRINTER

SONY

UP-D21, 23, 55C20

BEP

2353228

2353228

2354406

560

561

562



1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

9-16-4 AC Distribution Cables

Figure 9-23 AC Distribution Cable Diagram

P5XFMR BOX

P6

P100P101

P7

P8

P9

P10

P11

Part of Main Cable

To Op Panel

To Color Printer

To VCR

To BW Printer

To Card Rack

To BEP

INTERNAL I/O

Fan

A13 A16 A15 A12

A14

AC CONTROL

BOX

AC

AdapterSerial

Modem

Reserved for Wireless Mic

To Color Printer

To VCR

To BW Printer

To Color Printer

To Wireless Mic

BT04 or Systems with 4D

Thru BT03

AC

DISTRIBUTION

BOX

507507A

514

515

540

513

#500

541A

550

551

541 542M542Ato


Chapter 9 9-51

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

9-16-4 AC Distribution Cables (cont’d)

Table 9-29 AC Distribution Cables

Item Part NamePart

Number Description Qty CRU FRU

507 Fan Speed Control Cable FB200795

#7 - IIO-A15 to ACP-F8

1 - 1

507AFan Speed Control Cable if EQ4 PWA (2260210) is Rev K or earlier

2333827

#7 - IIO-A15 to ACP-F8

1 - 1

513 AC-Distribution Cable Kit FB200802Includes FB200802-1, FB200802-2, FB200802-3 &

FB200802-4 1 - 1

514 AC Mains 1 Cable FB200803

#14 - ACT-M1 to ACP-F6 - Same as Vivid 7 -

1 - 1

515 AC Mains 2 Cable FB200804

#15 - ACT-M2 to ACP-F7 - Same as Vivid 7 -

1 - 1

540 AC Peripheral Cable 070C5080 AC to Color & B/W Printers and VCR 3 - 1

541 AC Power Cord - USA 2162856 Obsolete - replaced by 2286301 1 Y N

541A AC Power Cord - USA 2286301

If unavailable, order 5148381

1 Y 1

542 AC Power Cord - Outside USA 2118615Obsolete

1 Y N

542A AC Power Cord - Outside USA 070C3194Order only if a dedicated cord (5148381-x) for the

specific country is unavailable.

1 Y 1

542B AC Power Cord - North America 5148381

H4000ZA

1 Y 1

542C AC Power Cord - Japan 5148381-2

H4000ZK

1 Y 1



1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

542D AC Power Cord - Europe 5148381-3

H4000ZB

1 Y 1

542E AC Power Cord - UK/Ireland 5148381-4

H4000ZD

1 Y 1

542F AC Power Cord - China 5148381-5

H4000ZC

1 Y 1

542G AC Power Cord - Switzerland 5148381-7

H4000ZL

1 Y 1

542H AC Power Cord - Denmark 5148381-8

H4000ZE

1 Y 1

542J AC Power Cord - Israel 5322309 1 Y 1

542K AC Power Cord - India 5323270 1 Y 1

542L AC Power Cord - Argentina 5323275 1 Y 1

542M AC Power Cord - Australia (Orange)

5323129 1 Y 1

Table 9-29 AC Distribution Cables (Continued)

Item Part NamePart



Chapter 9 9-53

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

550 Cable, 3 Head AC Power FC200571 1 - 1

551 Cable, AC Power Split Y 5112631

Required If Using 3 Head AC Power Cable and Voice Command

1 - 1

Table 9-29 AC Distribution Cables (Continued)

Item Part NamePart




1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM


Figure 9-24 BEP 1.0 and II/O Cabling Diagram

RE

MO

TE

EX

P 1

SO

UN

D C

AR

D

PC

I D

IGIT

AL

VID

EO

(L

VD

S)

AD

VA

NC

ED

IN

PU

T D

EV

ICE

S

PC

I S

LO

T 1

AG

P V

IDE

O

AG

P S

LO

T

10

/10

0b

T

PA

RA

LL

EL

CO

M1

US

B1

US

B2

PC

I S

LO

T 2

PC

2IP

RS

23

2 (

X4

)

I2C

PC

2IP

PC

I S

LO

T 4

RS

42

2

PS

ON

PO

K

68M

TO

PO

WE

R

SU

PP

LY

NO

N-P

CI

SL

OT

PC

-VIC

& P

C2IO R

GB

OU

T

SV

GA

OU

T 1

SV

GA

OU

T 2

S/C

VID

EO

OU

T

SV

GA

IN

PC

PO

WE

R

PC

ON

/OF

F

50F

12

C

RS

23

2(X

3)

TO

FR

ON

T E

ND

CA

RD

RA

CK

SC

B

TO

CO

LO

R

PR

INT

ER

TO

IM

AG

E

MO

NIT

OR

TO

LC

D

FL

AT

PA

NE

L

INT

ER

NA

L I

/O

BW

VID

EO

OU

T

US

B

SV

GA

VID

EO

OU

T

SE

RIA

L

10

/10

0b

T

SV

IDE

O O

UT

VID

EO

OU

T

EX

TE

RN

AL

I/O

TO

OP

PA

NE

L

50F

RS

23

2 #

1

RS

23

2 #

2

SV

IDE

O L

SV

IDE

O C

TO

PR

INT

ER

S

PC

PO

WE

R

SV

IDE

O L

F

RO

M C

OL

OR

PR

T

SV

IDE

O L

TO

BW

PR

T

CO

MP

VID

EO

FR

OM

CO

LO

RP

RT

SV

IDE

O C

FR

OM

CO

LO

RP

RT

SV

IDE

O F

RO

M V

CR

SV

IDE

O T

O V

CR

SV

IDE

O L

F

RO

M V

CR

SV

IDE

O C

FR

OM

VC

R

SV

IDE

O L

T

O V

CR

SV

IDE

O C

TO

VC

R

PC

ON

/OF

F

PA

TIE

NT

I/O

CO

MP

VID

EO

PS

_O

N

TO

FR

ON

T E

ND

CA

RD

RA

CK

VIA

BA

CK

PL

AN

E

SV

GA

VID

EO

B7

B2

B1

B3

B8

B9

B4B5

B6

A11

A10

A1

A5

A4

PC

PO

WE

R F

OR

IN

TE

RN

AL

I/O

CIR

CU

ITS

BW

RE

MO

TE

; C

OL

OR

RE

MO

TE

1,2

VID

EO

SW

ITC

H

12C

RE

MO

TE

EX

P 2

FO

OT

SW

ITC

H

12C

12C

PO

RT

TR

IGG

ER

PH

ON

E

AU

DIO

R

AU

DIO

LT

RIG

GE

R

12C

12C

PO

RT

SC

AN

CO

NV

ER

T

PS

_O

N

12C

to

RS

23

2

US

B; A

UD

IO T

O O

P P

AN

EL; M

IC F

RO

M O

P P

AN

EL

MIC

FR

OM

OP

PA

NE

L

AU

DIO

TO

OP

PA

NE

L

MIC

EN

VC

R A

UD

IO E

N

OP

TIO

N

KE

YB

EP

1.0

VC

R A

UD

IO E

N

MIC

EN

MIC

IN

(P

INK

)

AU

DIO

LIN

E O

UT

(G

RN

)

AU

DIO

LIN

E I

N

(BL

U)

TO

VC

R

A2

SP

AR

EA

3

TC

ON

SW

1

AU

DIO

FR

OM

VC

R

AU

DIO

TO

VC

R

A6

A7

A8

A9

Ra

ck P

ow

er

"Off

Pa

th"

"On

Pa

th"

TC

ON

SW

1

C5

C6

C3

C4

C17

C13

C18

C1

0

C9

C1

1

C16

C7

C1

2

D3

D5

D4

D1

D2

CO

M2

PC

I S

LO

T 5

Cable

# 5

00

Cable

# 5

10

Cable

# 5

11

Cable

# 5

00

Cable

# 5

01

Cable

# 5

08

Cable

# 5

31

Cable

# 5

20

Cable

# 5

29

Cable

# 5

00

Cable

# 5

08

Cable

# 5

19

Cable

# 5

18

Cable

# 5

09

Cable

# 5

17B

Cable

# 5

03

Cable

# 5

17A

Cable

# 5

16A

Cable

# 5

16B

Cable

# 5

02

Cable

# 5

04

2266548-3

BE

P 1

.0 w

ith

ou

t 3D

op

tio

n

2266548-4

BE

P 1

.0 w

ith

3D

op

tio

n

OP

TIO

NA

L 3

D C

AR

D

PC

I B

IRD

PC

I S

LO

T 3

TO

MO

DE

M

Cable

# 5

06

FR

OM

MO

DE

M

See

# 53

6


Chapter 9 9-55

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM


Figure 9-25 BEP 2.0 and II/O Cabling Diagram

RE

MO

TE

EX

P 1

AG

P V

IDE

O

AG

P S

LO

T

10

/10

0b

T

PA

RA

LL

EL

PO

RT

CO

M1

US

B1

US

B2

PC

2IP

RS

23

2 (

X4

)

I2C

PC

2IP

RS

42

2

PS

ON

PO

K

68M

US

B3

US

B4

PC

-VIC

& P

C2

IO RG

B

OU

T

SV

GA

OU

T 1

SV

GA

OU

T 2

S/C

VID

EO

OU

T

SV

GA

IN

PC

PO

WE

R

PC

ON

/OF

F

50F

12

C

RS

23

2(X

3)

TO

FR

ON

T E

ND

CA

RD

RA

CK

SC

B

TO

AN

AL

OG

CO

LO

R P

RIN

TE

R

TO

IM

AG

E

MO

NIT

OR

TO

LC

D

FL

AT

PA

NE

L

INT

ER

NA

L I/O

BW

VID

EO

OU

T

US

B

SV

GA

VID

EO

OU

T

SE

RIA

L

10

/10

0b

T

SV

IDE

O O

UT

VID

EO

OU

T

EX

TE

RN

AL

I/O

TO

OP

PA

NE

L

50F

RS

23

2 #

1

RS

23

2 #

2

SV

IDE

O L

SV

IDE

O C

TO

PR

INT

ER

S

PC

PO

WE

R

SV

IDE

O L

F

RO

M C

OL

OR

PR

T

SV

IDE

O L

TO

BW

PR

T

CO

MP

VID

EO

FR

OM

CO

LO

RP

RT

SV

IDE

O C

FR

OM

CO

LO

RP

RT

SV

IDE

O F

RO

M V

CR

SV

IDE

O T

O V

CR

SV

IDE

O L

F

RO

M V

CR

SV

IDE

O C

FR

OM

VC

R

SV

IDE

O L

T

O V

CR

SV

IDE

O C

TO

VC

R

PC

ON

/OF

F

PA

TIE

NT

I/O

CO

MP

VID

EO

PS

_O

N

TO

FR

ON

T E

ND

CA

RD

RA

CK

VIA

BA

CK

PL

AN

E

SV

GA

VID

EO

B7

B2

B1

B3

B8B9

B4B5

B6

A1

1

A1

0

A1

A5

A4

PC

PO

WE

R F

OR

IN

TE

RN

AL

I/O

CIR

CU

ITS

BW

RE

MO

TE

; C

OL

OR

RE

MO

TE

1,2

VID

EO

SW

ITC

H

12C

RE

MO

TE

EX

P 2

FO

OT

SW

ITC

H

12C

12C

PO

RT

TR

IGG

ER

PH

ON

E

AU

DIO

R

AU

DIO

LT

RIG

GE

R

12C

12C

PO

RT

SC

AN

CO

NV

ER

T

PS

_O

N

12C

to

RS

23

2

US

B;

AU

DIO

TO

OP

PA

NE

L;

MIC

FR

OM

OP

PA

NE

L

MIC

FR

OM

OP

PA

NE

L

AU

DIO

TO

OP

PA

NE

L

MIC

EN

VC

R A

UD

IO E

N

OP

TIO

N K

EY

BE

P2.0

VC

R A

UD

IO E

N

MIC

EN

TO

VC

R

A2

SP

AR

EA

3

TC

ON

SW

1

AU

DIO

FR

OM

VC

R

AU

DIO

TO

VC

R

A6

A7

A8

A9

Ra

ck P

ow

er

"Off

Pa

th"

"On

Pa

th"

TC

ON

SW

1

C5

C6

C3

C4

C1

7

C1

3

C1

6

C1

2

D3

D5

D4

D1

D2

US

B5

US

B6

C1

9

C1

8

C2

1

C2

0

PC

I D

IGIT

AL

VID

EO

(L

VD

S)

AD

VA

NC

ED

IN

PU

T D

EV

ICE

S

PC

I S

LO

T 3

C1

8

SO

UN

D C

AR

D

PC

I S

LO

T 1

MIC

IN

(P

INK

)

AU

DIO

LIN

E O

UT

(G

RN

)

AU

DIO

LIN

E I

N (

BL

U)

C1

0

C9

C1

1

PC

I S

LO

T 5

NO

T U

SE

D

PC

I S

LO

T 2

PC

I S

LO

T 6

UP

S C

on

tro

l to

th

e

BE

P P

ow

er

Su

pp

ly

PC

I S

LO

T 4

Op

tio

na

l 3

D I

nte

rfa

ce

Ca

rd

NO

T U

SE

D

NO

T U

SE

D

Ca

ble

# 5

29

Ca

ble

# 5

00

Ca

ble

# 5

20

Ca

ble

# 5

31

Ca

ble

# 5

08

Ca

ble

# 5

11

Ca

ble

# 5

00

Ca

ble

# 5

01

Ca

ble

# 5

10

Ca

ble

# 5

09

Ca

ble

# 5

19

Ca

ble

# 5

18

Ca

ble

# 5

17

B

Ca

ble

# 5

17

A

Ca

ble

# 5

00

Ca

ble

# 5

02

Ca

ble

# 5

04

Ca

ble

# 5

03

Ca

ble

# 5

16

A

Ca

ble

# 5

16

B

Ca

ble

# 5

34

23

48

18

6-3

BE

P 2

.0 w

ith

ou

t 3

D o

pti

on

23

48

18

6-4

BE

P 2

.0 w

ith

3D

op

tio

n

NO

T U

SE

D

NO

T U

SE

D

TO

MO

DE

M

Ca

ble

# 5

06

FR

OM

MO

DE

M

See

# 53

6



1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM


Figure 9-26 BEP 2.1/2.2 and II/O Cabling Diagram

RE

MO

TE

EX

P 1

MO

TH

ER

BO

AR

D A

GP

VID

EO

-

AG

P S

LO

T

10

/10

0b

T

PA

RA

LLE

L

PO

RT

CO

M1

US

B1

US

B2

PC

2IP

RS

23

2 (

X4

)

I2C

PC

2IP

RS

422

PS

ON

PO

K

68M

US

B3

US

B4

DG

-VIC

& D

G2

IO RG

B

OU

T

SV

GA

OU

T 1

SV

GA

OU

T 2

S/C

VID

EO

OU

T

DV

I IN

PC

PO

WE

R

PC

ON

/OF

F

50M

12

C

RS

23

2(X

3)

TO

FR

ON

T E

ND

CA

RD

RA

CK

SC

B

TO

AN

AL

OG

CO

LO

R P

RIN

TE

R

TO

IM

AG

E

MO

NIT

OR

TO

LC

D

FL

AT

PA

NE

L

INT

ER

NA

L I/O

BW

VID

EO

OU

T

US

B

SV

GA

VID

EO

OU

T

SE

RIA

L

10

/10

0b

T

SV

IDE

O O

UT

VID

EO

OU

T

EX

TE

RN

AL

I/O

TO

OP

PA

NE

L

50M

RS

23

2 #

1

RS

23

2 #

2

SV

IDE

O L

SV

IDE

O C

TO

AN

AL

OG

PR

INT

ER

SN

ot

us

ed

wit

h

Dig

ita

l P

eri

ph

era

ls

PC

PO

WE

R

SV

IDE

O L

F

RO

M C

OL

OR

PR

T

SV

IDE

O L

TO

BW

PR

T

CO

MP

VID

EO

FR

OM

CO

LO

RP

RT

SV

IDE

O C

FR

OM

CO

LO

RP

RT

SV

IDE

O F

RO

M V

CR

SV

IDE

O T

O V

CR

SV

IDE

O L

F

RO

M V

CR

SV

IDE

O C

FR

OM

VC

R

SV

IDE

O L

T

O V

CR

SV

IDE

O C

TO

VC

R

PC

ON

/OF

F

PA

TIE

NT

I/O

CO

MP

VID

EO

PS

_O

N

TO

FR

ON

T E

ND

CA

RD

RA

CK

VIA

BA

CK

PL

AN

E

SV

GA

VID

EO

B7

B2

B1

B3

B8B9

B4B

5

B6

A11

A10

A1

A5

A4

PC

PO

WE

R F

OR

IN

TE

RN

AL

I/O

CIR

CU

ITS

BW

RE

MO

TE

; C

OL

OR

RE

MO

TE

1,2

VID

EO

SW

ITC

H

12C

RE

MO

TE

EX

P 2

FO

OT

SW

ITC

H

12C

12C

PO

RT

TR

IGG

ER

PH

ON

E

AU

DIO

R

AU

DIO

LT

RIG

GE

R

12C

12C

PO

RT

DV

I to

An

alo

g

PS

_O

N

12C

to

RS

232

US

B;

AU

DIO

TO

OP

PA

NE

L;

MIC

FR

OM

OP

PA

NE

L

MIC

FR

OM

OP

PA

NE

L

AU

DIO

TO

OP

PA

NE

L

MIC

EN

VC

R A

UD

IO E

N

OP

TIO

N K

EY

BE

P2.1

VC

R A

UD

IO E

N

MIC

EN

TO

VC

R

A2

SP

AR

EA

3

TC

ON

SW

1

AU

DIO

FR

OM

VC

R

AU

DIO

TO

VC

R

A6

A7

A8

A9

Rack P

ow

er

"Off

Path

"

"On

Pa

th"

TC

ON

SW

1

C5

C6

C3

C4

C1

7

C3

0

C1

6

C1

2

D3

D5

C1

3

D1

D2

US

B5

US

B6

C1

9

C1

8

C2

1

C2

0

PC

I D

IGIT

AL

VID

EO

(L

VD

S)

AD

VA

NC

ED

IN

PU

T D

EV

ICE

S

PC

I S

LO

T 3

C1

8

SO

UN

D C

AR

D

PC

I S

LO

T 1

MIC

IN

(P

INK

)

AU

DIO

LIN

E O

UT

(G

RN

)

AU

DIO

LIN

E I

N (

BLU

)C

10

C9

C1

1

PC

I S

LO

T 5

TO

DIG

ITA

L

B/W

PR

INT

ER

TO

DIG

ITA

L

CO

LO

R P

RIN

TE

R

NO

T U

SE

D

PC

I S

LO

T 2

PC

I S

LO

T 6

UP

S C

on

tro

l to

th

e

BE

P P

ow

er

Su

pp

ly

PC

I S

LO

T 4

Op

tio

na

l 3

D I

nte

rfa

ce

Ca

rd

AD

D C

AR

D -

DIG

ITA

L

VID

EO

OU

T

NO

T U

SE

D

Cable

# 5

29

Cable

# 5

00

Cable

# 5

20

Cable

# 5

31

Cable

# 5

08

A

Cable

# 5

11

Cable

# 5

00

Cable

# 5

01

Cable

# 5

10

Cable

# 5

09

Cable

# 5

19

Cable

# 5

18

Cable

# 5

17

B

Cable

# 5

17

A

Cable

# 5

00

Cable

# 5

02

Cable

# 5

04

Cable

# 5

03

Cable

# 5

16

A

Cable

# 5

16

B

Cable

# 5

34

Cable

# 5

33

Cable

# 5

32

2348186-1

3

BE

P 2

.1 w

ith

ou

t 3

D o

pti

on

2348186-1

4

BE

P 2

.1 w

ith

3D

op

tio

n

D4 N

ot

Use

d

MIC

TO

BE

PLINE IN TO BEP

LINE OUT FROM BEP

Cable

# 5

09

Cable

# 5

06w/ M

od

em

MO

DE

M

(op

tio

n)

See

# 53

6


Chapter 9 9-57

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM


Figure 9-27 BEP 3.x/BEP 4.x and II/O Cabling Diagram

See

# 53

6

PCI D

IGIT

AL

VID

EO

(LVD

S B

EP 4

.1) o

r (D

VI B

EP 4

.0)

AD

VAN

CED

(IN

PUT

DEV

ICES

)

BEP

3.x

and

BEP

4.x



1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

9-16-4 AC Distribution Cables (cont’d) Table 9-30 Internal I/O Cables

Item Part NamePart


505 Doppler Cable FB200793

From Front Panel to Front End Processor - #5Not used on BT04

1 - 1

506 Standard Modem Cable FB200794

From Modem to External I/O - #6Packaged with FB200802-1 (modem power cable)

and used with Serial Modem Option kit

1 - 1

508 Monitor Cable Standard FB200796

BEP AGP Video to PCVIC Card SVGA - #8 - BEP-C13 to BEP-D3 - Same as Vivid 7 -

1 - 1

508A Digital Video Interface Cable 2354056Interface from AGP Slot ADD card to DGVIC

BEP 2.1 & BEP31 - 1

509 RS232 Com 1/2 Cable FB200797

#9 - IIO-B7 to BEP-C6 or IIO-B8 to BEP-C7 Used with 2364642 in BEP 2.x Systems


510 Internal I/O-PC2IO Power/Control Cable

FB200798

#10 - IIO-B6 to BEP-D2 - Same as Vivid 7 -

1 - 1

511 Internal I/O-PC2IO Signals Cable

FB200799 #11 - Obsolete Use FC200286- 1 - N

511A Internal I/O-PC2IO Signals Cable

FC200286

#11A BEP D1 to IIO B5 Same as Vivid 7 - Improved flex and length

1 - 1

511B Cable, Signals, IIO-BEP Male to Male FC200495

BEP D1 to IIO B5 Needed if using BEP3 w/ Internal I/O FC200503

1 - 1


Chapter 9 9-59

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

511C Cable, Signals, IIO-BEP Male to Female

2404419

BEP D1 to IIO B5 Needed if using BEP3 w/internalI/O FC200423 or FC200446

1 - 1

518 USB A-B Cable 070D2802


2 - 1

519 Ethernet Cat-5 Cable 070D2902


1 - 1

520 PCI Cable, AMP 974298 070M0016

PCI Bus Extension Cable BEP to FEP - #20 - Same as Vivid 7 -

1 - 1

529 Internal I/O-PC Audio Cable FB200748

#29 - IIO-B4 to BEP-AUD - Same as Vivid 7 -

1 - 1

531 UPS Control Cable FC200016 1 - 1

532 Digital B/W Printer Cable

2363062

From USB #6 to Digital B/W Printer - BEP 2.1Straight USB, gray in color

1 - 1

533 Digital Color Printer CableFrom USB #5 to Digital Color Printer (USB to SCSI)

BEP 2.1, Right angle USB, black in color1 - 1

Table 9-30 Internal I/O Cables (Continued)

Item Part NamePart




1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

534 USB to Serial Adapter Cable 2348186-26

From USB #3 To Serial Cable To Internal I/O B7 - Obsolete

Use 2364642 and FB2007971 - N

534A USB to Serial Adapter Cable 2364642

From USB #3 To Serial Cable FB200797 To Internal I/O B7 (Ext I/O Com Port)BEP 2.0 & 2.1 & BEP3

1 - 1

535 USB to SCSI Adapter 2354406 From USB to SCSI for Sony UP-D50 input 1 - 1

536 Option Key 2320432

Parallel port hasp to BEP for Options

1 - 1

Table 9-30 Internal I/O Cables (Continued)

Item Part NamePart



Chapter 9 9-61

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

Section 9-17Power Distribution Modules

Figure 9-28 Power Distribution

Table 9-31 Power Distribution

Item Part Name Part Number Description Qty FRU

601 Card Rack Power Supply PWA Assembly (FEPS)

See Item 409 Power Supplies are mounted on the circuit board 1 1

602 AC Transformer Assembly FB200581 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 2

603 AC CTRL ASSY, 100-120 V FC200079 - Same as Vivid 7 - Obsolete Use 2399515 1 N

603A AC CTRL ASSY, 100-120 V 2399515 100-120 VAC Systems 1 1

604 AC CTRL ASSY, 220-240 V FC200081 - Same as Vivid 7 - Obsolete Use 2399515-2 1 N

604A AC CTRL ASSY, 220-240 V 2399515-2 220-240 VAC Systems 1 1

608 FEP AC Line Filter & Cable 2315960Attached to side of FEP Card Rack, Includes Line Filter

and Power HarnessObsolete, use 2375555

1 N

608A FEP AC Line Filter 2375555 1 1

609 ACC CLAMP 068E4000AC Controller Clamp - Same As Vivid 7-

1 1

601

602

603

604

608

603A

604A

609608A


9-62 Section 9-18 - Air Distribution

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

Section 9-18Air Distribution

Figure 9-29 Air Distribution Parts

Table 9-32 Air Distribution Parts


651 Fan Assembly FB200580 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 - 1

652 Air Intake Cover FB307379 Replaced by FC307778 1 - 1

652 Air Intake Cover FC307778 Replaces FB307379 1 - 1

653 Filter FB307903 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 Y 1

653

651

652652


Chapter 9 9-63

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

Section 9-19Voice Scan

Figure 9-30 Voice Scan Replacement Parts

760

761

765

766

767 767A

768

769

761A

763

770

772

755

762

750A

765A

773

750 756 757 764


9-64 Section 9-19 - Voice Scan

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

Section 9-19 Voice Scan (cont’d)

Table 9-33 Voice Scan


750 Wireless Receiver 2383770 Obsolete - use 5115162 Must also order 5115164 1 Y N

750A Wireless Receiver 5115162 wireless receiver generation 2 1 - 1

755 Tray for Wireless Receiver 2377599 1 - 2

756 Foam - Wireless Receiver Bottom 2377600 1 - 2

757 Foam - Wireless Receiver Top 2377601 1 - 2

760 Battery Charger 2383775 1 Y 1

761 Battery - 9V NiMH 2383776Yellow 9V Rechargeable Battery

Obsolete - use 51212911 - N

761A Battery - 9V NiMH 5121291 Green 9V Rechargeable Battery 1 Y 1

762 Wireless Microphone 2383779 Over the ear style. 1 Y 1

763 Wired USB Headset 2386172 Obsolete - use 5159489 1 - N

764 Wireless Microphone Care Kit 2386142 wind screens, clip, and cable only 1 - 1

765 Beltpack Transmitter - Wireless 2383773 Obsolete - use 5116453 Must also order 5115236 1 - N

765A Beltpack Transmitter - Wireless 5116453 wireless transmitter generation 2(with charging contacts) 1 Y 1

766 Adapter Kit - 240Vac 2390117For 2383775 only

For 120V order 23837751 - 1

767 AC power adapter, US 5116448 For 5116446 only 1 - 1

767A AC power adapter, foreign 5116450 For 5116446 only 1 - 1

768 Rechargeable Battery Pack for Transmitter 5116454 1 Y 1

769 Battery recharger station 5116446 1 - 1

770 Antenna 5115891 For 2383770 and 2383773 only 1 - N

772 Rechargeable AA Batteries 5115236 rechargeable AA batteries (pack of 4) for generation 2 transmitter 1 Y 1

773 Wired Headset 5159489 Andrea VS Headset 1 Y 1


Chapter 9 9-65

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

9-19-1 Voice Scan Cabling

Figure 9-31 Wireless Interconnect

Table 9-34 Wireless Interconnect


751 Battery Eliminator Cable 2383769 For use with 2383770 1 - 1

751B Dummy AA Battery Power Supply 5115164 dummy AA battery power supply for wireless

receiver generation 2 1 - 1

752 Audio to USB Adapter 2383765 1 - 1

753 Audio Cable from Receiver 2383768 1 - 1

754 Power Cable for Receiver 2383767 1 - 1

758 AC Adapter - 9V, 1.1A 2384314 1 - 1

759 USB Extension Cable 2384449 1 - 1

WIRELESS MIC OPTION

2383767AC

Adapter

Wireless Mic

Receiver

2XXXXX

2384314

MIC IN

NOT USEDAUDIO OUT

AF OUT

2383765

2383768USB Audio

Adapter

C19

BEP2384449

AC

Distribution

Box

NOTE:

BT04 has AC

Distribution

Cable

2383769

or

5115164

751 751B

752

753

754 758

759


9-66 Section 9-20 - 4D Components

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

Section 9-204D Components

Figure 9-32 4D Components

Table 9-35 4 D Parts


800 4D Motor Controller 2372904 BT06 systems and prior 1 - 1

800A 4D Motor Controller 5180588 BT07 and later systems, or systems upgraded to BT07 or BT09, only 1 - 1

801 Cable, Bracket to Probe 2384183 1 Y 1

802 Cable, Motor Controller/Bracket assembly 2375551 1 - 1

803 Cable, Motor Controller to IIO 2375552 1 - 1

804 Cable, USB to Motor Controller 2353228 1 - 1

805 Cable, Motor Controller Power 2375553 1 - 1

800

801802

803 804805

800A


Chapter 9 9-67

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

Section 9-21Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler Components

Figure 9-33 Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler Components

Table 9-36 Continuous Wave Doppler Components


820 CW Card 2380188 1 - 1

CW Cable 2380188-13 1 - 1

Mu Metal Shield 2380188-11 inserts under BEP for noise reduction 1 - 1

820


9-68 Section 9-22 - Peripherals

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

Section 9-22Peripherals

Table 9-37 Approved Peripherals

Part Name Part Number Description Qty CRU FRU

Sony VCR 9500 M2D 2117635 (T3306ER)

H4700TC - NTSCObsolete - order 5122171 1 - N

Sony VCR 9500 MDP2 H45001PA - PAL Version (Europe) Obsolete - order 5122172 1 - N

Sony 2900 Color Video Printer 2207254 (T3306PT) H4700TD 1 - 2

Sony Color Printer UP51MDU 2281966 Analog (large footprint) H4700TH 1 - 2

Sony B/W Video Printer UP895MD 2288502 Analog E8210B 1 - 2

3 Position Footswitch FB200723 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 Y 2

Sony UP-D895MD 2358588 Digital B/W Printer Obsolete - order 5171608 1 - 2

Sony UP-D897MD 5171608Replaces Sony UP-D895MD (2358588)

Part includes drivers for earlier BTs1 - 1

Sony UP-D50MD 2358596 Digital Color Printer Obsolete - crosses up to 5116559 1 - 1

Sony UP-D21MD 2358449 Digital Color Printer (small footprint)Obsolete - crosses up to 2401985 1 - -

Sony UP-21MD 2351318 Analog Color Printer (small footprint) 1 - -

Sony UP-D23MD 2401985 Digital, A6 (small footprint) - -

Sony UP-21 & D21 & UP-D23MD Adapter kit 2351082 Mounting plate, cover tray and screws 1 - -

HP6122 2378741 Deskjet Printer Y -

Sony UP-D55MD 5116559 Digital, Replaces 2358596. If replacing 2358596, also order 5123707 Adapter Kit - -

HP-6540 5121837 1 - -

HP-5650 5121839 1 - -

UP-D55 Adapter Kit 5123707 Includes: FC307635 plastic cover/tray,

46-312358P36 M4 screws and 068X0200 long strap- -

Mitsubushi NTSC VCR 5122171 for USA NTSC with RS232C-USB - -

Mitsubushi PAL VCR 5122172 for Europe PAL with RS232C-USB - -

DVR Video Recorder 5120592 Panasonic LQ-MD800P DVR Video Recorder BT07 and later only 1 - 1

Cable, USB Right-Angle 5181607 USB A to B for DVR 1 - 1

Canon Pixma MP610 External Printer

KTZ2300182 Offline Report/Image Color Printer 1 - 1

Canon Pixma MP610 External Printer Cable

5315370 Cable for Canon Pixma MP610 External Printer 1 - 1


Chapter 9 9-69

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

Section 9-23Customer Documentation

Table 9-38 User Documentation

DescriptionBT02

Part NumberBT03

Part NumberBT04

Part NumberBT06

Part NumberBT07

Part NumberBT09

Part Number FRU

Basic User Manual (BUM) 2309819-100 2384455-100 5113776-100 5140804-100 5174158-100 5338262-100 N

ARM 2309835-100 2384454-100 5113777-100 5140805-100 5173359-100 5338271-100 N

QG 2309820-100 2384458-100 5113779-100 5140807-100 5173872-100 N/A N

RN 2320595-100 2384452-100 5113780-100 5140811-100 5174065-100 5338272-100 N

eDocs 2384456-200 5113783-200 5140813-200 5173842-200 5338273-100 N

Kit 2392066 5113787-1 5140830-1 5173499-1 5338275-1 N

QC1 2309821-100 2384457-100 5113784-100 5140808-100 5173599-100 5173599-100 N

QC2 5113785-100 5140809-100 5173473-100 5173473-100 N

QC3 5113786-100 5140810-100 5174064-100 5174064-100 N

AIUM 2163920-100 2163920-100 2163920-100 2163920-100 2163920-100 2163920-100 N

Install 22361715-100 22361715-100 22361715-100 22361715-100 22361715-100 22361715-100 N

UG 2388578-100 5113778-100 5140812-100 5174247-100 5338270-100 N

Add 2389047-100 5113781-100 N/A N/A N/A N

OLH 2384453-100 5113782-300 5140806-100 5174102-100 5338264-100 N

Service 2294853-100 2294853-100 2294853-100 2294853-100 2294853-100 2294853-100 N

Install Cklist 2399069-100 2399069-100 2399069-100 N


9-70 Section 9-24 - Probes

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

Section 9-24Probes

Figure 9-34 LOGIQ™ 9 Probes

901 902 903 904 905 906

908 909907 910 911 912

915

916

917

914

918

919

913

920

921

924

923


Chapter 9 9-71

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

Section 9-24 Probes (cont’d)

Table 9-39 Available Probes


901 3.5C 2050357 H4901PE - PDI Y 1

902 M7C 2294514 H40412LC Y 1

903 E8C 2294641 H40412LE Y 1

904 7L 2294521 H40412LF Y 1

905 10L 2294523 H40412LG Y 1

906 M12L 2294511 H40412LD Y 1

907 i12L 2264883 H4012L Y 1

908 4S 2295658 H4901PB - PDI Y 1

909 10S 2298589 H4901PC - PDI Y 1

910 8C 2348094 H40412LJ Y 1

911 TCD 3S 2323337 H4701SZ - PDI Y 1

912 3.5CS 2051858 H40412LK Y 1

913 Probe Latching Mechanism 2363861Large round blue locking knob used on some probes

L3, L5, L7, V3, V4, V7- 1

914 4C Probe 5123455H4904PC

Kit includes Probe 2401359, ICD card and shipping carton

Y 1

915 4D3C-L Probe KTZ195893 (KTI195894) H44801G Y 1

916 4D10L Probe KTZ156836 (KTI156837) H44801GB Y 1

917 4DE7C Probe KTZ195859 (KTI195860) H44801GA Y 1

918 CW 5 MHz Probe 2380188-5 Non-imaging Doppler Probe Y 1

919 CW 8 MHz Probe 2380188-8 Non-imaging Doppler Probe Y 1

4D8C KTZ156959 H44801GZ Y 1

920 t739L 2259246 H40212LM Y 1

921 i739L 2259206 H40212LF Y 1

923 4D16L KTZ156972 H44801GY Y 1

924 9L 5149427 H40412LT Y 1

M7C Tru3D Sensor Bracket 2325300 - -

M12L Tru3D Sensor Bracket 2325301 - -

4S Tru3D Sensor Bracket 2325302 - -

E8C Tru3D Sensor Bracket 2325303 - -

10L Tru3D Sensor Bracket 2325304 - -


9-72 Section 9-24 - Probes

1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM

Section 9-24 Probes (cont’d)

Table 9-40 Software/Probe Compatibility Matrix

Item Part Name Part Number 2.x 3.x 4.x 6.x 7.x/9.x

901 3.5C 2050357 x x x x x

902 M7C 2294514 x x x x x

903 E8C 2294641 x x x x x

904 7L 2294521 x x x x x

905 10L 2294523 x x x x x

906 M12L 2294511 x x x x x

907 i12L 2264883 x x x x x

908 4S 2295658 x x x x x

909 10S 2298589 x x x x x

910 8C 2348094 NA x x x x

911 TCD 3S 2323337 NA x x x x

912 3.5CS 2051858 NA x x x x

914 4C Probe 5123455 NA NA x x x

915 4D3C-L Probe KTZ195893 (KTI195894) NA NA x x x

916 4D10L Probe KTZ156836 (KTI156837) NA NA x x x

917 4DE7C Probe KTZ195859 (KTI195860) NA NA x x x

918 CW 5 MHz Probe 2380188-5 NA NA x x x

919 CW 8 MHz Probe 2380188-8 NA NA x x x

4D8C KTZ156959 NA NA NA x x

920 t739L 2259246 NA NA NA x x

921 i739L 2259206 NA NA NA x x

923 4D16L KTZ156972 NA NA NA x x

924 9L 5149427 NA NA NA x x


Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance 10-1

1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM

Chapter 10Care & Maintenance

Section 10-1Overview

10-1-1 Periodic Maintenance Inspections It has been determined by engineering that your LOGIQ™ 9 system does not have any high wear components that fail with use, therefore no Periodic Maintenance Inspections are mandatory. Some Customers Quality Assurance Programs may require additional tasks and or inspections at a different frequency than listed in this manual.

10-1-2 Purpose of Chapter 10This chapter describes Care & Maintenance on the scanner and peripherals. These procedures are intended to maintain the quality of the ultrasound systems performance. Read this chapter completely and familiarize yourself with the procedures before performing a task.



10-1 Overview 10-1

10-2 Why do Maintenance 10-2

10-3 Maintenance Task Schedule 10-2

10-4 Tools Required 10-4

10-5 System Maintenance 10-5

10-6 Using a Phantom 10-10

10-7 Electrical Safety Tests 10-11

10-8 When There's Too Much Leakage Current... 10-27

ULTRASOUND INSPECTION CERTIFICATE 10-28

10-9 Site Log 10-29

CAUTION Practice good ESD prevention. Wear an anti–static strap when handling electronic parts and even when disconnecting/connecting cables.

DANGER THERE ARE SEVERAL PLACES ON THE BACKPLANE, THE AC DISTRIBUTION, AND DC DISTRIBUTION THAT ARE DANGEROUS. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG AND OPEN THE MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER BEFORE YOU REMOVE ANY PARTS. BE CAUTIOUS WHENEVER POWER IS STILL ON AND COVERS ARE REMOVED.

CAUTION Do not pull out or insert circuit boards while power is ON.


10-2 Section 10-2 - Why do Maintenance

1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM

Section 10-2Why do Maintenance

10-2-1 Keeping RecordsIt is good business practice that ultrasound facilities maintain records of quality checks and corrective maintenance. The Ultrasound Inspection Certificate (provided on page 10-28) provides the customer with documentation that the ultrasound scanner is maintained on a periodic basis.

A copy of the Ultrasound Periodic Maintenance Inspection Certificate should be kept in the same room or near the scanner.

10-2-2 Quality AssuranceIn order to gain accreditation from organizations such as the American College of Radiology (USA), it is the customer’s responsibility to have a quality assurance program in place for each scanner. The program must be directed by a medical physicists, the supervising radiologist/physician or appropriate designee.

Routine quality control testing must occur regularly. The same tests are performed during each period so that changes can be monitored over time and effective corrective action can be taken.

Testing results, corrective action and the effects of corrective action must be documented and maintained on the site.

Your GE service representative can help you with establishing, performing and maintaining records for a quality assurance program. Please contact us for coverage information and/or price for service.

Section 10-3Maintenance Task Schedule

10-3-1 How often should care & maintenance tasks be performed?The Care & Maintenance Task Schedule (provided on page 10-3) specifies how often your LOGIQ™ 9 should be serviced and outlines items requiring special attention.

NOTE: It is the customer’s responsibility to ensure the LOGIQ™ 9 care & maintenance is performed as scheduled in order to retain its high level of safety, dependability and performance.

Your GE Service Representative has an in-depth knowledge of your LOGIQ™ 9 ultrasound scanning system and can best provide competent, efficient service. Please contact us for coverage information and/or price for service.

The service procedures and recommended intervals shown in the Care & Maintenance Task Schedule assumes that you use your LOGIQ™ 9 for an average patient load (10-12 per day) and not use it as a primary mobile unit which is transported between diagnostic facilities.

NOTE: If conditions exist which exceed typical usage and patient load, then it is recommended to increase the maintenance frequencies.

CAUTION Do not operate this unit unless all board covers and frame panels are securely in place. System performance and cooling require this.



1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM

10-3-1 How often should care & maintenance tasks be performed? (cont’d)

Table 10-2 Customer Care Schedule

Service at Indicated Time Daily Weekly MonthlyPer Facilities QA Program Notes

Clean Probes •* * or before each use

Clean Probe Holders •Clean Air Filter • more frequently depending on

your environment

Inspect AC Mains Cable • Mobile Unit Check Weekly

Inspect Cables and Connectors •Clean Console •Clean Monitor and Touch Panel •Inspect Wheels, Casters, brakes and Swivel Locks • Mobile Unit Check Daily

Check Control Panel Movement • Mobile Unit Check Daily

Console Leakage Current Checks • also after corrective maintenance

Peripheral Leakage Current Checks • also after corrective maintenance

Surface Probe Leakage Current Checks • also after corrective maintenance

Endocavity Probe Leakage Current Checks

• also after corrective maintenance

Transesphongeal Probe Leakage Current Checks


Surgical Probe Leakage Current Checks


Measurement Accuracy Checks • also after corrective maintenance

Probe/Phantom Checks • also after corrective maintenance

Functional Checks • also after corrective maintenance


10-4 Section 10-4 - Tools Required

1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM

Section 10-4 Tools Required

10-4-1 Special Tools, Supplies and Equipment

10-4-1-1 Specific Requirements for Care & Maintenance

Table 10-3 Overview of Requirements for Care & Maintenance

Tool Part Number Comments

Digital Volt Meter (DVM)

Anti Static Kit

46–194427P23146–194427P27946–194427P36946–194427P37346–194427P370

Kit includes anti–static mat, wrist strap and cables for 200 to 240 V system3M #2204 Large adjustable wrist strap3M #2214 Small adjustable wrist strap3M #3051 conductive ground cord

Anti Static Vacuum Cleaner46–194427P27846–194427P279

120V230V

Air Filter Section 9-18 air intake

Safety Analyzer 46–285652G1 DALE 600 KIT (or equivalent) for electrical tests

SVHS VCR CassetteE7010GGE7010GF

60 minute120 minute

SVHS VCR Head Cleaner See VCR user manual for requirements

DVD-RDVD-RAM See DVR user manual for requirements

3.5” MOD MEDIAE8381AAE8381AB

blank 128 M diskblank 230 M disk

5.25” MOD Media

3.5” MOD Media Cleaner 2117811 cleans the diskettes

5.25” MOD Media Cleaner cleans the diskettes

3.5” MOD Head Cleaner Kit 2148392 cleans the drive heads

5.25” MOD Head Cleaner Kit cleans the drive heads

QIQ Phantom E8370RB

RMI Grayscale Target Model 403GSNote: The use of Phantom is not required during Preventive Maintenance. Customer may use it as part of their Quality Assurance Program tests.

CD-RW Media For LOGIQ™ 9

B/W Printer Cleaning Sheet See printer user manual for requirements

Color Printer Cleaning Sheet See printer user manual for requirements

Disposable Gloves

Cut/Chemical Resistant Gloves

Ergonomic kneel pad 5140706



1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM

Section 10-5System Maintenance

10-5-1 Preliminary ChecksThe preliminary checks take about 15 minutes to perform. Refer to the system user documentation whenever necessary.

Table 10-4 System Checks

Step Item Description

1 Ask & Listen Ask the customer if they have any problems or questions about the equipment.

2 Paperwork Fill in the top of the Ultrasound Inspection Certificate (see page 28). Note all probes and system options.

3 Power up Turn the system power on and verify that all fans and peripherals turn on. Watch the displays during power up to verify that no warning or error messages are displayed.

4 Probes Verify that the system properly recognizes all probes.

5 Displays Verify proper display on the monitor and touch panel.

6 Presets Backup all customer presets on an CD-RW.


10-6 Section 10-5 - System Maintenance

1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM

10-5-2 Functional Checks (See Also Chapter 4)The functional checks take about 60 minutes to perform. Refer to the system user documentation whenever necessary.

10-5-2-1 System Checks

NOTE: * Some software may be considered standard depending upon system model configuration.

Table 10-5 System Functional Checks

Check Step Description

B-Mode Verify basic B-Mode (2D) operation. Check the basic system controls that affect this mode of operation.

CF-Mode Verify basic CF-Mode (Color Flow Mode) operation. Check the basic system controls that affect this mode of operation.

Doppler Modes Verify basic Doppler operation (PW and CW if available). Check the basic system controls that affect this mode of operation.

M-Mode Verify basic M-Mode operation. Check the basic system controls that affect this mode of operation.

*Applicable Software Options

Verify the basic operation of all optional modes such as Multi-Image, 3D, Contrast, Harmonics, Cine, Stress Echo,... etc. Check the basic system controls that affect each options operation.

Xmit/Recv Elements Use the Visual Channel Utility on the 10L probe to verify that all system xmit/recv channels are functional.

Keyboard Test Perform the Keyboard Test Procedure to verify that all keyboard controls are OK.

Monitor Verify basic Monitor display functions. Refer to Chapter 3 of the User Manual.

Touch Panel Verify basic Touch Panel display functions. Refer to Chapter 3 of the User Manual.

Measurements

Scan a gray scale phantom and use the measurement controls to verify distance and area calculation accuracy. Refer to the User Manual, Chapter 18, for measurement accuracy specifications.Note: The use of Phantom is not required during Preventive Maintenance. Customer may use it as part of their Quality Assurance Program tests.



1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM

10-5-2-2 Peripheral/Option ChecksIf any peripherals or options are not part of the system configuration, the check can be omitted. Refer to the User Manual for a list of approved peripherals/options.

10-5-3 Input Power

10-5-3-1 Mains Cable Inspection

Table 10-6 GE Approved Peripheral/Hardware Option Functional Checks


1 VCR Verify record/playback capabilities of the VCR. Clean heads and covers if necessary.

2 DVR Verify record/playback capabilities of the DVR. Clean heads and covers if necessary.

3 B/W Printer Verify hardcopy output of the B/W video page printer. Clean heads and covers if necessary.

4 Color Printer Verify hardcopy output of the Color video page printer. Clean heads and covers if necessary.

5 DICOM Verify that DICOM is functioning properly. Send an image to a DICOM device.

6 InSite Verify that InSite is functioning properly. Ensure two-way remote communications.(Warranty & Contract Customers only)

7 Camera Verify hardcopy output of the film camera. Clean as necessary.

8 Footswitch Verify that the footswitch is functioning as programed. Clean as necessary.

9 ECG Verify basic operation with customer

Table 10-7 Mains Cable Inspection


1 Unplug Cord Disconnect the mains cable from the wall and system.

2 Inspect Inspect it and its connectors for damage of any kind.

3 Verify Verify that the LINE, NEUTRAL and GROUND wires are properly attached to the terminals, and that no strands may cause a short circuit.

4 Verify Inlet connector retainer is functional.


10-8 Section 10-5 - System Maintenance

1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM

10-5-4 Cleaning

10-5-4-1 General Cleaning

10-5-4-2 Air Filter Cleaning

NOTE: For your convenience or if the air filter is too dirty, replacement filters are available. Refer to Chapter 9 for the air filter replacement part number.

Table 10-8 General Cleaning


1 Console Use a fluid detergent in warm water on a soft, damp cloth to carefully wipe the entire system. Be careful not to get the cloth too wet so that moisture does not enter the console.

2 Probe Holder Clean probe holders (they may need to be soaked to remove excess gel).

3 Op Panel

Only use the following cleaners on the LOGIQ™ 9 Operator Panel:• Palmolive Dishwashing Liquid (manufactured by Colgate-Palmolive)• Sani Wipes (manufactured by Microgen Inc.)• Tspray 2 (manufactured by Pharmaceutical Innovations, Inc.)DO NOT use original formula Tspray (Tspray 1) on the operator panel. Only Tspray 2 is acceptable.

NOTE:Since various lotions can have a long term negative impact on the operator panel, hands should be clean and free of lotion.

4 CRT

To clean the monitor face:• Use a soft, folded cloth. Gently wipe the monitor face.• Do NOT use a glass cleaner that has a hydrocarbon base (such as Benzene, Methyl Alcohol or Methyl

Ethyl Ketone) on monitors with the filter (anti-glare shield). Hard rubbing will also damage the filter.• When cleaning the monitor, make sure not to scratch the monitor.

5 LCD

Never use thinner, benzene, alcohol (ethanol, methanol, or isopropyl alcohol), abrasive cleaners, or other strong solvents, as these may cause damage to the cabinet or LCD panel.DO NOT scratch or press on the panel with any sharp objects, such as pencils or pens, as this may result in damage to the panel.To clean LCD panel:• The LCD surface can be cleaned with a soft cloth, such as cotton or lens paper.• If necessary, stubborn stains can be removed by moistening part of a cloth with water to enhance its

cleaning power.

Table 10-9 Air Filter Cleaning - frequency varies with your environment


1 Remove Filter Cover Refer to Chapter 8 for air filter location and removal instructions.

2 Clean Filter The filters can be cleaned in sprinkling water, or they can be dusted with a vacuum cleaner. If the filter is metal, wash and/or vacuum. If the filter is fiber or plastic, vacuum or replace.

3 Install Filter Install the clean filter.



1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM

10-5-5 Physical Inspection

10-5-6 Optional Diagnostic ChecksOptionally you can access the diagnostic software as described in Chapters 5 or 7. View the error logs and run desired diagnostics.

10-5-6-1 View the Logs

1.) Review the system error log for any problems.2.) Check the temperature log to see if there are any trends that could cause problems in the future.3.) Check the Configuration Log; update if needed.

Table 10-10 Physical Checks


1 Labeling Verify that all system labeling is present and in readable condition. Refer to the LOGIQ™ 9 User Manual for details.

2 Scratches & Dents Inspect the console for dents, scratches or cracks.

3 Control Panel Inspect keyboard and control panel. Note any damaged or missing items.

4 Control Panel Movement

Verify ease of control panel (Operator I/O Panel) movement in all acceptable directions. Ensure that it latches in position as required.

5 Wheels & Brakes Check all wheels and casters for wear and verify operation of foot brake, to stop the unit from moving, and release mechanism. Check all caster locks and caster swivel locks for proper operation.

6 Cables & Connectors

Check all internal cable harnesses and connectors for wear and secure connector seating. Pay special attention to footswitch assembly and probe strain or bend reliefs. Also check the wires connecting the side-fan on the BEP cover to the 4-PIN to make sure the wires are not pinched or damaged.

7 Shielding & Covers

Check to ensure that all EMI shielding, internal covers, air flow panels and screws are in place. Missing covers and hardware could cause EMI/RFI problems while scanning.

8 External I/O Check all connectors for damage and verify that the labeling is good.

9 Op Panel Lights Check for proper operation of all operator panel and TGC lights.

10 Monitor Light Check for proper operation of any monitor lights if available.

11 External Microphone Check for proper operation of any external microphones by recording an audio test.


10-10 Section 10-6 - Using a Phantom

1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM

10-5-7 Probe Maintenance

10-5-7-1 Probe Related Checks

10-5-7-2 Basic Probe CareThe system user manuals and various probe handling cards provide a complete description of probe care, maintenance, cleaning and disinfection. Ensure that you are completely familiar with the proper care of GE probes.

Ultrasound probes can be easily damaged by improper handling. See the User Manual and probe care cards for more details. Failure to follow these precautions can result in serious injury and equipment damage. Failure to properly handle or maintain a probe may also void its warranty.

Any evidence of wear indicates the probe cannot be used.

Do a visual check of the probe pins and system sockets before plugging in a probe.

TEE and Interoperative probes often have special considerations and individual probe user manuals. For TEE and Interoperative probes also refer to their separate user manuals.

10-5-7-3 Basic Probe CleaningRefer to the User’s Manual for details on probe cleaning.

NOTE: To help protect yourself from blood borne diseases, wear approved disposable gloves. These are made of nitrile derived from vegetable starch to prevent allergic latex reactions.

NOTE: Failure to follow the prescribed cleaning or disinfection procedures will void the probe’s warranty. DO NOT soak or wipe the lens with any product not listed in the User Manual. Doing so could result in irreparable damage to the probe. Follow care instructions that came with the probe.

NOTE: Disinfect a defective probe before you return it. Be sure to tag the probe as being disinfected.

Section 10-6Using a Phantom

See the Basic User Manual “Customer Maintenance” for information on using a phantom and quality assurance tests.

NOTE: The use of Phantom is not required during Preventive Maintenance. Customer may use it as part of their Quality Assurance Program tests.

Table 10-11 Probe Related Checks


1 Probe Holder Clean probe holders (they may need to be soaked to remove excess gel).

2 Probes Thoroughly check the system probe connectors and remove dust from inside the connector sockets if necessary. Visually check for bent, damaged or missing pins



1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM

Section 10-7Electrical Safety Tests

10-7-1 Safety Test OverviewThe electrical safety tests in this section are based on and conform to NFPA 99 (For USA) and IEC 60601-1 Medical Equipment Safety Standards. They are intended for the electrical safety evaluation of cord-connected, electrically operated, patient care equipment. If additional information is needed, refer to the NFPA 99 (For USA) and IEC 60601-1 documents.

Test the system, peripherals and probes for leakage current. Excessive leakage current can cause injury or death in sensitive patients. High leakage current can also indicate degradation of insulation and a potential for electrical failure. Do not use probes or equipment having excessive leakage current.

To minimize the risk that a probe may shock someone the customer should:

• Not use a probe that is cracked or damaged in any way• Check probe leakage current:

* Based on your facilities QA program for surface probes* Based on your facilities QA program for endocavitary probes* whenever probe damage is suspected

WARNINGWARNING THE USER MUST ENSURE THAT THE SAFETY INSPECTIONS ARE PERFORMED AT LEAST EVERY 12 MONTHS ACCORDING TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE PATIENT SAFETY STANDARD IEC-EN 60601-1. ONLY TRAINED PERSONS ARE ALLOWED TO PERFORM THE SAFETY INSPECTIONS MENTIONED ABOVE.

CAUTION To avoid electrical shock, the unit under test must not be connected to other electrical equipment. Remove all interconnecting cables and wires. The unit under test must not be contacted by users or patients while performing these tests.

CAUTION Possible risk of infection. Do not handle soiled or contaminated probes and other components that have been in patient contact. Follow appropriate cleaning and disinfecting procedures before handling the equipment.


10-12 Section 10-7 - Electrical Safety Tests

1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM

10-7-2 GE Healthcare Leakage Current Limits for LOGIQ™ 9The following limits are summarized for NFPA 99 (For USA), IEC 60601-1 Medical Equipment Safety Standards, and IEC 62353 Medical Electrical Equipment — Recurrent test and test after repair of medical electrical equipment. Measurement limits per IEC 60601-1 Medical Equipment Safety Standards, Table IV.

NOTE: *Measurement limits per IEC 60601-1 Medical Equipment Safety Standards, Table 19.5DV.1

**Most meters (like Dale 600/601) measure a composite of the AC and DC leakage current.

***ISO (on Dale 600) and Mains Applied (on Dale 601) refer to the sink leakage test where mains (supply) voltage is applied to the part to determine the amount of current that will pass (or sink) to ground if a patient contacted mains voltage.

Table 10-12 Chassis Leakage Current Limits—Accessible Metal Surfaces

Country Normal Condition Open Ground Open Neutral

USA 0.1 mA 0.3 mA* 0.3 mA

Other 0.1 mA 0.5 mA 0.5 mA

Table 10-13 Type BF Applied Part Leakage Current Limits - Non-Conductive (Floating) Surface and Cavity Probes

All Countries Normal Condition Open Ground Open Neutral

AC 0.1 mA 0.5 mA 0.5 mA

DC** 0.01 mA 0.05 mA 0.05 mA

Table 10-14 Type CF Applied Part Leakage Current Limits - Surgical Probes and ECG Connections

Country Normal Condition Open Ground Open Neutral

USA 0.01 mA 0.05mA 0.05 mA

Other 0.01 mA 0.05 mA 0.05 mA

Table 10-15 ISO (on Dale 600) and Mains Applied (on Dale 601) Limits***

Probe Type Measurement

BF 5 mA

CF 0.05 mA



1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM

10-7-3 Outlet Test - Wiring Arrangement - USA & CanadaTest all outlets in the area for proper grounding and wiring arrangement by plugging in the neon outlet tester and noting the combination of lights that are illuminated. Any problems found should be reported to the hospital immediately and the receptacle should not be used.

NOTE: No outlet tester can detect the condition where the Neutral (grounded supply) conductor and the Grounding (protective earth) conductor are reversed. If later tests indicate high leakage currents, this should be suspected as a possible cause and the outlet wiring should be visually inspected.

Figure 10-1 Typical Outlet Tester



1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM


Measure the resistance from the third pin of the attachment plug to the exposed metal parts of the case. The ground wire resistance should be less than 0.2 ohms. Reference the procedure in the IEC 601-1.1.

10-7-4-1 Meter ProcedureFollow these steps to test the ground wire resistance.

1.) Turn the LOGIQ™ 9 unit OFF.2.) Plug the unit into the meter, and the meter into the tested AC wall outlet.3.) Plug the black chassis cable into the meter's “CHASSIS” connector and attach the black chassis

cable clamp to an exposed metal part of the LOGIQ™ 9 unit.4.) Set the meter's “FUNCTION” switch to the RESISTANCE position.5.) Set the meter's “POLARITY” switch to the OFF (center) position.6.) Measure and record the ground wire resistance.

CAUTION Electric Shock Hazard. The patient must not be contacted to the equipment during this test

Figure 10-2 Ground Continuity Test



1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM


10-7-5-1 DefinitionThis test measures the current that would flow in a grounded person who touched accessible metal parts of the bedside station if the ground wire should break. The test verifies the isolation of the power line from the chassis. The meter is connected from accessible metal parts of the case to ground. Measurements should be made with the unit On and Off, with the power line polarity Normal and Reversed. Record the highest reading.

.

CAUTION Electric Shock Hazard. When the meter's ground switch is OPEN, don't touch the unit!

CAUTION Equipment damage possibility. Never switch the Polarity and the status of Neutral when the unit is powered ON. Be sure to turn the unit power OFF before switching them using the POLARITY switch and/or the NEUTRAL switch. Otherwise, the unit may be damaged.



1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM

10-7-5-2 Generic ProcedureThe test verifies the isolation of the power line from the chassis. The testing meter is connected from accessible metal parts of the case to ground. Measurements should be made with the unit ON and OFF, with the power line polarity Normal and Reversed. Record the highest reading of current.

When using the Microguard or a similar test instrument, its power plug may be inserted into the wall outlet and the equipment under test is plugged into the receptacle on the panel of the meter. This places the meter in the grounding conductor and the current flowing from the case to ground will be indicated in any of the current ranges. The maximum allowable limit for chassis source leakage is shown in Table 10-12.

7.) Follow the test conditions described for respective test points shown in Table 10-16.

8.) Keep a record of the results with other hard copies of Planned Maintenance data kept on site.

Figure 10-3 Set Up for Chassis Source Leakage Current, IEC 601-1 Clause 19 - Continuos Leakage Currents and

Patient, Auxiliary Currents

Table 10-16 Chassis Leakage Current Test Condition

TEST CONDITION

1 Mounting screw for probe receptacle

2 caster support

3 Mounting screw for CRT housing

4 Mounting screw for peripheral plugged into unit

5 Mounting screw for other peripheral powered by unit



1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM

10-7-5-3 Data Sheet for Chassis Source Leakage CurrentThe test passes when all readings measure less than the value shown in Table 10-12. Record all data on the Planned Maintenance Inspection Certificate.

10-7-6 Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage–Lead to Ground

10-7-6-1 DefinitionThis test measures the current which would flow to ground from any of the isolated ECG leads. The meter simulates a patient who is connected to the monitoring equipment and is grounded by touching some other grounded surface. Measurements should be made with the ground open and closed, with power line polarity normal and reversed, and with the ultrasound console Off and On. For each combination the operating controls, such as the lead switch, should be operated to find the worst case condition.

Table 10-17 Typical Data Sheet for Chassis Source Leakage Current

Unit PowerTester Polarity

Switch

Tester Neutral or Ground

Switch

Test 1 Probe

ConnectorTest 2 caster

Test 3 CRT

Optional Test 4

Optional Test 5

Enter Name of tested peripheral here:

ON NORM OPEN

ON NORM CLOSED

ON REV OPEN

ON REV CLOSED

OFF NORM OPEN

OFF NORM CLOSED

OFF REV OPEN

OFF REV CLOSED

CAUTION Equipment damage possibility. Never switch the Polarity when the unit is powered ON. Be sure to turn the unit power OFF before switching the polarity using the POLARITY switch. Otherwise, the unit may be damaged.



1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM

10-7-6-2 Generic ProcedureMeasurements should be made with the ground open and closed, with power line polarity normal and reversed, and with the unit Off and On. For each combination, the operating controls such as the lead switch should be operated to find the worst case condition.

Figure 10-4 Test Circuit for Measuring Non-Isolated Patient Leads

Table 10-18 Testing Power Conditions

ECG Power Meter’s Polarity Switch Meter’s Neutral Switch

ON NORM CLOSED

ON NORM OPEN

ON REVERSE CLOSED

ON REVERSE OPEN

OFF NORM CLOSED

OFF NORM OPEN

OFF REVERSE CLOSED

OFF REVERSE OPEN

POWEROUTLET

H (Black)

N (White)

G (Green)

Internalcircuitry

Insulating surface

Polarity reversing switch(use both positions)

Appliance power switch(use both "off" and "on" positions)

Patient connected leads

The connection is at service entranceor on the supply side of a separatelyderived system

Buildingground

Grounding contact switch (use in both"open" and "closed" positions)

Current meterH = HotN = Neutral (grounded)G = Grounding conductor

H

N

G

Patient lead selector switch (if any)(activated as required)

Appliance

Between each patient lead and ground



1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM

10-7-7 Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage–Lead to LeadReference the procedure in the IEC 60601-1. When using the Dale 600, switch the meter’s function selector to the LEAD-LEAD position. Select and test each of the five ECG lead positions (except ALL) on the LEAD selector, testing each to the power condition combinations found in the table. Record the highest leakage current measured.

10-7-8 Isolated Patient Lead (Sink) Leakage-Isolation TestReference the procedure in the IEC 60601-1. When using the Dale 600, switch the meter’s function selector to the LEAD-ISO. Select the ALL position on the lead selector. Depress the rocker switch to ISO TEST to test lead isolation.

NOTE: It is not necessary to test each lead individually or power condition combinations as required in previous tests.

CAUTION Line voltage is applied to the ECG leads during this test. To avoid possible electric shock hazard, the system being tested must not be touched by patients, users or anyone while the ISO TEST switch is depressed.



1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM

10-7-8-1 Data Sheet for ECG Leakage CurrentThe test passes when all readings measure less than the value shown in the table below. Record all data on the Planned Maintenance Inspection Certificate.

Table 10-19 Maximum Allowance Limit for ECG Leakage Current

AC Power Source

MaximumAllowance Limit

GROUND OPENGROUND CLOSED

Patient Lead to Ground Leakage Current Testand

Patient Lead to Lead Leakage Current Test

115V 10uA 10uA

220/240V 500uA 10uA

Table 10-20 Maximum Allowance Limit for ECG Leakage Current

AC Power Source

MaximumAllowance Limit

Patient Lead Isolation Current Test115V 20uA

220/240V 5mA

Table 10-21 Typical Data Sheet for ECG Leakage Current

ECG Power

Tester Polarity Switch

Tester Ground Switch

Tester Lead Selector

RL RA LA LL C

ON NORM CLOSED

ON REVERSE CLOSED

ON NORM OPEN

ON REVERSE OPEN

OFF NORM CLOSED

OFF REVERSE CLOSED

OFF NORM OPEN

OFF REVERSE OPEN



1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM

10-7-9 Probe Leakage Current Test

10-7-9-1 DefinitionThis test measures the current that would flow to ground from any of the probes through a patient who is being scanned and becomes grounded by touching some other grounded surface.

NOTE: Some leakage current is expected on each probe, depending on its design. Small variations in probe leakage currents are normal from probe to probe. Other variations will result from differences in line voltage and test lead placement. It is abnormal if no leakage current is measured. If no leakage current is detected, check the configuration of the test equipment.

10-7-9-2 Test Equipment

Table 10-22 Test Equipment kits (Chapter 10 LOGIQ™ 9 Proprietary Service Manual)

Kit Description Contents

46-285652G1

Dale 601 - ULTRASOUND SAFETY ANALYZER FIELD KIT

-for 120V unit

• ELECTRICAL SAFETY ANALYZER, DALE, MODEL 601 for 120V unit• Vendor MODEL 600/100 8FT CHASSIS GROUND CABLE• Vendor MODEL 600/102 6FT SALINE BATH GROUND CABLE• Vendor MODEL 600/202 ULTRASOUND PROBE ADAPTER • Vendor MODEL 600/600 SOFT CARRYING CASE• Vendor MODEL 600/900 OPERATORS MANUAL • Vendor MODEL 600/901 LMINATED OPERATORS GUIDE

46-328406G2

Dale 601E - ULTRASOUND SAFETY ANALYZER FIELD KIT

-for 220V unit

• ELECTRICAL SAFETY ANALYZER, DALE, MODEL 601E for 220V unit• Vendor MODEL 600/100 8FT CHASSIS GROUND CABLE• Vendor MODEL 600/101 16FT CHASSIS GROUND CABLE • Vendor MODEL 600/103 8FT CHASSIS GROUND PROBE • Vendor MODEL 600/200 8FT EXTERNAL LEAKAGE GROUND CABLE • #20 WIRE W/MINIGATOR CLIPS, 2 Ft• CARRYING CASE and foam padding• Vendor MODEL 600/900 OPERATORS MANUAL

2113015 ULTRASOUND PROBE LEAKAGE ADAPTER KIT

• LOGIQ FAMILY PROBE ADAPTER• Vendor MODEL 600/202 ULTRASOUND PROBE ADAPTER • Vendor MODEL 600/203 RADIUS/SONOCHROME PROBE LEAKAGE

CURRENT ADAPTER



1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM

10-7-9-2 Test Equipment (cont’d)

Table 10-23 Test Equipment and Accessory Description

Dale Part number Accessory Name Picture Description

Vendor MODEL 600/100

46-285647P2 CHASSIS CABLE

Black coil cord with extended length and black grips.

Used on DALE601/601E to measure earth resistance and enclosure leakage current. Also used as

reference lead for external measurement.

Vendor MODEL600/102

46-285647P4CHASSIS GROUND PROBE

Black coil cord with needle probe for testing receptacles and for

tight spaces.

Also referred to as “Saline Probe” or “Saline Bath Ground Cable”.

Measures earth resistance and enclosure leakage current. Also used

for grounding saline baths for isolation testing of probes.

Used on DALE601/601E. This probe may be substituted for the 600/100

Chassis Cable, and used as a probe instead of a clamp.

Vendor MODEL600/200

46-285647P6

ISO/EXTERNAL LEAKAGE CABLE

Black coiled cord with red grips.

Standard auxiliary cable for external measurements of leakage current and voltage gradient between two

surfaces.Used on DALE601/601E to measure:• Point-to-Point Leakage Current• Probe and Transducer Isolation

CurrentMay only be connected to the female

connector of the Analyzer, labeled EXTERNAL

Vendor MODEL600/202

2107545-2

ULTRASOUND LOGIQ FAMILY ADAPTER

Use during M.A.P. or Isolation test(see Chapter 10 - Meter procedure

using probe adapter)



1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM

10-7-9-3 Generic procedure on Leakage CurrentMeasurements should be made with the ground open and closed, with power line mains polarity normal, and with the unit Off and On. For each combination, the probe must be active to find the worst case condition.

10-7-9-4 Meter procedure using probe adapterThe ultrasound probe’s imaging area is immersed in a solution along with a grounding probe from the test meter to complete the current path. The solution is a mixture of water and salt. The salt adds free ions to the water, making it conductive. Use a mixture of 1 quart of water with one or more grams of table salt, mixed thoroughly.

Follow these steps to test each probe for leakage current:

1.) Turn the LOGIQ™ 9 unit OFF.2.) Plug the unit’s mains power cord into the test meter, and plug the test meter into the tested AC wall

outlet.3.) Plug the Chassis Ground Probe (saline probe) into the test meter's “CHASSIS” connector.4.) Set the test meter's “FUNCTION” switch to “CHASSIS” (Dale 600) or "ENCLOSURE LEAKAGE"

(Dale 601).5.) Connect the probe to be tested to the LOGIQ™ 9 unit.6.) Put the saline probe and the probe’s probe face (imaging area of the probe) into the saline bath.

7.) Power ON the LOGIQ™ 9 unit.8.) After the LOGIQ™ 9 unit has completed the boot process, select the probe to be tested so it is the

active probe.9.) Depress the LIFT GROUND rocker switch and record the highest current reading.10.)Follow the test conditions described in Table 10-24 for every probe.

The test passes when all readings measure less than the values shown in Table 10-13 and Table 10-14.

11.)Keep a record of the results with other hard copies of Planned Maintenance data using Table 10-24.

Figure 10-5 Set Up for Probe Leakage Current

CAUTION To avoid probe damage and possible electric shock, do not immerse probes into any liquid beyond the level indicated in the probe users manual. Do not touch the probe, conductive liquid or any part of the unit under test while the LIFT GROUND switch is depressed.

SALINE



1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM

10-7-9-4 Meter procedure using probe adapter (cont’d)

CAUTION

PPower off

Equipment damage possibility. Never switch the Polarity or the status of the Neutral when the Ultrasound unit is powered on. Power off the Ultrasound unit, allow the stored energy to bleed down, and turn the circuit breaker off BEFORE switching the POLARITY switch and/or the NEUTRAL switch on the leakage meter to avoid possible power supply damage.

Table 10-24 Typical Data Sheet For Probe Source Leakage Current

Probe Tested:

Unit PowerTester Power Polarity

SwitchTester NEUTRAL

SwitchTester GROUND

Switch Measurement

Start with System Powered OFF

OFF NORMAL OPEN CLOSED

OFF NORMAL OPEN OPEN

OFF NORMAL CLOSED CLOSED

OFF NORMAL CLOSED OPEN

Open Neutral first, then attempt Power ON

ON NORMAL OPEN CLOSED

ON NORMAL OPEN OPEN

Close Neutral. Power System ON, and wait until Probe under test is active, before continuing

ON NORMAL CLOSED CLOSED

ON NORMAL CLOSED OPEN



1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM

10-7-9-5 Meter Procedure Using Probe Adapter to Measure Probe Isolation (Sink) CurrentThe Dale 600/600E provides a method for testing probes independently from the system. The meter utilizes a probe adapter to apply a test potential commonly to all connector pins.

The ultrasound probe’s imaging area is immersed in a solution along with a grounding probe from the test meter to complete the current path. The solution is a mixture of water and salt. The salt adds free ions to the water, making it conductive. Use a mixture of 1 quart of water with one or more grams of table salt, mixed thoroughly.

Follow these steps to test each probe for leakage current.

1.) Plug the test meter into the tested AC wall outlet.2.) Plug the Chassis Ground Probe (saline probe in diagram) into the test meter's “CHASSIS”

connector.3.) Connect the probe to be tested to the LOGIQ Family Probe Adapter.4.) Plug the LOGIQ Family Probe Adapter into the test meter's connector marked “EXTERNAL”.

Figure 10-6 Probe Isolation (Sink) Current Test



1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM

10-7-9-5Meter Procedure Using Probe Adapter to Measure Probe Isolation (Sink) Current (cont’d)5.) Set the meter's “FUNCTION” switch to EXTERNAL (DALE 600) or Mains on Applied Parts (M.A.P.)

(DALE 601) position.6.) Put the Chassis Ground Probe and the probe’s probe face (imaging area of the probe) into the

saline bath.

7.) Depress the ISO TEST (DALE 600) or M.A.P. (DALE 601) ROCKER SWITCH and record the highest current reading.

8.) Test every probe and record in Table 10-25 the test results for every probe.The test passes when all readings measure less than the values in Table 10-15.

9.) Keep a record of the results with other hard copies of Planned Maintenance data..

CAUTION To avoid probe damage and possible electric shock, do not immerse probes into any liquid beyond the level indicated in the probe users manual. Do not touch the probe, conductive liquid or any part of the unit under test while the ISO Test/MAP switch is depressed.

Table 10-25 Probes Tested for Isolation (Sink) Current

Probe Tested Measurement with ISO/Mains Applied



1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM

Section 10-8When There's Too Much Leakage Current...

CHASSIS FAILSCheck the ground on the power cord and plug for continuity. Ensure the ground is not broken, frayed, or intermittent. Replace any defective part.

Tighten all grounds. Ensure star washers are under all ground studs.

Inspect wiring for bad crimps, poor connections, or damage.

Test the wall outlet; verify it is grounded and is free of other wiring abnormalities. Notify the user or owner to correct any deviations. As a work around, check the other outlets to see if they could be used instead.

NOTE: No outlet tester can detect the condition where the white neutral wire and the green grounding wire are reversed. If later tests indicate high leakage currents, this should be suspected as a possible cause and the outlet wiring should be visually inspected.

PROBE FAILSTest the probe in another connector to isolate if the fault lies with the probe or the scanner.

NOTE: Each probe will have some amount of leakage, dependent on its design. Small variations in probe leakage currents are normal from probe to probe. Other variations will result from differences in line voltage and test lead placement. The maximum allowable leakage current for body surface contact probe differs from inter-cavity probe. Be sure to enter the correct probe type in the appropriate space on the check list.

If excessive leakage current is slot dependent, inspect the system connector for bent pins, poor connections, and ground continuity.

If the problem remains with the probe, replace the probe.

PERIPHERAL FAILSTighten all grounds. Ensure star washers are under all ground studs.

Inspect wiring for bad crimps, poor connections, or damage.

STILL FAILSIf all else fails, begin isolation by removing the probes, external peripherals, then the on board ones, one at a time while monitoring the leakage current measurement.

NEW UNITIf the leakage current measurement tests fail on a new unit and if situation can not be corrected, submit a Safety Failure Report to document the system problem. Remove unit from operation.

ECG FAILSInspect cables for damage or poor connections.


10-28 Section 10-8 - When There's Too Much Leakage Current...

1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM

10-8-1 ULTRASOUND INSPECTION CERTIFICATE

ELECTRICAL SAFETY

Final Check. All system covers are in place. System scans with all probes as expected.

Accepted by: ______________________________________________________________________

Electrical Test PerformedMax Value Allowed

Value Measured OK? Comments

Outlet (correct ground &wiring config.)

System Ground Continuity

Chassis Source Leakage Current - Probe

Chassis Source Leakage Current - Caster

Chassis Source Leakage Current - CRT

Patient Lead Source Leakage(Lead to Ground)

Patient Lead Source Leakage(Lead to Lead)

Patient Lead Source Leakage(Isolation)

Peripheral 1 Leakage Current

Peripheral 1Ground Continuity





PROBES

Probe Number (from previous page)

Max Value Allowed

Max Value Measured OK? Comments

Probe 1:

Probe 2:

Probe 3:

Probe 4:

Probe 5:

Probe 6:

Probe 7:

Probe 8:

Probe 9:



1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM

Section 10-9Site Log

Table 10-26 Site Log

Date Service person Problem Comments


10-30 Section 10-9 - Site Log

1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM

Table 10-26 Site Log (Continued)

Date Service person Problem Comments


Index Index - I

1/18/10L9_IX.FM

Numerics3-D Externals, 9-34

AAC Power PWB, 5-72Acoustic Noise Output, 3-11Acquisition Diagnostics, 7-19Adjustment

Z-Release Cable, 6-8AGP Video Card - DVI Video to the DGVIC Card, 5-35, 5-40Air Flow Control, 5-79Air Flow Distribution, 5-79Application Software

Upgrading, 8-49, 8-61Application Software Load, 8-44Automatic Troubleshooting, 7-19

BB/M Mode Processor (BMP) Board, 5-18B/M-Mode Checks

Functional Checks, 4-14Back End Processor, 5-22, , 5-27, 5-34, 5-39

BEP3, 5-34, , 5-39Inputs, 5-25Outputs, 5-26Theory, 5-22, 5-27, 5-34, 5-39

BackupMedia, 8-18Patient Database, 4-22Preset Configurations, 4-22

Basic MeasurementsFunctional Checks, 4-16

Battery, 8-12, , 8-16BEP, 8-7, 8-10, 8-13

Battery Pack Replacement, 8-4Internal Storage Devices, 5-36, 5-41Power Off Path, 5-45Power On, 5-44Power On Path, 5-44

BEP3Inputs, 5-37, 5-42Outputs, 5-38, 5-43

Block DiagramSimple System, 5-5

BMP BoardGeneral Description, 5-18

Boot Up, 3-8, 4-6

BrakeAdjustment, 6-15

Brake ArmAdjustment, 6-13

Brake Pedalwarning, 3-2

BrakesFunctional Checks, 4-28

CCalibration Utilities, 7-23CD-ROM

Handling Tips, 8-18Media Requirements, 8-18

CE Compliance, 1-22CFM and PWD Modes

Functional Checks, 4-15Common Diagnostics, 7-30Configuration, 5-88Connecting USB Line Printer, 3-24Connectivity

Settings, 8-17Worksheet, 3-22

Console Lock Assembly Replacement, 8-70Console Weight, 3-11Contact Information, 1-23Control Panel, 4-3Customer Assistance, 1-23

DDangerous Procedure Warnings, 1-18Diagnostics, 5-86, , 7-18

Acquisition, 7-19Common, 7-30

Direction LockFunctional Checks, 4-28

Disposal, 8-12, 8-16DVD Media Requirements, 8-18

EEBM Board, 5-19Electrical

requirements, 2-2Safety, 1-17

Electrostatic Discharge Warning, 1-22EMI Protection, 3-7

INDEX


Index - II -

1/18/10L9_IX.FM

EQ BoardBasic Functions, 5-17General Description, 5-16

Equalization (EQ) Board, 5-16Ethernet Signal, 5-67External I/O, 5-65

Bi-directional Signals, 5-66Input Signals, 5-65Location in the Unit, 5-65Output Signals, 5-67

EZBackup/Move, 8-18, 8-19

FFacility Features

desired, 2-7required, 2-7

Frog LegAngle Adjustment, 8-92

Front End ProcessorPower Supply Board, 5-8Simple Theory, 5-7

Front End Subsystem, 5-9Functional Checks, 4-1

B/M-Mode Checks, 4-14Basic Measurements, 4-16Brakes, 4-25, 4-28CFM and PWD Modes, 4-15Control Panel, 4-3Image Management, 4-13Locks, 4-28Mechanical, 4-25Monitor Display, 4-5Peripherals, 4-24Probes/Connector Usage, 4-11Required Equipment, 4-1Touch Panel, 4-4

GGas Shock Replacement, 8-74Gas Spring

Adjustment, 6-8Gathering Trouble Data, 7-3General Cleaning, 10-8Global Service User Interface, 5-80

Error Logs Page, 5-82Service Home Page, 5-81

Global Service User Interface (GSUI), 5-80

HHazard Icons, 1-10Human Safety, 1-16

II/O Ports, 3-17Image Management

Functional Checks, 4-13Guide, 8-18

Inrush Current, 2-2Installation

average time, 3-2Internal I/O, 5-55

Connections, 5-57connections, 5-57Fuses, 5-58Inputs, 5-59Jumpers and Dip-switches, 5-58LEDs, 5-58Location in the Unit, 5-58Outputs, 5-61

Internal Storage Devices, 5-36, 5-41

LLabel Locations, 1-18LEDs SCB, 5-14Line Printer

Connecting, 3-24Loading Software

Application, 8-44Base Image, 8-26

Login Screen for Global Service User Interface, 5-80Logs, 5-83

MManaging Patient Data and Presets, 8-18Mechanical Checks

Operator I/O, 4-25Mechanical Descriptions, 5-76

Monitor, 5-76Top Console Positioning, 5-76

Mechanical Safety, 1-16Meter Procedure Using Probe Adapter, 10-23Models Covered, 1-3, 9-2


Index - III

1/18/10L9_IX.FM

Modem, 5-69Inputs/Outputs, 5-69LEDs, 5-70Location in the Unit, 5-69

Monitor, 5-64Counter-balance Adjustment, 6-4Tilt, 6-4Tilt Adjustment, 6-4

Monitor DisplayFunctional Checks, 4-5

OOperator I/O

Emergency Release Procedure, 6-12Operator Panel

position warning, 3-2

PP4 Key Function, 7-13Patient I/O, 5-54PC Diagnostics, 7-31

(Interactive Tests), 7-32PCI Cards, 5-35, , 5-40PCI DGVIC and ADD Cards, 5-35, 5-40PCVIC Card, 5-23, 5-28Peripherals, 5-68

Functional Checks, 4-24Physical Dimensions, 3-11PM INSPECTION CERTIFICATE, 10-28Power Distribution, 5-71

Basic Overall AC, 5-71Power Off, 3-9

Procedure, 4-9Power On, 3-8, 4-6Power Requirements, 2-2

electrical, 2-2stability, 2-3

Power Stability Requirements, 2-3Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure -BEP 2, 8-7Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure -BEP 3, 8-10, 8-13Power-up Procedures

Voltage Settings, 3-6Preparing the Unit for Installation, 3-6Preset Data, 8-18Probe

Leakage Current Test, 10-21Probe Connector Cleaning, 10-10Probe Leakage Current Test, 10-21Probes, 3-21

Probes/Connector UsageFunctional Checks, 4-11

Product Icons, 1-11PS Battery Operation, 5-35, 5-40

RRear Wheel Brakes

Adjustment, 6-16Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment, 3-4Regulatory, 6-1Release Lock Assembly

Replacement Procedure, 8-70, , 8-72RF Amplifier Board

Theory, 5-10

SSafety

reminders, 3-3Safety Considerations, 1-16Scan Control Board

High Level Features, 5-14Scan Control Board (SCB), 5-13SCB LED, 5-14Screen Captures, 7-13Service Adjustments, 6-1Service Home Page, 5-81Service Login, 5-80Service Manual

Purpose of, 1-1Service Platform, 5-79Shut Down

Procedure, 4-9Shutdown, 3-9Software

Application Load, 8-44Base Image Load, 8-26

System Features, 4-3System Maintenance, 10-5System Manufacturer, 1-24System Setup, 8-65

TTheory

Front End SubSystem, 5-9General, 5-2RF Amplifier Board, 5-10XDIF Board, 5-9

Time Delay (TD) Boards, 5-12Top Console, 5-63

See Operator I/O, 5-63Top Plane Board, 5-9


Index - IV -

1/18/10L9_IX.FM

Touch PanelFunctional Checks, 4-3, 4-4

Trouble Image with Logs, 7-4Troubleshooting

Gathering Trouble Data, 7-3Screen Captures, 7-13Trouble Image with Logs, 7-4Vital System Information, 7-3

UUnpacking the Equipment, 3-4Upgrading Application Software, 8-49, 8-61USB Adapter Setup, 5-32User-Defined Backup Protocols, 8-22Utilities, 5-89

VVideo

Specifications, 3-20Voltage Settings, 3-6

WWarnings and Cautions, 1-16

XXDIF Board

Theory, 5-9

ZZ-Release Cable

Adjustment, 6-8

© 2002-2010, General Electric Company.GE Healthcare - GE Medical Systems Ultrasound and Primary Care Diagnostics, LLC.9900 Innovation DriveWauwatosa, Wisconsin 53226USA

www.gehealthcare.com

logiq 9 proprietary manual - 2294854-100, rev 9medsensor.ru/files/ge/us/logiq_9_sm.pdf · ge...

Documents